TPSP 1P Professional Course Master Document v8.2

Travelport Worldspan
Using Travelport Smartpoint 8.2
For Travel Professionals
Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

1
Travelport
Revision History
Date Version Authors Reason / Description of Change
Dec 14 V5.4 Learning Modularized for download speed/customer navigation
Solutions ease.
Dec 14 V5.4 Learning 5.0 Enhancements to include Rich Content and Branding,
Solutions Ancillary services, paid seats.
June 2015 V6.0 Learning 6.0 Enhancements to include:
Solutions Branded fares and ancillaries (Rich Content and Branding)
from Availability and Fare Quote
Bringing the availability and shopping flows together for
Direct Payment Carriers
Ability to use debit cards and agency form of payment in
the Lowcost Selling screen
Using cryptic commands to launch the ancillary shopping
cart
Icons and separator lines removed from fare shop and
availability screens, to speed up screen rendering.
September V6.1 Learning Access to SeatGuru.com content
2015 Solutions Dual currency for ancillaries
Private fare indicators within the brands and ancillaries
screen
November V6.5 Learning Hotel address, Multiple city, Air defaults, seats, Custom
2015 Solutions itinerary and upsell to include tax
March 2016 V7.0 Learning Custom Itinerary and View trip
Solutions Seats Exit
Private Fares
Ancillaries Name
May 2016 V7.1 Learning New drop down menu for HELP, RESERVATION &
Solutions DOCUMENTATION
Cars: new screens to show Coupon Number
Hotels: Removed reference to Sponsored & Featured
property
October V7.2 Learning Promotional rate in e pricing, hotel line numbers,
2016 Solutions graphical seat maps upgrade, DL paid seats, Brands and
ancillaries from sponsored flights
April 2017 V7.3 Learning 7.3 Enhancements include:
Solutions - Destination Management Organization (DMO) ads
- Retained custom screen size
- Autofill city codes/names for Air/Car/Hotel
Availability
- Branded fares and ancillaries text headlines
- Carrier ticketing frees (OB fees)
- Penalties and cancellations quick access
- Promotional fares indicator
- Hotel map improved
- Graphical Hotel Headline Ads show Dynamic Rates

2
Travelport
Date Version Authors Reason / Description of Change

August 2017 V7.4 Learning 7.4 Enhancements include:
Solutions - New Hotel Map with links to Details/Rates/Images
- Hotel Text Headline Ads
- Sunset of Hotel Interactive Map script
- Post-book add/modify seats for low cost
carriers/IndiGo/GDS carriers
- Display on-time performance indicator in air
availability
- Fare rules from Fare Basis Code
- Override Endorsement in Involuntary Exchange
script
- New and updated Car and Hotel logos
- Training Demonstrations accessed from the Help
Menu
January V8.0 Learning 8.0 Includes enhancements to seat maps

2018 Solutions
May 2018 V8.1 Learning 8.1 Enhancements include:
Solutions - New screen layout for Custom Itinerary and Data
Protection Notice
- New screen for Car Booking Tool
- Branded fares – Brand fare modifier included in
pricing response and displayable in Brands and
Ancillaries screens.
- Enable to set default for Fare Type in ePricing
screen

3
Travelport
Contents
Module 1: Getting Started

Module 2: Checking Flight Availability and Selling Flights
Module 3: Building a PNR
Module 4: Optional Fields
Module 5: Working with World Files
Module 6: Fares Display
Module 7: Pricing an itinerary
Module 8: Working with Manually Priced Fares
Module 9: Fare Shopping
Module 10: Ancillary Services
Module 11: Issuing Travel Documents
Module 12: Selling Rental Cars
Module 13: Selling Hotels
Module 14: Managing PNRs in Queue
Module 15: History and Troubleshooting
Module 16: Time Savers
Module 17: Direct Payment Carrier Bookings
Appendix A: Answer Key
Appendix B: Format Summaries
Appendix C: Global Reference System and Timatic

4
Welcome to Worldspan for Travel Professionals using the Travelport Smartpoint

course book.
This is designed for both Learning Travelport Worldspan and Moving to Travelport
Worldspan students.
Throughout this course book, there are references to HELP and MyTravelport where
you can find more information on each topic.
HELP provides a list of formats. MyTravelport provides more extensive answers to
questions about Travelport Worldspan products and services.
As both resources are constantly updated, some references may occasionally
change.
Introduction
Travelport Smartpoint has been created as an add-on application for Travelport
Worldspan that combines the cryptic environment with point and click navigation.
Graphical user interfaces (GUIs) reduce keystrokes, speed up the booking process
and reduce call handling time.
Learning Travelport Worldspan Class Objectives

Upon completion of this course you will be able to:
 Locate and display information from Travelport Worldspan online resources
 Create, change, and retrieve PNRs
 Quote and store air fares based on customers’ needs
 Issue tickets and itineraries to meet customers’ needs
 Sell, modify, and cancel rental cars and hotel rooms

1
Moving to Worldspan Class Objectives

Upon completion of this course you will be able to:
 Create, change, and retrieve PNRs
 Quote and store air fares based on customers’ needs
 Locate and display information from Travelport Worldspan online resources
 Issue tickets and itineraries to meet customers’ needs
 Sell, modify, and cancel rental cars and hotel rooms
 Use queues to manage PNRs for reservation follow-up
 Process exchanges, service fees and EMDs
 Troubleshoot PNRs and get help using Travelport Worldspan tools
 Identify platform products and advanced Travelport Worldspan products
that enhance job performance
Module Objectives
On completion of this module you will be able to:
 Launch Travelport Smartpoint and Sign-on to Travelport Worldspan
 Use Command Shortcuts
 Work in the Smartscreen Terminal Window
 Identify Elements in the Menu Bar
 Use the PNR Viewer and Smart Panel Window
 Access Online Help
 Access MyTravelport and MyLearning
 Sign-off from Travelport Worldspan
2
Launching Travelport Smartpoint and Signing-on to Travelport Worldspan

Launch Travelport Smartpoint by clicking on the Icon or the URL.
A Log In page displays where you fill-in your Login ID and Password.
Box/Link: Explanation:
Login ID/Password During the setup process, a Login ID is created for

you and is usually your agency’s SID (pseudo ID)
followed by your first initial and last name.
When the Login ID is created, a temporary password
is sent to you via an email allowing you to access
Travelport Smartpoint. Once the temporary
password is entered, the system prompts you to
create a new password for future logins. The
Password field is case sensitive.
As a security feature, Travelport Smartpoint allows

each Login ID only one access at a time. No one else
can use your Login ID while you are logged in.
If you enter your password incorrectly five times

your password is locked, and you must contact your
agency’s office manager or Travelport Worldspan
Helpdesk to have it reset.
Self Serve The Self-Serve display shows examples of software
updates available for you to download.
Tool Kit The Tool Kit provides a link to information relating to

installing Travelport Worldspan.
Lost Password If you forget your password, select the Lost Password
link and an e-mail will be sent to you with a
temporary password. After logging in with the

3
temporary password you will be prompted to change

the password.
The login ID and email address on the Forgot
Password screen is limited to a maximum of 250
characters.
Travelport Smartpoint provides:

 The Smartscreen window on the left of the screen is where you will enter
formats and receive responses.
 Up to 10 reservation windows, with six agent work areas are available in
each window.
 The PNR Viewer window on the right of the screen refreshes the Passenger
Name Record (PNR) as it is being created. There are also other tabs for
displaying the Smart Panel, History, My Links and News.
Logging in automatically launches the Travelport Smartpoint application. You need

to sign into Worldspan using an agent sign on, a duty code and a password. The
agent sign-on and duty code will be assigned by your agency manager and a
temporary password will be e-mailed to you.
Note: When you sign on for the first time, you will use the temporary password and
the system prompts you to change it to a permanent one. You are also prompted to
create a keyword, which is not used in the sign-on, but is required as a security check
if you forget your password and need to reset it.
4
Creating your Password

Passwords must be:
 Seven to ten characters in length.
 Alpha numeric (at least one letter and one number)
 Changed every 90 days
Creating your Keyword

CREATE KEYWORD USING BSIK/nnnn/nnnn
 Your keyword must be 4 - 6 characters and can consist of any alpha and/or
numeric characters
 Choose a keyword that is very easy to remember, as you need to enter your
keyword for authentication if you forget your password
 You are never required to change your keyword, but you can if necessary
Travelport Worldspan prompts you when you need to assign yourself a new
password. You cannot use the same password for five consecutive changes and you
cannot use the following as your password:
 Agent sign-on
 Agent name
 Days of week
 Names of months
You are now live in Travelport Worldspan and ready to work.
Switching between Travelport Smartpoint and Worldspan Go!

If you need to switch between the Smartscreen and the terminal emulator screen,
this can be easily done by clicking on the Switch icon located next to the Question
mark in the top right-hand corner of your screen.
When you click on the icon the screen will immediately switch to the terminal
emulator screen. Clicking on it again will take you back to the Smartscreen.

5
Moving between Terminal Work Areas

Travelport Worldspan gives you multiple areas so you can work on more than one
PNR simultaneously.
These work areas are called Agent Assembly Areas. There are five areas, A, B, C, D, E
and F.
Work area A is the default and is highlighted at the top of your Window. You can
click back and forth within the five work areas.
The work area that is active is highlighted in white (area C).

Note: The manual entry to change the work area is the letter B followed by the area
you wish to access. For example, BA, BB, BC, BD, BE, or BF.
When you hover your mouse over an area the Work Area Information displays
advising which area you are active in (ACT) and which areas are suspended (SUSP).
You are also advised if you have a partial PNR in one or more of the areas.
Additionally, if a completed PNR is present in one of the areas, the record locator
and lead traveler name is displayed.
6
Using Command Shortcuts
The following table lists some command shortcuts that you may use when working in
the Terminal window.
Shortcut Function
F1 Opens MyTravelport
F2 XI (cancel itinerary)
F3 0A (book ARNK segment - Arrival Not Known
F4 Clears all Res Windows
F5 Display History Tab
F6 Today’s date
F7 Scroll through the Res Windows
F8 Moves between Res Windows in a split screen
F9 Clears active Res Window
F10 E (End Transaction)
F11 Move Up (MU)
F12 Move Down (MD)
Tab Moves the cursor to the next tab stop
Shift + Tab Moves the cursor to the previous tab stop
Language Translator App

Travelport Smartpoint has a valuable feature that can be used to help transition
from one GDS system to another. The Translator App allows you to type the cryptic
command of a different GDS and Travelport Worldspan will translate this into the
correct format. This is ideal if you are moving from another GDS to Travelport
Worldspan.
To access the Translator App, you need to log out of Smartpoint, and click the Self-
Serve option on the Log In page.

7
The Self-Serve page opens, and you see the Option to Download the Worldspan
Translator App, double click on this and install using the instructions.
Once you have installed the Translator App you need to log back into Smartpoint.
The system can translate from Galileo, Abacus, Amadeus, Sabre and Apollo.
Typing a question mark “?” In Smartpoint will bring up all the entries you need. For
example, if you type ?GDS*1G this will prepare the system to accept Galileo entries
and translate.
Please see MyTravelport AN8571 for a list of entries which are accepted.
Working with Macros

Macros are pre-recorded sequences of keystrokes allowing frequently used inputs to
be made quickly and accurately. There are two types of Macros, Office and Personal
Macros.
Office Macros
Office Macros are a set of recorded keystrokes which are stored in a single file and
are available for playback by everyone in the office using the same SID.
When an Office Macro is created it is given a name and may have a keystroke
assigned to it.
Office Macros are played back by displaying and selecting from the list of Office
Macros, or by using the assigned keystroke:
Ctrl + Shift + assigned keystroke
8
Personal Macros
Personal Macros are a set of personally recorded keystrokes and may be created and
stored by an individual.
When a Personal Macros is created it is given a name and may have a keystroke
assigned to it. Personal Macros are played back by displaying and selecting from the
list of Personal Macros, or by using the assigned keystroke:
Shift + assigned keystroke
Both Office Macros and Personal Macros may also be displayed by right clicking in
the Smartscreen.
In the example above, Office Macros are available, but no Personal Macros have
been created as the option is greyed out.
Hover over Office Macros to display the list.

9
Example screen for Office Macros:
Notice that if keystrokes have been assigned to a macro, the entry is shown next to
the macro.
Select the Macro you wish to run by clicking on the name of the Macro.
Working in the Smartscreen

The Travelport Smartpoint Smartscreen supports 10 Reservation Windows that can
be configured independently.
To change your colors in Smartpoint go to the Settings Menu and select My
Preferences.
From the My Preferences tabs, select Theme
The options for the Smartscreen display:
10
The default is white but there is a choice of eight different themes. Scroll down to
view all the options.
If you wanted to change the colour, select the radio button next to the desired
colour and then select APPLY. A prompt is received advising that you must log out
and log back in again for the theme to be applied.
The default is to ‘Apply the theme to all Terminal Windows’, but you have the choice
to remove this tick if you do not wish to apply the change to the terminal windows.

11
Custom screen size

You can customize the screen sizes in the Smart Panel by selecting the vertical bar
and dragging it to the required position. When you log out and log in again, the
settings are retained, even if you log in on a different computer.
Screen example:
The Smart Panel automatically resizes if one of the Top 10 Scripts is launched and it
does not fit the panel size which you have saved. Once the script is closed, the panel
size reverts back to the original panel size.
Screen example for Air Booking Tool script:
The News, My Links menus are launched using the tabs at the top right-hand side of
the screen and the Notes and Calendar are launched using the icons also located at
the top right-hand side of the screen.
12
In the My Links panel, there is a section called Recent Scripts. To customize the
view, select the pencil icon.

13
The options are to display the last 5 or 10 scripts or keep them hidden.
To view the calendar, select the calendar icon.
The calendar is a scalable floating window which you can resize by dragging the
corner of the calendar to the required size. To change the number of months that
are displayed, you can select 2, 4, 6, or 8 from the drop-down list.
When the calendar is re-opened, it remembers the last configuration.
14
To open the Notes, select the icon at the top right-hand side of the screen.
The Notes enable you to save text and like the calendar can be moved to another
position on the screen. Next time it is opened it will display in the new location.
You can delete any notes by selecting the trash can or save your notes by selecting
the Save to File icon. Then Save As a Text Document (*.txt) to your computer.
Smartscreen Icons

15
Screen explanation:
Item: Explanation:
The menu items.
Split Screen Icon
Res Windows
Quick Command Icon
MyTravelport
Shop ancillary services
Menu Options
Across the top of the application there are several Menu items.
Selecting an item displays a drop-down list of the scripts contained in the Menu for
example, the RESERVATIONS menu will give you access to scripts that will allow you
to search for and book via fill in format search screens such as cars and hotels.
16
The WORLD FILES menu gives you access to scripts that will allow you to
copy/display/create/delete and modify World Files.
The FARES & PRICING menu provides scripts to display fares and rules and allow you
to do manual pricing and e-pricing, and price a booked itinerary.
The DOCUMENTATION menu enables you to access scripts to Ticket a PNR, issue an
EMD-S, access ViewTrip plus many more options.

17
The INFORMATION menu has a list of scripts that give lots of different information
including Interline Agreements, Weather, and Timatic etc.
The SMART TOOLS menu lists a range of scripts that give you access to things such as
the Calendar, Currency Conversion, the Default Records, and Past Date PNRs. Other
Scripts will allow you to run reports and configure printers.
18
Finally, the SETTINGS menu will give you access to scripts that allow you to set your
screen preferences and may give you other setting options depending upon the
capabilities defined by your manager.
Split Screen Icon
To split the screen, select the icon to the left of Res Window 1. Pressing it again will
return you to one screen.

19
Res Windows
You have access to 10 Res Window and they are accessed by simply selecting the Res
window number allowing you to access information in one window without
disturbing your work in another window.
Each of your reservation windows can be named and you do have the option to add
a second SID or a different host connection ID, by clicking on the Settings Menu and
choosing My Preferences and Mapping.
Quick Keys Icon

The hash symbol (or end item) next to the question mark in the Smartscreen gives
you access to the Quick Keys entries.
You can either type the entry for example #AIR to display the Air Booking Tool script
or click on the link for the script to display.
20
Scroll down to view the rest of the Quick Keys which will help you navigate
Smartpoint.
You have quick keys to access Calendar, Notes and Smart Panel. For example, Alt +Q
will always return to the input box/entry field allowing you to continue with your
commands.
MyTravelport Icon
Clicking on the Question Mark will give you a direct link into MyTravelport.
Shop ancillary services

21
The shopping cart is used when booking ancillary services for example extra bags or
lounge access. An active PNR with segments must be booked prior to clicking on this
icon.
Using the PNR Viewer Window
PNR Display Buttons in PNR Viewer:
The PNR Viewer Window provides an instant view of the PNR. It shows all relevant
PNR information and is grouped in sections that can be accessed via a simple mouse
click on the associated Quick Access Button.
Example PNR:
Note: Hover the cursor over a Quick Access button to see which PNR field it will
access:
Except for passenger names and itinerary, all PNR fields can be displayed at any time
via the configurable PNR Quick Access blue buttons.
Select a Quick Access button to display all data applicable to that PNR field.
22
Once a specific field is retrieved, the information is displayed below the Quick Access
Buttons and it can be closed by selecting the same Quick Access button.
How to set up the Quick Access buttons is covered in later in the module under
Button Setting Icon.
PNR Viewer Window Icons

The PNR Viewer Window provides the following icons:
Screen explanation:
Item: Explanation:
Refresh PNR icon (equivalent to *R)
Create/Modify PNR script
Clone PNR functionality
PNR History (equivalent to *H)
PNR Display Buttons settings
Queue Sort.
Shop Ancillary Services

23
The Pencil Icon

Selecting the pencil icon launches the Create/Modify PNR Script.
This script allows you to add your mandatory booking fields such as names, phone
fields and a ticketing field. You also have access to add optional fields such as
Special Service Requests (SSR) and Other Service Information (OSI), remarks and
email address.
Clone PNR Icon

Clicking on the Clone PNR icon displays a list of drop-down options to choose which
items of the PNR that you wish to clone.
Button Settings Icon

In the PNR Viewer you have various buttons that are displayed as standard
(depending on your agency set up) but you have the facility to change this and add
other buttons that may be required.
To configure the buttons, select the Buttons icon.
24
Here you can choose the buttons you wish to add to the PNR Viewer from a list of
options, simply tick the box of the option that you wish to select and click OK.
If you scroll down to Custom Buttons you can add any buttons you wish to see that
are not preset. Simply type the command that you would like to see, tick the box
and click on OK.
You can add up to five custom buttons.
For example, here we have added *R as a Custom Button, this will now appear in all
bookings viewed in the PNR Viewer window.
The Smart Panel

In addition to the PNR Viewer you also have the Smart Panel in the top right-hand
side of the screen.

25
The Smart Panel is where you access recently viewed scripts and the Top 10 rated
scripts.
It is also where the scripts themselves populate. For example, if you click on the Car
Booking Tool script this will launch in the Smart Panel.
The History Tab
The final tab in the top right-hand side of the screen is the History tab, which is a
replay function, allowing you to access and resend the last 250 entries you have
made.
This is also activated by using the F5 button on the entry box to recall the last entry.
26
Clicking on History, will display the recent entries on the right, you can then tick to
select all or certain entries.
Once you have selected your entries the send icon appears at the top right of the
screen. Select the icon and the chosen entries are re-sent to the host.
You can also click on the Expand/Collapse All column, which will show the response
received from the host for that entry.
You can amend any entry in the History tab by selecting and amending, then press
the enter key to resend the information. The History tab can also recall macros and
ScriptPro script entries.
27
My Links
The My Links Tab gives you the ability to establish links to your favorite tools. With a
single click you can activate an underlying macro, script, Go Res tool function; Res
help item, homepage item or even a website. Some links may already exist as
defaults depending on your agency set up.
28
My Links Icons
The My Links Window provides the following icons:
Screen explanation:
Item: Explanation:
Add a Link
Edit a Link
Delete a Link
Re-arrange Links
Link Help
Add a Link
To add a New Link, click on the + symbol. For example, you may often access a
website and by using My Links you can save the URL as a link.
In this example BA Travel Trade website is added to my links.
1. Give the link a label or name (e.g. BA Trade)

2. Select the type of link (choose Web site for this example)
3. Click NEXT
4. Add the URL (www.britishairways.com/trade/home/public/en_us)

5. Click on FINISHED (or BACK to change the information.)

29
The Link label now appears on the list and is displayed by selecting the link.
Edit a Link
To edit a link, click on the Pencil Icon, and select the link you wish to edit from the
drop-down list. Then, click on the NEXT button.
30
Edit the link name, or type of link, and select NEXT. You can amend the URL
information if required and click on FINISHED when you have made your changes.
The new updated link appears at the bottom of the My Links list as before.
Delete a Link
To delete a link, click on the Trash can icon, and select the link you wish to delete
from the drop-down list. Once you have made your selection click on NEXT.
A Pop-up window appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the
selected link.
Click OK to confirm or CANCEL to change your request.

31
Re-arrange Links
To re-arrange the order of the Links, click on the Arrows icon and a list of all links
appears. Click on the link you wish to move.
Click on PREVIOUS or NEXT to move the chosen link to your desired position in the
list. Finally, click FINISHED.
Link Help
Clicking the Question Mark icon takes you to Link Help pages within Travelport
Worldspan. You can then select the area you require help for detailed information.
32
News
The news tab displays news pages that the Worldspan team would like you to be
aware of, for example it may be that you are required to download the latest version
of software so it’s important to access the news pages for recent news.
To read an article, click on the “Read More “to expand the news item.
Icons in top right of the screen
Screen explanation:
Item: Explanation:
Notes
Calendar
Custom Scripts
Recent PNRs

33
Related Scripts
Switch Screen
Help
Lock
Logout
Custom Scripts
Clicking on the Custom Scripts icon may display a list of customized scripts which are
accessible in your SID. For details of customized scripts, check with your office
manager.
Recent PNRs
Travelport Smartpoint allows you to view and subsequently display up to 40 recently
viewed PNRs, by clicking on the Pages icon in the top right-hand corner of the
screen.
The display shows the record locator and first named passenger in the PNR, you can
select the relevant PNR by clicking on it.
Related Scripts
34
When you make an entry, selecting the Related Scripts icon shows a list of scripts
associated to the entry made. There may be a single script listed, or multiple scripts.
Selecting a script from the list launches the script in the Smart Panel.
For example, after doing an availability search in the Smartscreen, clicking on the
Related Scripts icon shows the link to the Air and Rail Booking Tool Script.
When an entry is made, the Related Script icon appears in the Smartscreen as well.
Here only one script is associated to the icon. Clicking the icon launches the
corresponding script in the Smart Panel.
For example, after adding a request for availability in the Smartscreen, the Related
Scripts icon in the Smartscreen, launches the Air Booking Tool script in the Smart
Panel.
Switch Screen
As previously mentioned clicking on the Switch Screen icon will take you into the
Worldspan terminal emulator, clicking on the icon again takes you back to
Smartpoint.

35
Help
Selecting Help icon gives you access to MyTravelport along with links to the Help
Pages, Inside Travelport Smartpoint, eNett VAN and Training Demonstrations.
Padlock
The Padlock icon can be used to lock your set if you wish to step away from your
desk. Upon your return you will need to sign back in to your set.
Logout
Selecting the Key icon logs you out of Smartpoint.
36
Accessing Online Help

There are help and information pages within the Worldspan system. The HELP pages
assist with system inputs and formats, and the INFO pages give explanations and
screen examples.
The HELP system is continuously revised to ensure that new or updated information
is available.
The following are some examples.
Format: Explanation:
HELP A Display Help Index of subjects beginning with A
HELP FARES Display Help Index for Fares
HELP 7T Display Help pages for format code 7T
INFO A Display Info Index of subjects beginning with A
INFO SEAT Display Info Index for SEATS
INFO 5- Display Info pages for format code 5-

37
Partial screen response:
Further information can then be accessed on the HELP and INFO pages by selecting
the specific topic, or by tabbing to the topic and entering. For example, ACCESSPLUS
AIRLINE INDEX which is filed under HELP AP AIR
38
Scrolling
When accessing pages of information such as HELP or INFO pages, not all
information may be visible on one screen. The following scrolling entries are
available:
MD Move down
MU Move up
MD6 Move down 6 lines
MU10 Move up 10 lines
MB Move to bottom of a display
MT Move to top of a display
Accessing MyTravelport
MyTravelport is Travelport's new single sign-on customer portal for information,
support and services. It is a fast, easy-to-use tool that enables you to find answers to
your questions using the Search Knowledge base.
You can access MyTravelport on any device, at any time, and anywhere you can
connect to the internet.
Using MyTravelport, you can raise a support request, update it, monitor its status,
close it, and reopen it if necessary.
If you need a password reset for your sign on, it is accomplished quickly through
automation.
The first time you access MyTravelport, you create an account. On subsequent
visits, log on with your User ID and password.
Login or register
Go to MyTravelport at https://my.travelport.com
The MyTravelport login page is displayed.

39
Depending on how your organization is configured, you may already have credentials
to log in or you may be required to self-register. Remember to use the same email
address you added to your sign on.
If you have credentials
Enter your email address that has been registered at MyTravelport and your
password. Press SIGN IN.
Note that passwords are case sensitive. If you have forgotten your password, select
Forgot your password? to have an email sent so that you can reset your password.
If you do not have credentials
If you do not have credentials you may self-register.
Select Create Account.

Complete the MyTravelport registration form:
40
Select I’m not a robot and press REGISTER.
MyTravelport dashboard
These icons appear across the top right. The gear icon opens the Settings
page.

41
The MyTravelport dashboard gives you easy access to knowledge base articles,
service alerts, notifications, support requests, emergency contact information, latest
news and shortcuts.
Alerts
Press the VIEW ALL ALERTS button to view a list of ongoing service alerts. You can
also display those that have recently been resolved.
Support Requests
Press the VIEW ALL MY REQUESTS button to view a list of current/recent support
requests (‘incidents’). Press the CREATE button to create a new one.
42
Shortcuts
At the bottom-right of the dashboard there are shortcuts to other Travelport

products and support items, such as MyLearning.
News
News articles are available at the bottom of the page.
Help
MyTravelport offers comprehensive Help.

Select the Help icon at the top of the screen.
Note there is a link to FAQs and troubleshooting:

43
Searching for answers

To search for answers, either:
 Enter a complete question (How do I add a phone field?) or
 Enter keywords (phone) or
 Enter an answer number
Enter your search text in the box and press the SEARCH KNOWLEDGE BASE button.
Here is an example of the first few questions returned for this search:
44
Read the answers and select the article that best meets your request.
You can filter the response by GDS type and Advisories, Answers, TIPs or Training.

45
You can also select Advanced filters to fine-tune the response:
Here is an example answer:
Notice the answer number under the question. If you need to find the same answer
again, make a note of the answer number. Searching by the number is the fastest
way to find the same answer again.
Alternatively, select the Favorite icon to add the answer to your favorites.
Answers may include graphics, and links to other answers, demos, and documents.
There is also an opportunity to email or print the answer.
46
Providing Feedback
There is also the opportunity for you to provide feedback to Travelport.
Select the Improve answer link and complete the dialogue boxes to suggest changes
to the answer. Your feedback is vital to ensure that Travelport provides answers to
all your important questions.
Please provide feedback on as many questions as you can.

47
How to Determine Airline, City, and Airport Codes

HELP ENCODE
HELP DECODE
You probably will memorize the codes that you use regularly. Others you may need
to encode or decode.
You can use Worldspan to encode and decode airlines, cities and airports (including
some cities that have more than one airport associated with them).
Encode: Convert a name to its assigned code and display additional
information.
Decode: Convert assigned code to its name and display additional
information.
Encoding Airlines
You may need to know the code of an airline that you do not book very often.
Encoding an airline provides you with the airline code and its BSP/IATA number.
To encode an airline name, enter KAC/ followed by the airline name
Example entry: KAC/QANTAS
Example screen response:
Similar Titles List

If the airline name used in an encode format is either misspelled or is one that
Worldspan does not recognize, a Similar Titles list appears. The list includes names
that are similar to the requested format.
Example entry: KAC/QUANTAUS
Decoding Airlines
You may see an airline code in Worldspan that you do not recognize. Decoding an
airline provides you with the airline name and BSP code.
To decode an airline code, type KAD/ followed by the airline code.
Example entry: KAD/AC
48
The following Air Canada information screens appear.
Encoding Cities and Airports
You use city and airport codes to display availability in Worldspan. Like airline codes,
you know the codes for cities and airports to which your customers frequently
travel.
However, you may not always remember those city and airport codes that are
infrequently used. Worldspan can help you encode the city or airport name for
displaying availability.
To determine the three-letter code for a city or airport, enter KC/ followed by the
city or airport name.
Example entry: KC/ROME
Similar City Names List

If you misspell the city name used in an encode format or it matches more than one
city name, a Similar Titles List appears. The list contains names that are similar to
the original format request.
Example entry: KC/BOSTIN

49
Decoding Cities and Airports
You may see a city or airport code that you do not recognize. Or perhaps you need
information regarding a city, such as driving directions to the airport or the airport’s
distance from the city’s downtown area. Decoding a city or airport provides you
with the airport name and additional information.
To determine which city or airport is represented by the code YWG, enter KD/
followed by the city code.
Example entry: KD/YWG
A screen with information for Winnipeg, Manitoba, appears.
Identifying your Subscriber ID/ Pseudo City Code

The Travelport Worldspan system recognises your agency by a Subscriber ID (SID) or
Pseudo city code. You may need to know what this is.
There are two entries that provide your Subscriber ID. The first one we will look at is
B$.
Enter: B$
Screen response:
Note: 1DQ is the agency SID code in this example.

The other entry that provides your Subscriber ID is KGB. This entry also provides
additional information, such as your active/sine in area, duty code, LNIATA of CRT
and more.
Enter KGB
50
Item Explanation:
AREA A Active/sine in area of AAA is the -A- field
DUTY CODE GS Duty code is GS
USER AB Agent’s ID is AB. If an SG duty code is used - the

sine table manager number displays instead of
the agent ID.
COMPANY 1P Company is 1P which is the airline code for

Worldspan
ADDR E0011C LNIATA of CRT is E0011C
Ticketing Date Calculator

You may use Travelport Worldspan to calculate a date for ticketing purposes and for
minimum and maximum stay requirements on an air fare.
For a departure of 13 MAR and a 30-day advance purpose use the following entry.
The last ticketing date is 11Feb
Example entry: 4F.CD13MAR/A30
Sample Entries:
Item: Explanation:
4F.CD01DEC/14 Minimum stay of 14 days with departure

date 01 DEC
4F.CD28MAY//45 Maximum stay of 45 days with departure

date of 28 MAY
4F.CD12JAN/SU/60/A7 Combination Entry – Minimum stay of Sat

night, maximum stay 60 days and advance
purchase 7 days, with departure date of 12
JAN

51
Signing-off from Worldspan

HELP SIGN
To leave Travelport Worldspan you must sign off from the system.
Note: The system will automatically prompt you to finish any incomplete PNRs.
Take the following step to sine out of Travelport Worldspan, enter either:
BSO to sine out of active area only
BSO$ to sine out of all work areas.
You will receive the following response:
Destination Management Organization (DMO) ads

When signing into Travelport Worldspan or when displaying availabilities for air, car
and hotels you may see DMO type headlines and sign-on messages. You may also
see graphical interactive ads appearing.
Screen examples:
When you select the interactive banner or URL a browser frame opens containing
the associated DMO website. From there you can view the content and advise your
customer about opportunities for dining, tour packages, and other promotions.
52
Standard browsing functions are supported within the frame. When you close the
frame, you are returned to the active Travelport Smartpoint session.
Summary
In this module, you learned how to:
 Launch Travelport Smartpoint and Sign-on to Worldspan
 Use Command Shortcuts
 Work in the Smartscreen
 Identify Elements in the Menu Bar
 Use the PNR Viewer Window
 Access Online Help
 Access MyTravelport
 Sign-off from Worldspan

53
Module Review
1. What is the entry to find help in Worldspan for these subjects?
a. Cars ___________________________________________________________
b. Phone ___________________________________________________________
c. Queues______________________________________________
d. World Files ___________________________________________________________
e. History ___________________________________________________________
2. What is the three-letter code for Pensacola, FL?
______________________________________________________________
3. Which airline is represented by the code HA?
_____________________________________________________________________
4. What entry will display information on the 3 letter code for Denpasar and in which country is it
located?
___________________________________________________________________
5. What does clicking on the icon allow you to do?
______________________________________________________________________
6. Which icon in Travelport Smartpoint PNR Viewer Window allows you to Create/Modify a PNR?
______________________________________________________________________
7. Which tab will display 250 previous entries and the options to view the responses?
______________________________________________________________________
54
Travelport Worldspan availability responses are received via different

communication links depending upon the participation level of the airline.
AccessPlus is a communications package that includes the participants of: Seamless
Availability, Direct Sell and Direct Access. AccessPlus participants communicate with
Travelport Worldspan via a two-way communications line using standard formats.
There are over 300 participating airlines providing last seat availability displays.
Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module you will be able to:
 Describe airline participation levels in Travelport Worldspan
 Display availability
 Identify Travelport Sponsored Flights
 Use availability options
 Sell flights
 Sell connecting flights
 Display inflight service
 Book Ticketless airlines
 Display the PNR
 Ignore a transaction
 Cancel flights
 Add and re-sequence segments
 Minimum Connections
 Local Time
 Identify branded fares

1
Airline Participation in Travelport Worldspan

Airlines can offer their flights and services through Travelport Worldspan at different
participation levels.
These levels are:
 Seamless Availability
 Direct Sell
 Direct Access
 Regular Participant
The participation level determines the degree of access you have in Travelport
Worldspan to an airline’s flight inventory.
Non-participating airlines are not shown in the availability displays and cannot be
booked, but they are included in the Schedule displays.
Seamless Availability
Airlines that have Seamless Availability in Travelport Worldspan offer the best level
of access. This type of communications link ensures that you will see last seat
availability.
The symbol used to identify Seamless Availability airlines is the “#”.
When a Seamless Availability airline is booked, a guarantee symbol “$” Is returned

with the segment indicating the seat is guaranteed.
When the booking is end transacted, the airline response includes a Record Locator
Return.
Direct Sell
Airlines that have Direct Sell participation in Travelport Worldspan use the
Worldspan availability display and the seat is booked directly in their database.
The symbol used to identify Direct Sell airlines is the “$”.
When a Direct Sell airline is booked a guarantee symbol “$” is returned with the
segment indicating the seat is guaranteed.
When the booked is end transacted, the airline response includes a Record Locator
Return.

2
Direct Access
Airlines that participate in Direct Access only, (not Seamless Availability or Direct
Sell) use the Worldspan availability display without linking to the airline’s inventory.
It is possible to identify these carriers by the presence of a “*” in the availability
display.
When a seat is sold the guarantee symbol is not returned, instead a “P” for pending
is displayed. This means that the airline could reject the sale as it was not
guaranteed.
To obtain a guarantee on Direct Access airlines, before you sell the flight change the
Worldspan availability to the airline’s Direct Access availability. The entry is A@
followed by the line number in the availability.
Example entry: A@1
This will access the inventory of the airline and when you sell the flight the
guarantee symbol “*” will be returned in the segment indicating that the segment
was sold using Direct Access.
A Record Locator Return may be returned for Direct Access airlines, but it is not a
mandatory requirement.
For more information on Seamless Availability, Direct Sell and Direct Access see:
INFO APAIR
Many airlines who are Seamless Availability and Direct Sell participants also allow
you access to their database by using the Direct Access entries. The information
that can be accessed maybe fares, fare rules, flight information (FLIFO) and
schedules.
For a list of carriers and their participation level, see HELP APAIR
Regular Participant
Regular Participant carriers do not display an indicator in the availability display.

There is no link with the airline system, and the airline can reject the booking up to
12 hours later. There is no symbol to identify a regular participant and there is no
guarantee indicator.

3
Record Locator Return

Record Locator Return allows the airline to return its record locator to Travelport
Worldspan once the PNR appears in their system. The record locator is a unique
series of letters and/or numbers that identifies a PNR in a computer reservation
system. The record locator is returned by the airline to the Worldspan PNR.
For a list of airlines participating in Record Locator Return, see: HELP DRAIR
Displaying Availability
HELP AVAIL
INFO SORT / HELP SORT
The order of the flights displayed in the availability is determined by the Sort Level
which is set up based on agency’s location. For example, if you are located in the US
or a non-European location your Sort Level will be different from agencies set up
with a European Sort Level.
The usual order of the flight display is:
 Nonstop flights
 Direct flights
 Single and double connections
The response to a basic air availability entry is a Neutral display and shows all
participating airlines for the selected route. If there are flights which depart at the
same time the system displays the flights in a random order
Refer to the following example to display flight availability from Atlanta (ATL) to
Paris (PAR) for 15 June.
Enter: A15JUNATLPAR

4
Hover over the links in the availability display to view the mouse pointer and the
tooltips.
 If a hand symbol or a pointer appears, this indicates that it is an interactive
link. A tooltip appears with information regarding the link.
 If a hand symbol or pointer does not appear and instead a line pointer
displays, this indicates that it is not an interactive link. A tootip still displays
for informational purposes only.
The following table lists the components of this availability screen and the
components of line 2 of the display.
Component: Description:
The number of passengers. Select the drop-down arrow to

display the list of the number of passengers 1 through to 9.
NEUTRAL* The availability is always a Neutral display indicating that a

specific carrier has not been requested. If a carrier has
been requested in the availability entry, then the
availability shows as CARRIER*
23MAR Date used in the availability entry
SA Day of the week. In this display it is a Saturday
1222P If a time is used in the availability entry, the displays is

based on the specified time. If no time is added to the
entry, the time used in the availability display depends
upon the Sort Level. For all Sort Levels the assumption is
the current time of the location making the entry.
Exception: for European Sort Level, the time used in the
entry is 1201A.
ATLPAR The city pair used in the availability entry
ET ** US time zones. The origin city is in the Eastern US time

zone. The destination city is not within the US, and the
time zone is shown as **
See HELP AVAILC for additional US time zone
abbreviations.
AC1 Additional Classes indicator. This appears depending upon

the set up in the Availability Default Table. The choice is to
display 8 or all booking classes. If 8 has been selected in
the Availability Default, the Additional Classes indicator
appears. To display more booking classes, enter:
AC2, AC3 OR AC4. To return to the first screen, enter:AC1
ATL ALTERNATE FTY When airport codes are used in the availability entry, and
PDK there are multiple airports at the origin or destination
cities, the alternate airport codes are displayed.
1 Line reference number.

5
*S Alliance Indicator – Sky Team Alliance.

See INFO ALLIANCE for more information.
# Access Plus Symbol – Seamless Availability.

See HELP APAIR for more information
9W 8055 Airline two-character code and flight number.
C9 J9 Z9 etc. Classes of service (booking codes) and number of seats

available to sell in each class.
This display will vary depending upon the set up in the
Availability Default Table. It may show up 8 classes of
service or the maximum of 26 classes of service.
ATL CDG Airport Codes
454P 610A Flight departure and arrival times in local time for each city
using the 12-hour clock or 24-hour clock. The Availability
Default Table determines whether the display is in 12 or 24
hours.
#1 Arrival Indicator – Arrives 1 day later
* Code share indicator.

If code share flights are displayed these can either be
shown with the operating carrier on the availability screen
under the specific flight, or as a ”*” following the flight
times. The display is determined by the set up in the Air
Default Record.
772 Code for equipment type.

See HELP EQUIPMENT
0E Non-stop flight / E-ticket eligible.
Display Seat Map for selected segment
<<B>> Branded fares indicator. Information on branded fares is

covered later in the module.
9W8055 ONL Traffic restriction for the specific flight. In this example,
CNX/STPVR TFC 9W8055 may be booked only if it is in part of an online
connection or stopover.
The availability display is interactive and depending on the colors selected in My

Preferences the colors may vary.
The default colors for the availability are:
 Green: Class available
 Grey: Closed or zero seats available
 Orange: Waitlist

6
US Domestic availability
When displaying US domestic routes, the flights operated by a US carrier may
display an indicator for the on-time performance. This is required by the US
Government and it shows the percentage that the flight arrives within 15 minutes of
the scheduled arrival time.
Hover over the on-time performance indicator to decode it.
Flight Service Information from availability

The Flight service information shows the details of the selected flight, including the
terminal information, meals, equipment and for US domestic flights the on-time
performance indicator.
Flight service information is displayed for a specific flight by selecting the flight
number in the availability display.
Example response for a non-stop flight:

7

8
The following table lists the components of the response.
#DL8517 The airline participation level (Seamless

Availability) followed by the airline code
and flight number code and flight number
preceded by the A
ATL CDG Departure and arrival airports
SA Day of the week (SA is Saturday)
635P Departure time
I Departure terminal
755A Arrival time
#1 Indicates arrives 1 day after departure
2E Arrival terminal.
DD Meal code. See HELP SERVICE for meal

codes
77W Equipment Type. See HELP EQUIPMENT
SVC On-time performance. If the flight is not a

US domestic flight, this column is left
blank.
MILES - 4383 Miles accumulated if the passenger is a

member of the airline’s frequent flyer
program. The miles shown in this display
may not be used for calculating fares.
GROUND Time on the ground
ELAPSED – 8.20 Elapsed flying time
ACCUM – 8.20 Accumulated flying time
OPERATED BY Code share information advising the

operating carrier and flight number
TSA SECURED FLIGHT The airline is required to provide TSA with

specific details of the passenger and may
include name, date of birth, gender,
passport details etc.

9
NON SMOKING Non-smoking flight. Many airlines still

transmit this information.
CO2 Carbon emission details. For more

information see INFO CARBON
For more information on the Flight Information displays see: INFO V$
For direct flights, the Flight service information response is similar but also includes
the enroute stopover information.
The availability display shows that NK 470 from Las Vegas (LAS) to Ft. Lauderdale
(FLL) has one enroute stop.
Select the flight number to display the Flight service information and to find out
where the enroute stop occurs
NK 470 makes an enroute stop in Dallas Fort Worth (DFW) and the display shows the
elapsed flying times and the ground times with the total accumulated time.
Elapsed time LAS – DFW is 2 hours and 35 minutes
Ground time in DFW is 1 hour
Elapsed time DFW – FLL is 2 hours and 44 minutes
Total accumulated time is 6 hours and 19 minutes
Notice that as these are US domestic flights, the on-time performance indicators are
shown. Both flights are 7 (70 to 79 percent ontime)

10
Connecting Flights
Refer to the example to display flight availability from London to Sydney for 29 June.
Enter: A29JUNLONSYD
Direct flights are displayed on lines 1 and 2. The number (1) at the end of the line
indicates the flight stops once enroute.
Connecting flights via Singapore (SIN) are displayed on lines 3 and 4
BA 11 is a non-stop flight from London Heathrow airport (LHR) to Singapore (SIN)
and connects with the BA 15 which is a non-stop flight from Singapore (SIN) to
Sydney (SYD).
This is known as an online connection as both flights (LHR – SIN and SIN – SYD) are
on the same airline, British Airways (BA). If different airlines are used in a
connection, it is referred to as an interline connection.
Selecting each flight number displays the Flight service information for each specific
flight. If you want the details for all the flights in the connection, place the cursor at
the Start of Message (SOM) symbol “>” and make the entry V$ followed by the line
number for the first flight of the connection.
In the screen above this will be: V$3.

11
Using Availability Options

HELP AVAIL
You may need to refine your availability search by using options in the availability
entry.
This section shows how to use some of the options. You can choose to:
 Use a single option
 Combine options in a single entry
The following table lists some frequently used options
To check availability for: Use this format:
Specific departure time A6JUNMOWCDG1900
Specific airlines A6JUNSYDSIN-QF-BA
Specific departure time and specific A6JUNDXBDEN1400-DL

airline
Specific airport of multi-airport city A6JUNLONHOU@
Specific connection city A6JUNPARSYD/SIN
Two connection cities A6JUNPARLAX/NYCSTL
Online connection A12SEPBGOMNL/O
Additional availability
The availability between two cities may have multiple flights which do not appear on
the first availability screen.
Display availability from Tokyo to Los Angeles using the entry:
12
A02FEBTYOLAX
To display availability for: Use this continuation

format:
Redisplay availability A*
Additional availability (availability down) AD
Previous availability (availability up) AU
Availability tomorrow AT
Availability yesterday AY
Change date A06FEB
Change time A9P or A2100
Display Availability Return with specific time A/R1700

for the same day
Display Availability Return for different date A/R2SEP1700
and specific time
To see other continuation formats, refer to HELP ACONT

13
Outbound and Return Availability
Travelport Smartpoint enables you to search for outbound and return flights in a
single transaction using the Smartscreen.
Outbound and return availability displays are shown either using the full screen or
the Split Screen.
Outbound and Return Availability is displayed from a single entry using “##”.
If you require the same routing in reverse for the return, there is no need to add the
routing after the ##. Just add A/R followed by the return date.
Firstly, click on the Split Screen icon
Then refer to the example to display flight availability for travel from Los Angeles to
New York on 05 September and returning 08 September.
Enter: A05SEPLAXNYC##A/R08SEP
This entry displays availability for 05 September from LAX to NYC in the upper
partition and availability for 08 September from NYC to LAX in the lower partition
The number of passengers for the outbound flight and the inbound flight must be
selected using the drop-down number list.

14
Note: If you wish to display a specific carrier on both the outbound and return
journey, you must add it to each leg.
For example, enter: A1SEPLAXNYC-UA##A/R08SEP-UA
If you only add the carrier at the end of the entry, the system would search only for
the specified carrier on the return leg.
You can also specify the return by using A/R followed by the number of days. For
example, to display RIO to MIA on 04AUG, returning 10 days later on American
Airlines the entry is:
A4AUGRIOMIA-AA##A/R10D-AA
Identifying Travelport Sponsored Flights

ASK Answer ID 42185
Sponsored Flights are flights that appear above the neutral air availability display.
Typically, participating airlines use Travelport Sponsored Flights to promote a new
service or promotional fares in the availability display in order to highlight flights you
may not otherwise notice.
The neutral display remains separate and lists the same number of flights as it did
previously.
There may be a maximum of three Sponsored Flights in a display. Sponsored flights
will be displayed using line numbers 91/92/93.
Here is an example of an availability display with Sponsored Flights:

15
Selling Flights
After determining which flight is best for your customer, you are ready to sell the
flight.
This section explains when and how to:
 Sell a flight
 Interpret a sell response from Travelport Worldspan
 Display a PNR to see how Travelport Worldspan organizes it
Selling a Flight
Selecting the seats you require is simple using Travelport Smartpoint.
Display flight availability from Amsterdam (AMS) to New Delhi (DEL) on KLM on the
17th August.
Entry: A17AUGAMSDEL-KL
There is one non-stop flight on KLM from AMS to DEL departing at 225P. The
customer requires business class which in this example needs to be booked in D
class.
Select the D class on line 1
The response appears in the Smartscreen and is also shown in the PNR Viewer
screen.

16
PNR Viewer response:
The Smartscreen response:
Though a cryptic format was not used to book the flight, the Smartscreen shows the
entry that was used by the system, with the response displayed on the line below.
Understanding the Sell Response

The following table lists the components of the sell response.
1 Flight segment number in itinerary
KL Airline
871d Flight number
D Class of service
17AUG Date of departure
SA Day of the week
AMSDEL Origin and destination airports
SS1 Status of segment and number of seats

sold. When the PNR is end transacted,
the status code SS will change to HK
(holding confirmed). See HELP ACTION C
for a list of status codes.

17
225P 1145A Departure and arrival times (local time for

each city)
#1 Arrival the next day
/O Indicates that there is a stopover in the

departing city, or that it is the origin city
of the itinerary
$ Guaranteed flight status
TKG FAX – NOT PRICED Itinerary has not yet been priced
FARE TYPE EX
The next example is how to book flights for the outbound and inbound using the
split screen to display the availability for Los Angeles to Honolulu and return for two
people.
Split the screen and display flight availability for travel from LAX to HNL, departing
01 July and returning 06 July.
Enter: A01JULLAXHNL##A/R06JUL
The Smartscreen window will now show the outbound sector in the top partition
and the return in the bottom.
Click on the drop-down to specify the number of passengers required before selling
the seats. You must do this in each partition.

18
To sell seats, click once on the required booking class in each availability display.
The sold seats will display in the PNR Viewer window on the right of your screen and
also appear in the Smartscreen.
The buttons below the TKG FAX display different parts of the Passenger Name
Record (PNR) and vary depending upon how you have set up your Button Settings
and what fields are present in the PNR.
Selling Connecting Flights

Split the screen and check availability for travel from San Francisco to Buenos Aires,
departing on 01 May and returning 05 May.
Enter: A01MAYSFOEZE##A/R05MAY
Connecting flights are displayed.

19
If there is a connection and the same booking class is required for each flight, double
click on the booking class code to sell the entire routing in the same class. For
example, for the outbound journey, double-click on Y class in line 1 and the system
will book both flights in Y class.
To book a different class of service on the connecting flights for the inbound
journey, click once on the desired class for each leg. For example, click on B for the
first flight of the connection, and M for the second flight of the connection.
As you select the classes and the flights are booked they will display in the PNR
Viewer window.
Notice the J01 at the end of segments 1 and 2

20
When air segments are sold a marriage can be established by the airline between
the segments requiring them to be processed as a single unit.
The J01 indicates that United Airlines (UA) participate in Married Segment Logic and
they have “joined” the SFO – IAH – EZE segments. One segment within a “marriage”
cannot be canceled. Either both segments must be canceled or none.
For more information on Married Segment Logic, see: INFO MSL
Using Cryptic Formats

You can also use cryptic formats to sell seats.
Enter 01Y6 to sell one seat in Y class from line 6 of the availability.
If you have searched for outbound and return flights and wish to use cryptic entries
to sell, you must place the cursor in the top partition for the outbound flight and in
the bottom partition for the return flight.
Enter 01Y4 in the lower partition to sell one seat in Y class from line 4.
For a connecting flight enter 01B1Y2 to book 1 seat in B class in line 1 and Y class in
line 2.
Enter 01B1* to book all connecting flights in B class.
Waitlisting Flights
Waitlisting is a system used within the airline industry when flights and booking
classes do not have seats available. It is quite common for passengers to cancel
confirmed seats before departure, so airlines maintain a list of passengers who wish
to be confirmed if seats become available.
When the status of a flight is waitlist only, the passenger will be waitlisted when you
make the entry to sell the seat, by clicking on the class.
If the airline is able to subsequently confirm the seat they advise you by changing
the status code in the itinerary and updating the PNR.
Example availability:
Waitlist seats are shown in orange and the number of seats shows as “0”. If you
hover over the waitlist only class of service, a tooltip appears.

21
Example response:
Seats showing in grey are closed for waitlist and cannot be selected.
If the waitlist is closed, then there is no further action that can be taken but if the
waitlist is open the seat may be waitlisted by clicking on the class or with the
following entry:
0L1M1
The system will automatically return LL (waitlist) status.

22
Air Booking Tool

Another way of searching for availability and selling flights is to use the Air Booking
Tool option from the reservations menu.
The Air Booking Tool script launches in the Smart Panel and you are presented with
a fill in format which you must complete with the relevant search criteria for the
outbound flight. Any field which is shown with a red asterisk (*) is a mandatory
field.
To enter dates either type them or select the calendar icon.

You can enter either use city or airport codes, or if you are not sure of the code, the
full name of the city.
Entering one or more characters for an airport/city code or name displays a drop-
down list that tries to match the entry being made for you to select the required
city.

23
Place a check mark in Multiple Airports if you want Travelport Worldspan to search
for availability at all airports associated to the city.
Enter the Arrival city/code. A departure or arrival time can then be entered but is
optional. You can also select a specific carrier by typing in the carrier code(s) up to a
maximum of 3 airlines. Separate the airline codes using a dash “-“
When you have entered the basic search criteria you can press Continue or if you
would like to refine your search further click on More Options.

24
Here you can specify Availability Display Options and Search Criteria such as class of
service, number of seats and connection cities.
Press CONTINUE when you have completed the fill in format.
The response is the availability in the Smartscreen and the Air Booking Tool moves
to the Sell type screen in the Smart Panel.
You can either sell a flight from the Smartscreen using the usual method of selecting
the required class of service or you can use the Air Availability in the Smart Panel.

25
Here you have options such as selling the flight, waitlisting the flight or creating a
Memo segment. Select the Sell type, the Line number and the Class of service.
The more results link uses the AD entry (availability down) to display more flights.
The link for previous results, uses the AU entry (availability up).
Example of completed screen:
Press CONTINUE

26
The response advises the flight has been booked successfully and displays links to
book the return to origin flight, or to continue with another availability.
Other links are also displayed which will move you through the creation of a PNR.
Searching for availability using the calendar
The Air Booking Tool can be accessed using the calendar icon.
The interactive functionality allows you to search and shop for flights, hotels and car
rentals directly from the calendar with a single click.
Select the icon to display the calendar.
Simply select the outbound travel date and then select the return date. The
duration of stay will automatically be highlighted. Then right click on the mouse to
display the options for Air, Car, Hotel or Shopping.

27
Select the option: Air
The Air Booking tools displays in the Smart Panel, with the dates pre-populated.
Close the calendar by selecting the X at the top right-hand corner and complete the
Air Availability process.

28
Displaying Flight Service Information from segments

HELP FLTSVC
You can access additional information such as meal services, flight times or terminal
information, for any booked flight in a PNR.
Selecting the flight number displays the Flight Service Information which is the same
response when displaying from the availability.
The cryptic entry to display the Flight Service Information is different. From the
availability you use V$ followed by the availability line for example, V$3.
From a booked itinerary the entry is V*
This displays all segments in the itinerary.
V* gives a general overview of the itinerary showing the flight time of each segment,
which meal is served and also the departure/arrival terminal.
Use the following entry to view individual segments within a PNR.

V**2 (segment 2)

29
The information shows the departure time and terminal and arrival time and
terminal. EQP is the type of aircraft.
The total flying time displays the flying time without including any stopover time.
The same information can be obtained by clicking on the flight number in the
itinerary.
Branded Fares
Branded fares can be accessed from an availability display on some GDS and direct
payment carrier flight options. A clickable blue indicator <<B>> will appear below
the airline code.
In this availability display from Houston to Boston we can see that the branded fares
indicator is visible for the DL and AA flight options:
The indicator will only appear for airlines who have filed branded fares and for
connections, the indicator will appear once under the first flight of the connection.
Select the link to display the brands and ancillaries screen in the Smart Panel.

30
The city pairs will be picked up from the initial availability response, if it is a
connecting flight, the legs will be separated by tabs across the top of the screen.
The information regarding the services offered on the flight are displayed in the
middle of the screen. These details change when you select another brand option
by clicking on the brand name.
The relevant Ancillaries for the brand are shown on the right-hand side of the
screen.
The classes of service which are applicable to the brand are displayed below the
brand name. This enables you to be able to sell the flight by selecting the required
class of service. Note: The default sell entry is for one passenger. If there is more
than one, remember to select the correct number from the Passenger drop-down
list before selling the flight.
Ticketless Airlines
ASK Answer ID 16620 / INFO TKTLESSPAY
Ticketless airlines settle with travel agencies outside of the Airline Reporting
Corporation (ARC) or the Bank Settlement Plan (BSP). These airlines work without
paper or electronic tickets and require payment after end transaction of a PNR.
“Ticketless” payment refers to the process in which you send the airline credit card
payment via an OTHS SSR.
Ticketless Process
The ticketless payment process includes the following steps.
1. You make a booking on the ticketless airline and end transaction.
2. After a few seconds, the airline sends an SSR message to the PNR indicating
that payment is required in order to confirm the booking
3. Re-retrieve the PNR and open the Ticketless Payment script - (via the
INFORMATION Menu). Complete the mandatory fields in the script to send

31
the airline a Special Service Request (SSR) with the customer’s credit card
number before the deadline. End the transaction
4. Re-retrieve the PNR to confirm that the ticketless carrier has debited the
credit card and has updated the PNR confirming that payment has been
processed. No paper or electronic ticket is issued for a ticketless carrier.
Displaying the PNR

HELP DISPLAY
When you sell a flight, you create an itinerary – one of the mandatory parts of a
PNR. You can display the PNR at any time during the selling process.
The PNR Viewer provides an instant view of the PNR.
Information in a PNR is grouped in sections that can be accessed via a simple mouse
click on the associated Quick Access Button.
Note: The function identifier to display the PNR is: *R
Enter *I to display only the itinerary segments.
Example screen display:
Ignoring a Transaction
You can disregard an action or series of actions that you have performed in a PNR by
ignoring the transaction. Ignoring a transaction lets you “start from scratch.”
To ignore a transaction, enter the function identifier I.
Cancelling Flights
HELP CANCEL
There are several reasons why you may need to cancel all or part of an itinerary. For
example, a customer may change their travel plans or a better flight may become
available.
This section explains when and how to cancel a segment as well as an entire
itinerary.

32
Cancelling a Flight
There are a few points to remember regarding canceling segments. Any flight or
flights that you sell directly after you cancel a segment automatically replace the
canceled segment. This continues until you display the PNR (*R) and Travelport
Worldspan renumbers the segments in the itinerary. This can be important when
you cancel a flight in the middle of an itinerary.
The function identifier to cancel flights is: X
To cancel a segment, enter the function identifier followed by the segment number.
Example entry: X1
To cancel an entire itinerary, enter the function identifier followed by the letter I.
Example entry: XI
Travelport Worldspan responds with CNLD FROM 1 in the Smartscreen.
Cancelling and Rebooking
In Travelport Worldspan, you can cancel and rebook a flight in a single entry. The
following table lists the most frequently used entries.
To cancel: Use this format:
Segment 2 and rebook in a different class of X2#0/M

service
Segment 3 and rebook same flight for a X3#0/19DEC

different date
Segments 1 and 2 and rebook same flights for a X1/2#0/22JUN

different date.
Air segments only XA
Inserting and Re-sequencing Segments

HELP MOVE
When a flight is booked in Travelport Worldspan, the flights are inserted into the
itinerary based on the date and time of the flight.
Travelers sometimes add a side trip to an existing itinerary or fly into a city and then
continue their journey by flying out of a different city. When that happens, the
portion of the journey between those two cities that is not flown is called the
surface portion or ARNK which stands for arrival unknown.
This section explains how to add flight segments, insert an ARNK, and re-sequence
flight segments in an itinerary.
The function identifier to insert a flight segment or ARNK after is: /
33
Adding Flight Segments

Sometimes it may be required to book flights out of sequence. For example, a
passenger may want you to book the international segments first and then book the
domestic segments.
When you book a flight which is out of sequence, the segment number does not
appear until you display the reservation *R or the itinerary *I
To insert a flight segment, use the following steps.
1. Enter the function identifier followed by the segment number after which it
is to be inserted.
Example: /1
Note: /0 inserts before the first segment in the itinerary.
1. Display a basic availability for the new flight.
2. Sell the new flight.
3. Display the PNR to renumber the segments in the itinerary.

The new segments appear numbered sequentially.
Adding ARNK
You can insert ARNK into an existing itinerary in a single format.
To insert ARNK, enter the function identifier (/) followed by the segment number it
is to be inserted after, followed by /0A
Example entry: /1/0A
ARNK now appears in the itinerary.
Re-sequencing Segments
You can change the order of segments in an itinerary. This is useful when you have
an ARNK segment which is not in the correct sequential order.
To re-sequence the segments in an existing itinerary, enter the function identifier (/)
followed by the segment number it is to be inserted after (3), segment (S) and the
segment number to insert (2).
Example entry: /3S2 (Insert segment 2 after segment 3.)
34
Checking Minimum Connecting Times

HELP KEC
The time required to transfer from one flight to another may vary depending on
whether a passenger is flying on an international or domestic flight, or whether he is
transferring from one airport terminal to another.
A minimum connecting time is agreed and published for each airport by IATA, and is
the shortest period of time which may be allowed to transfer between flights, taking
into account all factors. All transfer connections shown in a Travelport Worldspan
availability display adhere to the published minimum connecting time.
You can be sure that flights offered as connections on an availability display adhere
to minimum connecting times, but when you build an itinerary over a connecting
point, you can check what the minimum connecting time should be. Refer to the
following example:
To view Minimum Connecting Times (MCT) information for these segments, enter:
VCT*1-2
Screen response:
The minimum connection time is shown at the right-hand side under the ‘MCT’
column.

35
Displaying Minimum Connecting Times

Minimum connecting times may be checked in the Travelport Worldspan system
without reference to an itinerary.
Take the following steps to display the minimum connecting time at Frankfurt for an
international flight arrival from London (LHR) on British Airways, connecting to a
domestic flight to Berlin on Lufthansa.
Enter: KEC*FRA-BA-LH*ID
KEC Function identifier “Kindly evaluate connections”
FRA Airport code where connection is being made
BA Arrival airline
LH Departure airline
ID International sector connecting to a Domestic sector
The standard connection time for the airport is always given at the top, followed by
any specific exceptions. The connection time for any exception is given under the
right-hand column.

36
Checking Local Time

HELP KCD
You may use the Travelport Worldspan system to check the local time at any city in
the world and to determine the time difference with GMT/UTC.
Enter: KCD*SYD

37
Module Review
1. What are the three ways to check flight availability in Travelport Smartpoint?
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
2. How do you book one seat in B class from lines 1 and 2 of the following availability display?
_______________________________________________________________________________
3. What is the format to display flight details for segment 3 of a booked PNR?
_______________________________________________________________________________
4. What is the format to re-order segment 2 after segment 5 in a PNR?
_______________________________________________________________________________
5. What is the format to cancel an itinerary?
_________________________________________________________________________________

38
This module covers the steps to complete a Passenger Name Record (PNR) in
Travelport Smartpoint.
Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you will be able to:
 Identify required PNR fields.
 End a PNR.
 Retrieve a PNR.
Required PNR Fields

A PNR consists of mandatory and optional fields and the PNR will not be saved
unless it contains the mandatory fields.
The mandatory fields are:
 Phone
 Itinerary
 Name
 Ticketing
An easy way to remember the mandatory fields is to think of the word PINT: Phone,
Itinerary, Name, and Ticketing.
Name Field
HELP NAME
The PNR must contain the names of all passengers for whom you are making
reservations. You must include infants, even though they do not occupy a seat. A
maximum of 255 passenger names may be included in a PNR.
If you have more than 9 passengers travelling together in a PNR, it is considered a
“group” booking, and seats must be requested from the airline.
When making airline reservations or issuing tickets, the passenger name is added in
a specific format: Family name, first name, title
-SMITH/JOHN.MR

1
Points to note:
 Use recognized titles, such as Mr, Mrs, Ms, etc.
 When using titles, a full stop/period may be entered between the
first name and title to produce a space in the name field on the
ticket.
 Do not use hyphens or spaces. The period or full stop can be used
as an alternative. E.g. Jane Rigby-Jones should be entered as
RIGBY.JONES/JANE or RIGBYJONES/JANE
 The passenger’ name that you enter into the PNR must be the same
as the name shown in the passenger’s photo documentation.
Passenger Type Codes

You can add a Passenger Type Code (PTC) to a Name field in the Name field remarks.
PTCs are used to facilitate pricing when discounted/special fares are applicable to
certain passenger categories.
When the PTC is present in the Name field remarks, it is not necessary to repeat the
PTC in the pricing format. If both the Name field and pricing format contain a PTC,
the PTC in the pricing format overrides the PTC in the Name field.
The prefix for adding the PTC is * followed by the code. So, for example a child of 7
years old, would have the entry *C07
For a list of PTCs see: HELP PTC
Adding a Passenger Name

To add a passenger name(s) to a PNR select the Create/Modify PNR Script from the
Reservations Menu.
Alternatively, click on the icon in the PNR Viewer window.

2
The script opens in the Smart Panel with a list of options.
To add a name, click on Names. The Add a Name script opens in the in the Smart
Panel. Passenger name information can now be added using the fill in boxes, the
Passenger Type code must also be selected from the drop-down list.
Clicking on the + key will allow you to add more passenger names.
Once all passenger name information has been entered click on ADD. Travelport
Smartpoint responds with a “successful” message.

3
Children and infants

A child is defined as a person who has reached their 2nd birthday but not their 12th
birthday. When you add a child’s name, you can include the title MSTR for a boy,
and MISS for a girl. An additional box will appear once you have selected the
relevant PTC for a child, for you to add the date of birth.
To add an Infant passenger, tick the ‘Tvling w/lap INF’ box on the relevant Adult
passenger name. A new box will appear under that Adult for the Infant name to be
added. The date of birth will need to be entered and you have the option to choose
which sectors the Infant is travelling.
Once all name information is completed click on ADD.
Example:
Points to note:
 A name remark may be added to any passenger name. Other
examples could be the date of birth for a youth passenger, or
accounting details regarding a corporate account. To add name
remarks, use the following format:
-SMITH/JANE.MRS@ACCOUNT 302065@*ADT
 When an infant is added to a PNR, a servicing message is
automatically sent to all airlines included in the itinerary.

4
Changing/Deleting the Name Field

Each carrier has their own policies and procedures regarding name changes, and
most of them require approval or authorization to process a name change once the
PNR has been ended.
Many airlines participate in the Restrict Name Table in Travelport Worldspan which
allows you to check if a specific airline has restrictions.
To view a list of the airlines, enter: KRN*
Partial response:
You can display a specific carrier by using the entry KRN* followed by the airline
code.
Example response for KRN*EY
The information shown in the display applies to whether there are restrictions or no
restrictions.
 The Y means Yes. Restrictions apply, and the airline must be contacted
before name changes can be made.
 The N mean No. Restrictions do not apply, and changes are permitted.

5
This may differ if the name to be changed is a Frequent flyer participant or if there is
a change in the class of service.
You can also check the Restrict Name Table from a booked itinerary:
Example itinerary:
To display the Restrict Name information, enter: KRN*I

Example response:
Prior to ending the transaction (ET) name changes are permitted. After end
transaction, changes to the surname or given name are not permitted on EY or GF.
If the airline does not participate in the Restrict Name Table, the response to a
KRN*I is:
If the name change is before end transaction, or if the Restrict Name Table allows
changes after end transaction, select the Create/Modify PNR script from the
Reservations Menu.
Alternatively click on the icon in the PNR Viewer Window and then select
Names.
The Names script will appear in the Smart Panel, at the top of the script you have
the option to add names to the existing booking and at the bottom of the script you

6
can Change or Delete a passenger name that is currently held in the booking. A
greyed-out list of existing passenger names will be shown.
To change the name, select the passenger by ticking the Change box at the end of
the line. The passenger name selected will then become active and you can simply
overtype the data in the name field boxes.
When you have made your changes click on CONTINUE and the name will be
updated.
Should a passenger no longer be required in a PNR, tick the Delete box at the end of
the line and press CONTINUE.

7
Phone Field
Every PNR you create must include your agency phone number and likely a phone
number for your customer. A Worldspan phone field includes a phone number and
type of contact.
You may enter up to 99 phone fields in a PNR. Enter your agency phone number
first, because Worldspan automatically sends the first two phone fields in the PNR to
the boarding airline in the PNR for information purposes.
To add phone details in a PNR, select the Create/Modify PNR option from the
Reservations Menu.
Alternatively click on the icon in the PNR Viewer Window and select Phone.
The Phone Script launches in the Smart Panel. Fill in the phone number, select the
type from the drop-down list and enter a contact name.
When you have entered the required phone numbers, press ADD.
Agency phone number

To save time, you can pre-store your agency phone number in your Agency (Level 1)
World File.

8
To transfer the agency number into the booking, simply add the agents name to the
box at the top of the script and press CONTINUE.
Travelport Worldspan moves the pre-stored phone number into the PNR.
The manual entry to move the agency phone number from the Level 1 World File is:
9-Amy
More information can be found under HELP PHONE.
Displaying the Phone field
To view the stored phone information, click on the button in

the PNR Viewer to expand the information.
Here you will see the stored phone numbers.
Changing/Deleting the Phone field

At any time, the phone field may be modified or deleted. To amend phone details in
a PNR, select the Create/Modify PNR option from the Reservations Menu.
Alternatively click on the icon in the PNR Viewer Window and select Phone.
At the top of the script you have the option to add phone numbers to the existing
PNR and at the bottom of the script you can Change or Delete a phone field that is
currently held in the booking. A greyed-out list of existing phone numbers will be
shown.

9
Select the number you wish to change by ticking on the Change box at the end of
the line. The phone number selected will then become active and you can simply
overtype the data.
When you have made your changes, press CONTINUE and the phone field will be
updated.
Should a phone number no longer be required in a PNR, tick the Delete box at the
end of the line and press CONTINUE.
E-mail address
The E-mail address is an optional field. To add an email address to a booking, select
the Create/Modify PNR script from the Reservations Menu.
Alternatively, click on the icon in the PNR Viewer window and select Email.

10
The Email script launches in the Smart Panel. Enter the email address in to the
Passenger Email box, and press ADD.
Ticketing Field
The Ticketing Field is a mandatory field. To add a ticketing field to a booking, select
the Create/Modify PNR script from the Reservations Menu.
Alternatively, click on the icon in the PNR Viewer window and select
Ticketing Date.

11
The Ticketing Date script launches in the Smart Panel. Although there are several
options available within the ticketing drop-down, you will generally choose one of
the following options:
 TAW - date when you will issue the ticket.
 T – (minimum entry) acknowledgment that you have manually issued the
ticket.
The Ticketing field is a single-item field. You can enter only one in a PNR.
The ticketing field can be viewed in the T- area of the PNR Viewer and an attempt to
end a booking without this field returns:
ND TL/TKTG
Future ticketing
To create a ticketing field that indicates when the ticket will be issued, select the
TAW (Ticket at Will) option from the drop-down list. The Queue Category and
Ticketing Date must be specified. Other optional items can also be added such as
fare type, ticket designator, freeform text etc. Once you have completed the
information press CONTINUE.
Note: TAW entries must include a two-character queue category. Use 00 if
categories are not being used in your agency for this queue. When TAW is used the
PNR is automatically placed on queue 9 (and specific category if anything other than
0), on the specified date for the ticket to be issued. When the ticket is issued the
field is automatically updated to show the date and time of issue
Example:
When selecting a date, the PNR will automatically drop on the ticketing queue for
the date specified.

12
Already Ticketed
To create a Ticketing field that indicates the ticket has already been issued select T-
Ticketed and press CONTINUE.
Example:
Changing the Ticketing Field

It is possible to change the ticketing field to do this you would need to delete the
existing ticketing information and then add the new details.
Launch the Create/Modify PNR script from the Reservations Menu alternatively
select the pencil icon in the PNR Viewer Window and select Ticketing Date.
Tick the delete box at the end of the ticketing line and press CONTINUE.
Alternatively, you can change the ticketing date by using the following manual entry:
7@TAW/01/28MAY
Ending a PNR
There are two ways to finish working on a PNR: end transaction or ignore.
When you end transaction, you save the new or changed data you have entered in
the PNR. However, when you ignore, you do not save the information you just
entered in either a new PNR, or an existing one.
Ending Transaction
HELP END
To save a PNR that you have created, you must end the transaction. When a new
PNR is ended, it is filed in the Worldspan central database. At that point, the PNR is
assigned a unique identification code called a record locator. The assigned record
locator never changes, no matter how often the PNR is modified.
The function identifier to end transaction a PNR is: E
13
To end transact a PNR, enter the function identifier.

Example
E Ends the transaction and files the PNR in the database.
ER End and retrieves the booking
Worldspan confirms your entry, either by assigning a record locator for a new PNR
or redisplaying the record locator for an existing one.
Ignoring Transaction
HELP IGNORE
The ignore function lets you cancel any work done on a PNR. Any changes made to
an existing record are ignored and the PNR returns to the central database in
Worldspan.
To ignore a PNR, enter the function identifier.
Example
I Ignore booking
IR Ignores and retrieves the booking
Note: If you are building a new PNR (you have not yet end transacted for the first
time and have no record locator) and you choose to ignore it, the entire PNR will be
deleted and you will have to begin anew.
Record Locator Return
When a PNR is ended, record locators will be received from the airlines. This is
mandatory for airlines who participate in Worldspan as Seamless Availability or
Direct Sell. Direct Access and Regular Participants may also elect to send their
locators. All airline record locators are stored in the Record Locator Return area
within the Items Suppressed.
To display the airline record locators, enter: *DR
The airline locator is shown at the end of the line.
Retrieving a PNR
Once Worldspan has assigned a record locator to a PNR, you can then retrieve it
from the central database.
Retrieve a PNR when you want to make changes to the record, or to verify
information regarding your passenger’s travel plans.

14
You can retrieve a PNR using one of the following:

 Customer’s last name
 Record locator
Retrieve by Customer’s Last Name
HELP DISPLAY / HELP *PNR*

Whether you are sure of the customer’s last name, or you know just the first few
letters, you can easily retrieve their PNR.
The function identifier to retrieve a PNR by last name or by similar name list is: *-
Example entry: *-SMART
You can also retrieve a PNR by date and last name.
Example entry: *-SMART#25MAR
To display PNRs from your bridge or branch locations you can either display all the
PNRs using *A or *B or by using the specific bridge/branch SID(s).
To retrieve a PNR from all bridge locations:
*A-JONES
To retrieve a PNR from all branch locations:
*B-SMITH
To retrieve a PNR from a specific SID (1PM):
*1PM-SMITH
To retrieve a PNR from multiple SID(s) (A2Z and Z3T):
*A2Z/Z3T/9921347-SMITH
Note: You can specify up to a maximum of four SIDs.
By Similar Name List
If there are multiple PNRs with the same name, or there are no exact matches,
Travelport Worldspan displays a similar name list.
To retrieve a PNR from a list, click on the line number.

Or using a cryptic entry, enter: *1
Note: To redisplay the list of names, use the function identifier followed by the
letter L for list, enter: *L

15
Retrieve by Record Locator
HELP *PNR*
You can retrieve a PNR by record locator. The record locator is the six-character
code that Travelport Worldspan assigns the first time you end transaction a PNR.
This code consists of letters and numbers and does not change regardless of how
many times you retrieve, modify, or ignore a record.
The function identifier to retrieve a PNR by record locator is: *
To retrieve a PNR by record locator, enter the function identifier followed by the six-
character record locator.
Example entry:
*YOH9NT
Recent PNR Icon
Another way you can retrieve a recent PNR is to click on the Recent PNR Icon in the
top right-hand corner of the screen.
This will show up to 40 PNRs that have recently been viewed, you can select the
relevant PNR by clicking on it.
Display PNR Script
A PNR can also be retrieved by selecting the Display PNR Script from the
Reservations Menu.
The Display PNR script appears in the Smart Panel. A PNR can be displayed using
PNR Details, Record Locator or Ticket Number.

16
Custom Itinerary
When you end the PNR you have the option to email the itinerary to your customer
for approval by selecting the PNR locator.
Custom Itinerary – Itinerary Only
Custom Itinerary opens the script where you can choose to email the itinerary only
or itinerary and document history.
Custom Itinerary opens the script where you can choose to email the itinerary only
or itinerary and document history.
If it is your first time using custom itinerary you may change the time format, add
travel consultant’s name and also customize the itinerary by changing the colors and
the fonts.
To access the Settings, select the cog icon to display the options:

17
Hover the mouse over the Time Format to check the previous Setting, or to select
the other option.
Hover the mouse over the Travel Consultant Name. You can select whether to Show
or Hide the name.
Select Customization to view how you can change options such as logo, agency
address, fonts and the colors.

18
To return to the Custom Itinerary script, select the grey arrow at the top left-hand
side of the screen.
Press CONTINUE to display the Itinerary.

19
At the top right-hand side of the screen you have the option to print the itinerary
using the printer icon, or to send an email to the customer by selecting the
envelope icon.
Complete the Email address fields and press CONTINUE.

20
An alert appears advising the email has been sent and the PNR has been updated
with an e-mail sent remark. The sent remark is located in the PNR in the Unique
Remarks field.
Custom Itinerary – Itinerary and Document History
If the PNR has been ticketed, select the option Itinerary and Document History
radio button and press CONTINUE.
In support of the EU Directive Data Protection mandate a data protection notice
must be visible for all itineraries that contain ticket numbers. Additionally, the
Baggage Information details also display.
The Data Protection Notice and Baggage Information are included in the email to
the customer.
21
Travelport ViewTrip
Travelport ViewTrip is an online itinerary source that provides instant, real time
access to travel plans. The link opens the agent’s view of the website.
Select the envelope icon and enter the email address, any comments and press
CONTINUE.
Smartpoint to ViewTrip using quick keys #VT
The ViewTrip itinerary can also be accessed using quick keys. Ensure the Smart
Panel is open. In the Smart Screen type: #VT or select ViewTrip from the Smart
Panel scripts.

22
Other useful entries:

Open the ViewTrip itinerary without retrieving the PNR:
Entry:
#VT-surname*record locator
View Trip script allows you to send the email to the passenger in one of the
selected languages by using the Setup option
The Display itinerary in: drop-down list shows the choice of languages:

23
Summary
In this module, you learned how to:

 Identify required PNR fields.
 End a PNR.
 Retrieve a PNR
 Email an itinerary

24
Module Review
Mr. Hamilton has phoned you regarding a reservation. You have just booked his itinerary. His home
phone number in London is 0207 455 8970 and his business number is 0207 890 3428. Mr. Hamilton
would like his ticket issued today.
1. How do you add Mr. Hamilton’s phone numbers to the PNR and move the agency phone with
your name?
_______________________________________________________________________________
2. Mr. Hamilton has advised the home telephone number he gave you was incorrect and is in-fact
0207 455 8900. How do you update the home number in the PNR?
_______________________________________________________________________________
3. Mr. Hamilton has decided not to have his ticket issued today. Which option would you use to
set a reminder for the tickets to appear on the ticketing queue for a specific date?
_______________________________________________________________________________
4. Other than the itinerary, what other mandatory fields must you enter?
_______________________________________________________________________________
5. What is the format to ignore Mr. Hamilton’s PNR?
_______________________________________________________________________________
6. In what two ways can you initially launch the “Create/Modify PNR” script?
_______________________________________________________________________________

25
Module 4: Adding Optional PNR Fields
Additional PNR fields allow important data and requirements to be included with the
client’s reservation, such as addresses, mileage membership information, and seat
assignments.
This module explains how to add these optional fields to a PNR.
Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module you will be able to add the following optional fields
to a PNR:
 Form of payment
 Mileage membership
 Seat assignment
 Address and delivery
 Service requests
 Remarks
 Itinerary
Form of Payment
HELP FOP
The form of payment field contains client ticket payment information, such as cash,
check, or credit card. Credit card information includes the credit card number and
expiration date. You can store one form of payment field per PNR.
Note: Worldspan adds the approval code to the ticket automatically in most cases.
Adding a Form of Payment

Adding a Form of Payment field is an optional entry. To add a form of payment to a
booking, select the Create/Modify PNR script from the Reservations Menu.
Alternatively, select the icon in the PNR Viewer window to access the
Create/Modify PNR script.

1
Select Form of Payment (FOP).
Select the FOP from the drop-down list.
Press CONTINUE, and the chosen form of payment is added to the PNR.
The following is returned:

2
There are many options to choose from in the drop-down menu.
Depending on the option selected, the fill in format will adjust to the requirements
of the payment type.
When the option of a credit card is selected from the list, the Add Form of Payment
script displays with a drop-down list to select the credit card company. Other
mandatory information includes the Credit Card Number and Expiration Date. There
are other optional fields such as Approval Code, which may be completed if
required.
Once the form of payment has been added, it can be viewed in the PNR Viewer
window by clicking on the FOP button.
In the example above, the selected FOP shows as CA which is the code
for cash.

3
Deleting a Form of Payment

The Form of Payment may be deleted by accessing the FOP in the Create Modify
PNR menu.
Place a tick in the Delete box and press CONTINUE, this will delete the selected
Form of Payment and you may access the FOP once more to add a new method of
payment.
Mileage Membership
HELP FQTV
Airline frequent flyer programs are also known as mileage membership programs
and are very popular among clients who travel extensively.
In Worldspan you can also add more than one mileage membership number to a
PNR for those clients who participate in more than one program.
For PNRs with more than one Name field, you must specify which name owns the
mileage membership flyer number by associating it with that particular Name field.
This section explains how to add mileage membership information to an existing
PNR, and then how to display this information after you have added it. You will also
learn how to display membership mileage.
The Mileage Membership data is added through the use of the PNR Basics script in
the Reservations drop down menu. Frequent flyer is one of the options.
Adding Mileage Membership

You can add a British Airways Mileage Membership number to the following PNR.

4
Select PNR Basics.
This displays the PNR Creation tool offering easy access to frequently used entries.
Select Frequent Flyer.

5
Select the passenger number associated to the card, add the card number. Press
OK.
The following prompt is returned, indicating that it has accepted the card number
and the user can enter more account numbers if required.
If the passenger has more than one card repeat the above process.
Some airlines will verify frequent traveller information.
See INFO VERIFY for a list of carriers.

6
If a frequent traveller number is invalid you will get the following response:
Cross Accrual
Many airlines allow cross accrual or mileage accrual with their partners. For
example, American Airlines and Qantas have a mileage membership agreement and
your client may wish to have his Qantas flight credited to his American Airlines
Advantage account.
In this display Delta (DL) is the carrier in the PNR and the passenger has an Air
France (AF) Frequent flyer number

7
Displaying Mileage Membership

Once you add mileage membership the details can be viewed by clicking on the
General Fax line G-.
Deleting Mileage Membership

Mileage Membership may be deleted through the same process of accessing the SSR
script in the Create / Modify PNR menu.
You will see at the lower part of the display all added Special Service Requests are
displayed along with the option to Cancel or Delete.
If the booking has been ended with the Mileage number added you need to select
cancel as this will send a cancellation message to the carrier. Delete can be used to
delete the number prior to ending the PNR.
Press CONTINUE to complete this process.

8
Seat Assignments
HELP SEATS
ASK Answer ID 14558
HELP SEATS
INFO INTERACTIVE
You can assign seats on any airline that participates in the Travelport Worldspan
seat program. Each airline has specific guidelines for making advance seat
assignments.
Many airlines participate in Interactive Seating which means that when you select a
seat the request is confirmed (SK) by the airline prior to end transacting the PNR.
If an airline does not participate in Interactive Seating, the selected seat is on
request (SR) and the message is sent to the airline on ending the transaction. You
must then check the response from the airline to see if the seats have been
confirmed (SK).
Note: Travelport Worldspan rejects your seat request if you make a request that is
contrary to the guidelines of the airline you are booking.
When adding a seat assignment to a PNR, you can either make a specific request
from a seat map, or you can request a generic seat from the airline using the cryptic
entry 4RA.
The seat map display is dependant upon whether it is a pre-book PNR or a post-book
PNR.
This section explains how to:
 Request seats
 Select seats from a seat map
 Display seat assignments
 Cancel seat assignments
 Paid seats
Requesting Seats
Unless you request specific seat numbers, Travelport Worldspan assumes the
passenger prefers a window seat for all confirmed air segments. If no window seats
are available, Worldspan assigns an aisle seat, followed by a middle seat.
If more than one passenger is booked in a PNR, at least one window seat is assigned
along with any adjacent seats, if available.
In this example you have a confirmed booking and your client wants to book seats
but does not have any specific requirements.

9
In this example you have a confirmed booking and your client wants to book seats
but does not have any specific requirements.
Request generic seats for all segments by making the entry: 4RA
The response shows that all seats have been reserved, however this does not mean
that the seats have been confirmed. You need to look at the segments or the seat
data.
As Delta is an interactive seat participant, the seats will be confirmed prior to end
transaction. The status of the seats in the segment shows as SK.
To view the seat fax items select the link *S or you can make the manual entry *S

10
The seat display shows the status of the SFAX items as HK (holding confirmed).
If the seats were on request, the status would show as NN.
Remember to end transaction even if the seats are shown as HK.
Selecting Seats from a Seat Map

You may want to view a seat map prior to requesting a seat assignment. You can
view a live seat map for most confirmed flights in Travelport Worldspan. A live seat
map is updated each time you display it.
Note: Airlines may block some seats for airport check-in only or for frequent flyers
so ensure the FQTV is added to the PNR prior to displaying the seat map.

11
Displaying a Seat Map

To display a live seat map on a participating airline, you have different options:
1. Click on the class of service in the PNR Viewer window
2. Select the SEATS script from the Create / Modify PNR menu.
3. Reservations Drop down menu select Seat Maps

12
4. Enter the cryptic entry to display the seat map by segment number.
To display the seat map for segment one, enter: 41*
5. Display the Quick Key Shortcuts using the icon or type #SEAT in the
Smart screen.

13
When you make the request for the seat map, the system sends a request to the
airlines for the seat data. The display of the seat map is dependant upon whether it
is a pre-book or post-book PNR.
 For pre-book PNRs you are able to request and view a seat map for an
individual segment
 For post-book PNRs when a seat map request is made, the seat map script
appears immediatley and is updated as the seat maps become available.
Adding Seats
The most commonly used method is to click on the class in the PNR Viewer window.
In this example you have booked the itinerary and the client wishes to check on the
available seats on the SYD HKG flight. As the name field has not been entered, you
will be able to view the seat maps but not select a seat.
Select the class of service in segment 1
A message appears advising Gathering information until the seat map is returned.

14
As this is a pre-book PNR, the seat map for the single segment displays.
If the Seat Map was selected via the Reservations tab/Create Modify PNR Script or
via the Quick Command option then the Seat Map script will appear in the Smart
Panel and you add the segment number to view the seat map.
To view the list of carriers who support seat maps click on Carrier list. You can also
click on Add Remarks which will take you to the Create/Modify PNR script and allow
you to add any itinerary remarks.

15
For post-book PNRs (end transacted) if you select class of service in the segment, or
use the cryptic entry: 41* the seat map script appears in the Smart Panel.
The flights display in the Segments on the right hand side of the screen with the .
message Gathering Information below each flight. As the seat maps are returned
this is updated.

16
When the requested seat map is returned the name of the first passenger in the list
is automatically selected.
You have the option to change this by selecting the segment/passengers you require
from the segments panel
You have the choice to look at the seat map and choose a seat by selecting one of
the seat icons, or you can select the Airline Assigned radio button to request the
airline to assign a seat.
The color coded map clearly indicates which seats are available to book using the
color coded legend at the bottom of the screen.
You have the option to filter your seat results to show preferred seats, free or paid
seats by selecting the tick box or using the drop-down menu list.
To view details about specific seats, hover your mouse over the seat numbers.

17
As no seats have been assigned yet, each segment shows ‘0 of 1 seat(s) selected’.
This changes as you start to assign seats.
To book your seat, click on the desired seat number.

18
The seat turns green and the selected seat number is added to the information on
the right hand side of the screen.
Select the next flight from the right hand column and repeat the process for the
remaining flight sectors and passengers if applicable.
Once you have completed your seat selections all the details will be displayed in the
right hand side of the screen including any prices if paid seats were selected.
When all seats have been assigned, select the REVIEW button. The Review Seats
screen displays an overview of the selected seats.

19
Press SUBMIT to send the seat details to the airline.
The Review screen shows the seat actions have been completed with a note to
advise you to end the record.
You may have to scroll down to view the options at the bottom of the screen.

20
Press CLOSE if you have completed the seat assignments, or you have the option to
return to the seat map and modify the seats.
The seat status is shown as SK as Delta is an interactive seat participant.and seats

have been confirmed (SK) prior to ending the transaction.
Cancel a Seat Assignment

Assigned seats can be easily changed or deleted.
To delete seat assignments click on the class in the PNR Viewer the seat map will
appear in the smart panel with the current booked seats listed on the right hand
side of the screen.
To delete a seat, click on the X next to the specific seat.
The seat assignment will be cancelled and you are free to choose a different seat if
required.
Once you have updated your selections press REVIEW.

21
Changing a Seat Assignment

If the passenger wishes to change a seat assignment, display the seat map by clicking
on the class in the PNR Viewer. Select the alternate seat for the required segment
and the original seat will be canceled and the details on the right hand side of the
screen update with the new seat number.
Scroll down to view the bottom of the screen to view the options.

22
Notice the Status shows Selected for the changed seat and Confirmed for the
original seat on segment 2.
Press SUBMIT to confirm the change.
Preferred Seat
Some airlines send through zero value preferred seats which are only bookable for
travelers that hold a frequent traveler card. To view the preferential seat
characteristics in the seat map, select the ‘Show Preferred’ check box to display
those seats.

23
You can hover over a seat number to view additional information about the seat.
Example response:
It is important to note that the frequent flyer number must be added to the PNR.
When selecting a seat with messaging applied (exit row or preferred seats), hover
over the information icon to view details.
Paid Seats
Some airlines allow agencies to pre book and pay for premium seating requests.
Each airline will stipulate the booking and payment conditions at the time of
request.
The seat map and booking process is managed in the same way that normal seat
requests are made, however there is additional information displayed and a
payment screen for low cost carriers (LCC) for seats.
Some airlines for example, United Airlines and Delta offer the option to hold the seat
allocation and defer the payment to a later date.
Note: Pre-paid seats can only be booked on an ended PNR.
Paid seats can be filtered by a drop down menu displayed on the seat map.
Information from the airline is shown on the right of the map and can be collapsed

24
by clicking on the arrow.

Example:
You can hover over the seat number to obtain seat characteristics and the charge.
Example:
To book your seat, click on the desired seat number. The flight, passenger, seat
selected and price will display in the right column.
Once out have selected the seats click REVIEW.
For low cost carrier seats, and airlines allowing deferred payment a Payment

25
Information screen displays where you can enter your payment selection.
Example:
Credit and Debit Card

When your customer is paying by credit or debit card, enter the payment
information and select SUBMIT.
The airline will endeavor to process the credit card payment and seat booking
request.
Once you have submitted the payment information the remarks are updated with
the payment detail.
Hold Seats and Defer Payment
At the time of writing, United Airlines and Delta have introduced the capability of
being able to hold a paid seat and defer payment until a later time.

26
Points to note:
 A hold and defer payment option will only be presented on a PNR that is
fully United/Delta, or a mix of United/Delta and another carrier that requires
EMD fulfilment e.g. UA/DL & KL, but not a mix of UA/DL and another credit
card paid seating carrier e.g. DL & UA.
 United require a ticket to have been issued prior to payment being taken,
however you are able to hold and defer payment prior to the ticket being
issued.
 Delta do not need the ticket to be issued prior to holding seats.
 There can only be one payment per PNR made to the airline for paid seats.
Therefore you cannot hold and defer payment on one segment and then
instant pay for another segment. You can hold/defer on one segment and
book a free seat on another segment.
 Modification of a deferred payment seat is not permitted, however you can
cancel the seats then re-book. Alternatively, you will need to wait until the
airline has expired and canceled the original seat before you can re-launch
the seat map.
A message with the seat expiry deadline will be returned by the airline.
Example:
The seat expiry deadline will be added to the PNR in the remarks (*U).
You can see the assigned seats in the PNR by selecting *S. The seat assignment will
have a HK status.
The PNR will also be updated with Additional Service Data, select the *DAS link to
display the seat data.
Example:
When your customer is ready to pay for the seat assignment, select PAY NOW,
alternatively you can select the booking class in the segment to display a drop down
list where you can select Pay for Held Seats:

27
Both of the options will display the Payment Information screen where you can
enter the payment information.
Once you have submitted the payment information the remarks are updated with
the payment detail.
IndiGo Paid Seats
The Review seat screen for IndiGo includes additional information on the paid seats.
In the screen above the original seats have been modified to higher cost seats.
The Review screen shows each segment with the new Subtotal, the Total Paid, the
cost of the new Seats with the Amount Due.
The information at the bottom of the screen shows the total amount followed by
the calculation indicating Paid, Refund or Due.
To confirm the new seats with this costing, select SUBMIT.
Currently only IndiGo has this additional calculation shown in the Review Seat
screen.

28
SeatGuru
You can identify optimal seat choice directly from SeatGuru.com from a Travelport
Smartpoint interactive seat map. SeatGuru is a website featuring seat reviews and a
color-coded system to identify superior airline seats.
You request a seat map in the usual way SeatGuru is interactive with specific flights
and seat types:
Hover over the Seat shown with a colored mark on the seat number. A Red asterix
indicates “Bad seat” a Yellow asterix indicates “Mixed/Be aware” finally a Green
asterix indicates a “Good seat”.
To view a legend of the SeatGuru colors, select the SeatGuru fly out.
Select it again to remove the legend.

Place your cursor over a seat to display information.
29
SeatGuru information shows below the usual seat facts.

Under the SeatGuru logo is the seat rating - ratings of 5, 4, 2 or 1 could show. A
higher score indicates a better seat.
EXIT seat restriction details are also displayed as airlines need to make travelers
aware of exit restrictions.

30
Seat maps and ancillary services
Seat maps and ancillary services are not displayed for unconfirmed segments. If the
PNR contains multiple segments with some segments confirmed and others
unconfirmed, requesting the seat map or ancillaries displays only those segments
that are confirmed.
You are still able to display seat maps for unconfirmed segments using the seat map
icon in the availability display.
Adding Remarks
The add remarks option in the Seat Map script allows segment specific remarks to
be added to the PNR. Select add remarks to launch the Add Itinerary & Invoice
Remarks script found in the Create/Modify PNR script.
Note: Adding remarks should be completed after the seat has been assigned.
Selecting the add remarks before assigning the seat, closes the seat map and opens
the Add Itinerary & Invoice Remarks.
Client Address and Delivery Address Fields

Help Address
Worldspan reads the address for your client from the Client Address field or the
Delivery field, for purposes of billing, delivery, or both. Worldspan generally
references the client Address field for billing and the Delivery Address field for
delivery.
The Client Address and Delivery Address fields may be added through the
Create/Modify PNR script, or by the PNR Basics script as accessed from the
Reservations drop down menu. The following example is using the PNR Basics
script:
Select Address from the displayed options.

31
Delivery Address and Client Billing Address Field

Both the Delivery Address field and the Client Billing Address are a single-item field,
meaning only one Delivery Address and one Client Billing Address are allowed in a
PNR.
The script allows four lines for either of the addresses, including Post or zip code.
You can tick to allow the same Billing and Delivery address.

32
Displaying Client and Delivery Address Fields
Click on the “A”

This displays both the client Billing (CB) and Delivery (CD)Address fields.
Changing/Deleting Client and Delivery Address Fields

To change the Address fields access the Address script from the Create/Modify PNR
menu.

33
Client billing and delivery address fields are displayed. You can select Change or
Delete. For example if you have added the incorrect street name.
Place a tick against the field which requires changing.
Change the Street name from Union St to Chancellor Street.
Select CONTINUE.
Select the PNR Viewer window.
The address is now changed.
E-Mail Field
HELP EMAIL
The E-mail address is an optional field. To add an email address to a booking, select
the Create/Modify PNR icon.
Adding an E-Mail Address

Select Email from the Create/Modify PNR options and then enter the email address
for your passenger.

34
You can also add a second email address and an email remark.
Click “ADD”
Once you have added the emails they are displayed in the PNR. An email is
automatically sent on the first End Transaction after the email is added.
Changing/Deleting an E-Mail Address

To amend or delete the email fields click on Email in the Create/Modify PNR menu.
An additional section in the lower area now displays the Traveler email address.
If you need to delete the additional email and the Itinerary remark you place a tick in
the Delete box against the selected items and press CONTINUE.
Passenger Contact SSR
Travelport Smartpoint supports industry standard SSRs for Passenger E-mail and
Mobile Phone. You have the option to enter the passenger contact information
through the Special Services Request (SSR) option from the ‘Create/Modify PNR’
script on the Smart Panel.
CTCE = Passenger contact e-mail address
CTCM = Passenger contact mobile phone number
CTCR = Passenger contact refused

35
Enter the required details related to passenger’s mobile Phone and/or email and
language preference or you can select to provide no information regarding the
passenger’s contact information.
Travelport Smartpoint processes the information and an SSR is created:
3SSRCTCMLHHK1/087232223-1.1
Passenger mobile number indicating that the preferred language for contact is
English (EN ISO code).
When the “Language Preference” is entered with the language code for example, EN
(English) is placed before the passenger number.
3SSRCTCMLHHK1/087232223/EN-1.1
CTCR (Passenger contact refused)
If you select the “No Contact Info Provided”” checkbox on the screen, the SSR will be
created:
3SSRCTCRLHHK1/NO CONTACT INFORMATION-1.1
Service Requests
Often you need to send messages to an airline to request some sort of action for
example, to confirm a wheelchair or to advise additional information.
Travelport Worldspan sends two types of messages:
 Special service request (SSR)
 Other service information (OSI)
Both SSRs and OSIs appear in the PNR as GFAX (General Facts).
Special Service Request (SSR)

HELP SSR
A Special Service Request (SSR) is a message sent to an airline that requires the
airline to take action.

36
Adding an SSR
Special Service Requests are found under the Create/Modify PNR menu which is
accessed from the Reservations menu.
Select the option: SSR.

37
You can select passengers and segments for each Special Service Request. The
default is to select all passengers and all segments.
Some SSRs require Free Form Data to be added to the message to the airline.
If known, you can enter the SSR code, or use the drop-down arrow to display a
scrollable alphabetical list of SSR codes.:
The meal SSR codes are located further down the script.
Use the drop-down arrow to display a scrollable alphabetical list of meal codes:

38
For more information on meals see: HELP MEALS.
In this example the PNR is displayed in the PNR Viewer window. The passenger
advises that he has a sprained ankle and would like a wheelchair booked for the ATL
to LHR segment as he cannot walk long distances.
Select SSR from the Create/Modify PNR options.

39
The wheelchair is required for the first segment only. Select segment 1:
Select the drop-down list for the SSR codes and scroll down to wheelchairs:
There are multiple wheelchair codes. Select the correct code for the service
required. In this example, the passenger can ascend and descend stairs but needs
the help walking long distances.
Select the code of WCHR:
.
Press ADD to enter the SSR request.

40
The response shows that the SSR has been added successfully to the PNR
but. It is
Displaying an SSR
To display the SSRs in a PNR select the G, or the *G in the retrieval buttons.
G- GFAX items
1. Item 1 in the GFAX field
SSR Special Service Request
WCHR SSR code
DL Airline code
NN1 NN indicates on request followed by the number of
requests for the SSR code. In this example 1
ATLLHR Routing of segment

0028 Flight number
Y Class of service
25MAR Date of departure
-SMART/P MR Name of the passenger
The PNR must now be end transacted to send the request to the airline. The airline
will either confirm or reject the request.
The response from the airline will drop the PNR onto your queues.

41
Example response: of a confirmation of the request:
The NN status has been updated to KK (can confirm). Additional information on

GFAX status codes will be covered later in the course.
Canceling/Deleting an SSR
To cancel or delete an SSR, select the SSR link from the Create/Modify PNR script.
The lower area of the script all SSRs are displayed along with the option to select
Cancel or Delete.
Example screen for SSR with an NN status code:
Notice that the option to Cancel is greyed out. In Travelport Worldspan if an SSR is
still on request (NN status), then you cannot cancel it, you must delete it.

42
Example screen for SSR with a KK or HK status:
If the SSR is confirmed, with a status of KK (can confirm) or HK (holding confirmed)

then you must cancel it to generate a cancellation message to the airline.
Notice that neither the Cancel or the Delete options are greyed out. You must
decide the action to be taken. In this example as the status is KK, then it has to be
the Cancel option which is selected.
Example screen for SSR with a NO status:
If an airline rejects an SSR request they may return the status of NO (no action). In
this example DL have changed the status to NO and also added additional
information advising that the meal is unavailable. With this response the option to
Cancel is greyed out as you would need to delete the SSRs.
For additional information and examples of the cryptic entries, see: HELP 3@ and
INFO 3@
Secure Flight
HELP DOCS
HELPAPIS
The Secure Flight program requires the airlines to provide US Transportation
Security Agency (TSA) with specific passenger information on name, date of birth,
and gender.
To meet the Secure Flight program data requirements, the SSR codes; DOCS and
DOCO can be used to transmit the required information. These SSRs were part of the
IATA resolution 760a which resulted in the development of the Advanced Passenger
Information (APIS) SSRs.

43
Secure Flight information is available by accessing the Information Menu and

selecting Secure Flight Info.
Many airlines require passenger information to be included in the PNR. Transmission

of passenger data in a PNR to an airline takes into consideration security and
immigration procedures. Information stored in a PNR using the following SSR
keywords may be communicated to customs and immigration authorities.
In Worldspan this information may be added as a manual SSR or via a fill in format
template. More information can be found at INFO APIS, HELP DOCS and HELP *PSI
Adding Secure Flight Details

APIS Information can be added using the script accessible from the Information
Menu and also through the PNR Basics on the Reservations Menu.
Select the Secure Flight Docs and a Fill in format is displayed. You will need to add
Gender, DOB, (Name is prepopulated) Document number, Expiration date,
Nationality and where the document was issued.

44
You can select “Documentation” and the fill in format for the APIS DOCS is displayed.
You can fill in the data and press CONTINUE.
Other options in the Secure Flight Passenger Documentaiton are Other, Address
and also Contact which give options specific to individual country or airline
requirements.
For example Redress details for the US can be added under “Other”. Address and
Contact requirements may also be mandatory by some airlines and countries.
The APIS information is prepared in the SSR format blocking out sensitive data for
security purposes. . When you click on continue the response at the top of the
script shows “PNR contains Document Information.

45
Displaying an APIS
To View the Apis in your PNR *G
Sensitive information is blocked out for security purposes.
Changing or Deleting APIS

From the Information Menu select Secure Flight Info. Any existing lines are
displayed. You now have the option to add a new remark, modify or change an
existing remark.
You would need to Cancel if you have already entered the APIS remark and ended
the PNR, as a cancellation message will be sent to the airline.
Select the Delete option if you have entered the remark but not yet ended.
Other Services Information (OSI)

HELP OSI
Other Service Information (OSI) sends a message to an airline advising of
information pertaining to the passengers in the PNR. OSI provides an advance
notice regarding a passenger to airline personnel. However, it does not require
action.

46
Adding an OSI
You can send an OSI to one or all airlines in a PNR.
As with Special Service Request, OSIs are found under the Create /Modify PNR
script.
Select OSI
Several options are displayed. These are all optional for example ticket number and
business phone field are not used regularly. To Complete Party is often used to
cross refer bookings.
To send an OSI to all airlines in an itinerary, use the carrier code of YY (which is
recognized throughout the airline industry as meaning “any airline”.) The default
carrier code is YY. You can change this by typing the airline code.
In this example we are letting BA know that this passenger is travelling with another
passenger (TCP – to complete party) and the airline locater.
Press ADD.

47
The OSI is now stored within the G- field. Click on the “G” or *G
For information on OSI formats, see HELP OSI.
Changing/Deleting an OSI
To change or delete any OSI, access the Create/Modify PNR script and select OSI.
Once in this area, move down to the end of the screen. To “Change/Delete OSI”.
Place a tick in the Change box and you will be able to modify the information in the
OSI box and change the text. Once you click on CONTINUE, the system brings you
out of the script and back to the booking. The text is now changed.
To delete an OSI you can place a tick in the delete box and press CONTINUE
The system takes you out of the script and back to the booking.
Remarks Fields
You can add remarks fields to the PNR for various purposes. The three most
frequently used remarks fields are:
 General remarks
 Unique remarks
 Itinerary remarks
All of these remarks are accessed via the Create/Modify PNR script.

48
General Remarks
HELP GENRMKS
This is a multiple item field (you can add many general remarks), and it may be used
to store general information in the PNR for in-house agency use.
When using this function, type the entry in free text in the way that you would
usually write a memo to yourself or a colleague. In this way, there is a record of
actions taken in a PNR.
It is useful to add your own reference to the end of each line, along with the date
entered. This helps to have an idea of when the remarks were added and by whom
in your office.
You can type unlimited lines of between 2 and 69 characters
Adding General Remarks

These are in-house freeform remarks and do not appear on any documentation or
transmit to any airline.
Add the remark and press ADD. Each remark has to be added separately. Although
you cannot see all the text in the text box as you type, it will display in full when you
display the remarks.

49
Displaying General Remarks
The remarks field can be displayed by clicking on the *M
Changing/Deleting General Remarks

To change a General remark, select Create/Modify PNR and select Remarks.
Place a tick in the Change box and the Remarks text can be changed. Place a tick on
the Delete box and the Remark will be deleted.
Once the change/delete has been completed click on CONTINUE to complete the
change or deletion.
Note: When General Remarks are used all the remarks, regardless of what subject
they refer to (e.g. Hotel, fares etc.) are all stored together. If a General Remark is
deleted from a PNR there is no record of it in the history.
Unique Remarks
Unique Remarks can be used to store all remarks relating to a specific subject
together or to enter historical remarks (Z) that will be visible within the history if
they are deleted from the PNR.
Adding Unique Remarks

Unique remarks are entered as 5 followed by a single alpha character, either Z for
History or another letter, for example F for Fare or H for hotel.

50
Displaying Unique Remarks

The Unique remarks can be displayed by *U to view all Unique remarks, if you want
to view all Historical Remarks *UZ or Fare remarks *UF
Changing/Deleting Unique Remarks

From the Create/Modify PNR script select Unique Remarks. The Remarks are
displayed in alphabetical order.
Place a tick in the Change box to change the text in the line; you can see in the
display that the Text appears in bold ready to be amended. If you need to delete the
line place a tick on delete and press CONTINUE.
Itinerary Remarks
HELP REMARKS
Itinerary remarks are freeform messages that you create to print on a client’s
itinerary. The itinerary includes all segments but no fare. The Itinerary/invoice
includes all segments but will also have a price printed on it.
Itineraries remarks can be non-associated and print on the lower part of the
document and segment associated remarks which print beneath the specified
segment.
In this section you will learn how to add, display, change, and delete itinerary
remarks.

51
Associated Remarks
Associated remarks are itinerary remarks you create and associate to a specific
segment in a PNR. When you generate an itinerary, associated remarks appear
immediately after the segment they reference. You can have up to 66 freeform
characters per associated remark.
Note: When you add, change, or delete associated remarks, that information does
not go into the PNR history.
Adding an Associated Remark

To add associated remarks select Itin/Invoice Remarks from the Create /Modify PNR
script.
This screen also displays the option to add Invoice remarks. The defaults are all
names and all itineraries. To add an associated remark you need to select the
segment you wish to add the remark to.
Once the segment is selected and the Freeflow text added select ADD. Note, that
within the remark the associated segment and passenger are visible.
For information on Associated Remarks, refer to: HELP REMARKS
Changing and Re-associating Remarks

When you cancel a segment an alert appears.
The alert indicates that Worldspan is holding the remarks and will cancel them upon
end transaction unless you re-associate them to new segments.
You will need to add the segment for which you need to re- associate the remarks
to.

52
To re-associate associated remarks when you cancel segments, use the following
steps.
Enter: *MLX
Note: This fill in format needs to be completed in Worldspan Terminal Emulator.
The response once you enter on C to Confirm.
Unassociated Remarks
Unassociated remarks are freeform remarks which are not associated to a specific
segment. When the itinerary is printed, unassociated remarks appear at the bottom
of the itinerary. You can have up to 66 freeform characters per unassociated remark.
Note: When you add, change, insert and delete unassociated remarks, that
information does not go into the PNR history.
Adding Unassociated Remarks

To add an unassociated remark select Create/Modify PNR script and Select
Itinerary/Invoice Remarks.
Add the Remark to the Freeflow text without segment selecting.
Press ADD and repeat the process to ADD more remarks.

53
Changing/Deleting Remarks
Itinerary remarks do not appear on the face of the PNR. To view your itinerary
remark entries, you can display by selecting the *ML
Access the Itin/Invoice Remarks where you will see the change/delete options.
To amend a remark, simply place a tick in the Change box, amend the text and press
CONTINUE.
To delete a remark, place a tick in the Delete box and press CONTINUE.
Note: Associated remarks appear in segment order and unassociated remarks

appear in the order you entered them.

54
Travelport ViewTrip
To display the Sign In page for Travelport ViewTrip the web site address is:
www.viewtrip.com
To send an email to the passenger using ViewTrip, select the recod locator in the
PNR Viewer window.
Select Travelport ViewTrip.

55
Enter, the email address and complete any other required fields.
To view the entire trip, select the Expand All button:

56
Once the details have been included in the itinerary, press Send Email and the
response advises the email has been submitted.
Summary
In this module, you learned how to add the following optional fields to a
PNR:
 Form of payment
 Frequent flyer
 Seat assignment
 Address and Delivery
 Service requests
 Remarks

57
Module Review
1. What are the two types of address fields?
______________________________________________________________________________
2. Is a Delta Equity credit card accepted as a FOP by Travelport Worldspan?
_______________________________________________________________________________
3. How many FOP options are there in the pre-populated FOP list?
_______________________________________________________________________________
4. What is the difference between an associated and an unassociated remark?
_______________________________________________________________________________
5. What is the difference between an SSR and an OSI?
_______________________________________________________________________________
6. What will the following button do *MLX?
_______________________________________________________________________________
7. Why would you cancel a SSR remark rather than delete it?
_______________________________________________________________________________

58
You can keep information about your agency, corporate accounts, and your travelers
in Travelport Worldspan World Files. By having this information stored, you can copy
traveler data from the World File directly into the PNR. The three levels of World
Files are:
 Level 1 (Agency)
 Level 2 (Corporate)
 Level 3 (Passenger)
Module Objectives
 Describe the Levels of a World File.
 Display World Files.
 Copy World File information into a PNR.
World File Levels

World Files have three Levels which are used to store frequently used information;
Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3. Each World File level can have a maximum of 300
numbered lines.
LEVEL LINE NUMBERS ELIGIBILITY
1 001 - 300 AGENCY INFORMATION
PNR fields and remarks applicable to your office
2 301 - 600 CORPORATE ACCOUNT INFORMATION

PNR fields and remarks applicable to a department or
company
3 601 - 900 PASSENGER INFORMATION
PNR fields and remarks applicable to an individual client. A
level 3 World File must be associated to a level 2 World File.

1
Level 1
Level 1 contains information pertinent to your travel agency. There is one Level 1
for each SID code and it is created by Travelport. Information such as the agency
phone number which is copied to the first Phone field in the PNR is stored in the
Level 1 World File.
Level 2
Level 2 contains information pertinent to your corporate accounts. Level 2 may
contain a business phone number for each corporate account and related
information, such as the form of payment and any applicable discounts.
Level 3
Level 3 contains information specific to your individual travelers such as the
customer’s name, phone number, and address, preferred form of payment, frequent
flyer numbers, discount numbers, and meal and seating preferences.
Displaying World Files

The function identifier to display a World File is: G*
The following tables list the entries used to display World Files.
To display: Use this format:
Level 1 G*
Level 2 G**RIVERS
Level 3 G*-JONES
Level 3 attached to Level 2 G*-JONES*RIVERS
Index of Level 2 World Files G#ALL

associated to the Level 1
Index of Level 3 World Files GRIVERS#ALL

associated to a specific Level
2

2
Below is an example of a displayed World File.
The following table lists the components of this World File screen.
Component Description
1DQ Agency SID
LEVEL 2 FLY Level 2 Name
WORLDSPAN TRAINING Travel Agency’s name
001 Line number
O Line type (see next table for a list and

explanation of all line types)
91DQ020 8745 1900- Line content

T WORLDSPAN TRAINING REF$#
Note: The information on lines that are to
be copied into PNR’s must be in valid
Worldspan formats.

3
The following table lists all the possible line types and a description for each type.
Line Type Description
A (Always) When copying a World File into a PNR, A lines are

always copied.
Continuation lines indicate information is
C (Continuation)
continued from the previous line, applicable to A,
O and I lines, and are considered as one line.
Optional copy lines are only copied when specified
O (Optional)
in the copy entry.
Never copy lines contain informational data and

N (Never)
are not copied into a PNR.
Itinerary Information lines contain Flight, Car,

I (Itinerary)
Hotel, Travel Segments and Special Service
Requests (SSR).
Delete lines are deleted when the World File is
D (Delete)
ended.
Sensitive data lines contain confidential

S (Sensitive)
information and are not copied into a PNR.
Sensitive data lines must be displayed to be
viewed.
Itinerary / Invoice (LLI) lines contain information to
L (Itinerary/ Invoice)
print on blank itineraries or invoices as a HEADER,
FOOTER or LOGO.
Below is an example of the index of the Level 3 World Files associated to the Level 2
with the name FLY (GFLY#ALL)

4
The Level 3 names are listed vertically in three columns. Using the entry G1/1 will
allow you to display the Level 3 ‘CARBALLAL’ in line number 1 from column 1 in the
above screen shot. If for example you have a reference in line 4 from column 2 the
entry would be G*4/2
Below is an example of a Level 3.
Note: On line 609 a dollar symbol is shown after the GBP. This indicates that the
World File has been created to allow variable data to be entered when you copy the
line. In this example the amount of GBP to change the reservation will be added to
the copy entry.
World File Script
World Files can also be displayed using World Files scripts accessed from the World
Files Menu.
The script will launch in the Smart Panel and you can choose to display either a Level
2 or a Level 3 associated to a Level 2.

5
Copying World File Information into a PNR

There are many ways to copy World File information into a PNR ranging from just
one level through to all levels. This example will focus on the following three ways:
 From the Level 1 only.
 From the Level 1 and Level 2.
 From the all three Levels
Copying World File information into a PNR, without having the World File displayed,
is known as a Blind Copy, the function identifier for this is: #C
Blind Copy Level 1

To copy your Level 1 information into a PNR, type G* followed by end item (#), enter
C. To insert agency phone data and your name add the following to the entry: slash
(/), line number 1, dollar symbol ($) your name and press Enter.
Example: G*#C/1$JIM
Note: Line 1 in the Level 1 has been created with variable data so that your name
may be added to the line when it is copied. Variable data is preceded with a $
symbol ($) followed by the variable data (your name).
Blind Copy Level 2

To copy a Level 2 with the Level 1, enter G, followed by two stars (**), Level 2 name,
end item (#), enter C, slash (/), line number 1, dollar symbol ($) followed by your
name and press Enter.
Example: G**COUNTRY LTD#C/1$JIM
Blind Copy Level 3

To copy the Level 3, Level 2 and Level 1, enter G*, hyphen (-) followed by Level 3
name, , star (*), Level 2 name, end item (#) enter C, slash (/),line number 1, dollar
symbol ($) and your name.
Example: G*-JONES*COUNTRY LTD#C/1$JIM

6
Copying from a Displayed File

To copy all A line information from a displayed file, firstly display the World File and
then type G* followed by C.
Example: G*C
Note: This entry will copy all A lines from all levels of the World File.
Copying Selected Lines from a Displayed Level 2

To copy selected line numbers from a Level 2, first display the Level 2.
Example: G**LAY
Then enter G*C followed by a slash (/), and then the specific line numbers required.
You can enter individual line numbers separated by a slash (/) or a hyphen (-) and
the range of line numbers.
Example: G*C/301/304-306
Note: This entry will copy all A lines from all levels of the World File, and the specific
O lines 301 and 304 through to 306 from Level 2.
Copying Selected Lines from a Level 3

To copy selected line numbers from a Level 3 first display the Level 3.
Example: G*-DEREK*LAY
Then enter G*C followed by a slash (/), and then the specific line numbers required.
You can enter individual line numbers separated by a slash (/) or a hyphen (-) and
the range of line numbers.
Example: G*C/603/606
Note: This entry will move all A lines from all levels of the World File and specific O
lines from Level 3.
Copying Selected Lines from all Levels

To copy selected line numbers from all levels first display the World File. Then enter
G*C followed by a slash (/), and then the specific line numbers required.
Example: G*C/1$JIM/301/304-306/603/604
Note: This entry will move all A lines from all levels of the World File and specific O
lines from Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3. Variable data has been added to line 1
following the dollar sign ($).
World File Default

The World File default is an option that may be set up by your manager to control
the way in which the World Files are displayed.
It can be set to:

7
 Display ONLY the Level specified in the retrieval entry level

 Display ALL 3 Levels
To determine which method has been set up for your office, make the entry: GPDR
System Response:
If it has been set to display All Levels, when you display a Level 2, the response will
include Level 1 and Level 2. If you display using the Level 3 name, the response will
include all levels.
If the default has been set to display Specific Level, when you display a Level 2, only
Level 2 lines will display. If you display a Level 3, only Level 3 lines will display.
The default does not affect the copy process. Information is copied from all 3 levels
unless you use the Redisplay entries.
Redisplay / Show
When the World File Default is set to display all levels, there may be times when you
wish to view a specific level in the displayed World File. You can do this by using the
Redisplay World File or Show World File.
Redisplay World File

Using Redisplay World File will display the specific information requested, however,
a subsequent copy entry will copy only the information retrieved by the redisplay
entry. For example, you have redisplayed Level 2. When you copy the World File,
only Level 2 will be copied to the PNR.
Description Entry
Redisplay Last Display G*R
Level 2 GR2
A Lines G*RA
Level 3 and O Lines G*R3/O
Specific Qualifiers G*RQHH-ZE
All Levels and Line Types G*RALL

8
For example, using the entry: G*R2/O will redisplay only the O lines from Level 2.
Show World File

Using Show World File will display the specific information requested. A Show entry
does not affect the copy of the World File.
For example, you have displayed a World File and used the entry to Show the O lines
in Level 3. When you copy the World File, all Levels will be copied to the PNR.
Description Entry
Show Last Display G*S
Level 2 GS2
O and N Lines G*SO/N
Level 3 and O Lines G*S3/O
Specific Line G*S602
Multiple Lines G*S610/625
Range of Lines G*S602-625
For example, using the entry G*S602-605 will show only lines 602 – 605.

9
World File Script

World Files can also be displayed using World Files scripts accessed from the World
Files Menu.
The script launches in the Smart Panel and you can choose to display either a Level
2, Level 3 name or both. You also have the option to blind copy the World File and
append the agent name to agency phone line by ticking the boxes. When you have
entered the required information, press CONTINUE.
The World File will be displayed in the lower portion of the Smart Panel in the upper
section you have the option to make further choices. You can choose to copy the
World File (all A lines) with the option to add selected O lines and qualifiers or to
choose specific qualifier lines only. The agent name can also be appended to the
agency phone line.

10
World File PNR Association

Copying data from a World File to a PNR creates an association between the PNR
and the World File. Firstly, view the PNR in the PNR Viewer window then click on
*EDT, the World File information will display below the PNR buttons.
The example above shows Level 3 (DEREK) attached to Level 2 (LAY) was copied into
the PNR. The second line shows the agent ID, SID, date and time the World File was
copied.
Summary
In this module you learned how to:
 Describe Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3s
 Display World Files
 Copy World File Information into a PNR

11
For many travelers, the main factor influencing the decision of which flights to book
will be the fare charged for the journey. This is particularly so for leisure travelers
who are paying for the ticket themselves, but also increasingly important for
business travelers as many companies are trying to reduce travel costs.
When checking availability, each booking code represents a different cabin class or
fare type. On all flights a variety of fares are offered. Highest fares which are flexible
are termed normal fares. Those which are lower and less flexible are special fares.
Within each of these categories, there are different types of fares. The general
features of the most commonly used fare types are listed below.
These are general guidelines, and restrictions of each fare may vary, depending on
the route flown. The rules of each fare should be checked, and passengers advised
of any restrictions.
Module Objectives
 Identify different classes of service
 Identify different fare types
 Use basic International Fare Display formats
 Display fare rules
 Fare display using additional search qualifiers
 Use follow-up entries to update a fare display
 Display historical fares
Identifying Classes of Service

Generally, airlines offer three main classes of service:
 Economy class
 Business class
 First class
Some airlines may differentiate within a class, and in addition to the standard
service may offer a superior service within the same cabin.
However, not all airlines offer three classes - some have two and others may only
have one, and the classes offered may vary on different routes with varying aircraft
types.

1
Economy Class
This is the main class of service offered however the service provided at the airport
and on board may vary from airline to airline.
Business Class
For most airlines this class is a superior economy class, offering speedier airport
check-in, airport lounge facilities, more comfortable on-board seating, superior meal
service and in-flight entertainment.
First Class
This is the premier class offered by airlines, and they usually provide individual
check-in facilities, airport lounge facilities, superior seating and meal service and
individual in-flight entertainment.
Identifying Fare Types
Generally, there are two categories of air fares, normal fares and special fares.
Normal fares are available for all classes of service and are flexible and therefore
more expensive. Generally normal fares are valid for one year. Special fares have
many restrictions attached to them, such as minimum stay restrictions or advanced
purchase requirements. In general, they are less expensive.
Different fare types apply in different markets, but they typically fall into the
following categories:
 Normal fares
 Point to point fares
 Excursion fares
 APEX fares
 PEX and Super-PEX fares
Normal Fares
Normal fares are flexible, and there are no routing, stopover, advance purchase or
refund restrictions. They may be re-routed without restriction and purchased on a
one-way or round-trip basis. Generally normal fares are valid for one year.
The class of service normally appears on its own as the fare basis, e.g. Y, C, F, R,
although Y1 or J1 may be used to indicate the highest fare level, and YOW or YRT to
identify one-way or round-trip fares.
Note: The class of service may be followed by a seasonal indicator, e.g. YL (economy
low season)

2
Point to Point Fares

Point to point fares may be seen in any class and allow the passenger who wishes to
travel directly from point A to B to do so. There are usually no advanced booking
requirements, or refund restrictions. Routing is usually limited to direct flights,
although connecting flights may be available, providing no stopovers are made.
Fares may be sold on a one-way or round-trip basis. Round trip fares are normally
valid for a year provided there are no seasonal restrictions.
The code 2 or 3 may appear at the end of the fare basis, e.g. Y2, C3, and SLX2.
Excursion Fares
Reservations for excursion fares may normally be changed, subject to minimum and
maximum stay requirements. They may normally be purchased at any time and sold
on a return basis. Routing and stopover requirements are generally flexible, and
there are usually no refund restrictions.
The code E or EE is found at the end of the fare basis followed by the maximum stay
in terms of days or months, e.g. YLEE14 or BEE3M.
APEX Fares
Reservations for Advance Purchase Excursion (APEX) fares usually may not be
changed without a penalty, and there is often some type of refund restriction.
Usually no stopovers are allowed, and direct flights are used. They are normally sold
on a return basis and have a minimum and maximum stay requirement.
The codes AP, AN, or AB are normally included in the fare basis.
PEX and Super-PEX Fares
These are Public Excursion fares and have the same restrictions as APEX fares but
may be purchased at any time. Usually no stopovers are allowed, and direct flights
are used. There are minimum and maximum stay requirements, and they are
normally sold on a return basis.
The codes PX or SX are included in the fare basis.

3
International Fare Display

HELP 4F
A basic fare display entry returns all published fares between two cities. The
Travelport Worldspan fare display defaults to show both return and one-way adult
fares, for participating airlines.
Fares are displayed in low-to-high order, with round trips assessed at their half-
value. When one carrier’s fare is identical to another, the displays will be
randomized on subsequent entries.
The basic input to display fares from one city to another is 4F followed by the city
pair and date of travel, which may be entered in any order.
Example
 4FLONLAX27MAY
 4F27MAYLONLAX
Either of these inputs will display the same list of fares in fare display.
Screen response:
A Fare Display shows a list of fares between two city pairs. The fares are exclusive of
taxes, fees and charges, and are all subject to availability. If dates are not added the
default is today’s date.
Travelport Worldspan provides two types of fare display – MoneySaver, and Airline
Specific, and we shall look at each one individually.

4
MoneySaver Fares
MoneySaver Fare Displays are not airline specific. They display fares for all airlines
in a strictly low to high order. Both one-way and round-trip fares are shown. If one
carrier’s fare is identical to another the display is randomised.
Leave and/or return dates may be added to the fare display entry, which will
validate some of the fare rules prior to displaying the fares. This can include editing
for seasons, validity, blackout dates etc. This is known as an ‘Ultimate Fare Search.’
Use a MoneySaver fare display input to display all airline fares available from one
city to another.
Take the following steps to display MoneySaver fares for travel from Manchester to
New York.
Enter: 4FMANNYC
Screen response:

5
Screen description:
Detail: Explanation:
MONEYSAVER FARES ** Header Line

LOADED 10NOV etc. Date and time of the last fare load
City pair followed by Fare Type Code (FTC).

MANNYC NLX etc.
Default is NLX (Normal and Excursion adult fares)
Advisory message reminding to add applicable
ADD TAXES
taxes.
SEG/PFC CHARGES MAY Segment and/or Passenger Facility Charges may
APPLY apply
LN Fare line number
A/L Airline filing the fare
RESTRICT This may be preceded by the following symbols:

# Black Out dates exist.
* Fare does not Autoprice.
- Fare filed in private tariff.
$ Fare filed with an account code.
R Fare has 2 or more of the above restrictions.
N Net fare amount eligible for mark up.
(Securate Air displays only)
E Electronic Ticket required for this fare
FARE CODE Fare Basis Code
P Penalty
OW One Way fare column. If blank, the roundtrip fare

cannot be halved to create a one-way fare.
RT Round Trip fare column. If blank, the one-way

fare cannot be doubled to create a round-trip
fare.
EFF Travel Effective Date
LTK Last Date to Ticket
AP Advance Purchase requirement in either days or

months. (M is shown after figure for months)
## indicates refer to fare rule for more
information. Usually means there is a ticketing
deadline.

6
MIN/MAX Minimum/Maximum stay requirement in either

days or months. If left blank there is no
restriction. The minimum stay may show the day
of the week 3 letter abbreviations (e.g. SUN).
@ Restrictions vary by travel date, refer to the
rule.
## Refer to the rule
Rules Interactive Rules Menu
Airline Specific Fares Display
These are fares for one specific airline. Round trip fares are shown first low to high,
followed by any one-way fares, low to high.
As with the MoneySaver fare adding the leave and/or return dates will return fares
matching your requirements making it the ‘Ultimate Fare Search.’
Use an Airline Specific Fares Display when you know which carrier your passenger is
going to travel with.
Take the following steps to display Airline Specific fares for travel from London to
Seoul with KLM.
Enter: 4FLONSEL-KL

7
Screen description:
4FLONSEL-KL NLX FARES Entry repeated. Normal and Excursion fares from
AREA2/AREA3 IATA area 2 to IATA area 3.
//MPM-TS 8373// Maximum Permitted Mileage with Global Indicator

City Pair, airline, today’s date, and other airlines
LONSEL-KL etc.
offering fares on this route.
ADD TAXES Advisory message warning that applicable taxes
FOR OTHER APPLIC etc. must be added. Tab here to display IATA fares
(YY)for this route
LINE NBR Fare line number
RESTRICT This may be preceded by the following symbols:

# Black Out dates exist.
* Fare does not autoprice.
- Fare filed in private tariff.
$ Fare filed with an account code.
R Fare has 2 or more of the above restrictions.
N Net fare amount eligible for mark up. (Securate
Air displays only)
E Electronic Ticket required for this fare
FARE CODE Fare Basis Code
RT/OW
R - Round trip fare
O – One-way fare
Blank – One-way fare is shown but may be doubled
to make a round-trip fare.
FARE GBP Base Fare and Currency
TRAVEL EFF Travel effective date (Due to restrictions travel may

not be valid on this date.)
DATES DISC Date fare is discontinued

* means travel complete date exists for this fare
(Move right to see information)
TKT DTE First and last ticketing dates

FST/LST
RTG NBR Routing Number. See fare rule for specific routing

8
AP Advance Purchase requirement in either days or

months.
30 – Indicates 30 days prior to departure
1M – Indicates 1 month prior to departure
@ - Rule provisions vary by travel date
## - Indicates refer to fare rule for more
information. Usually means there is a ticketing
deadline
MIN/MAX Minimum/Maximum stay requirement in either

days or months. If left blank there is no restriction.
SU/ - Minimum stay Until Sunday (Saturday night)
/30 – Maximum stay 30 days
@ - Restrictions vary by travel date, refer to the
rule.
## - Refer to the rule
BKG CODE Class that fare must be booked in
Ultimate Fare Search (with dates)

Both MoneySaver and Airline Specific Fares Displays may have the outbound and
inbound dates added. When added Worldspan will edit the fares to only show those
applicable, based on the outbound/inbound dates given.
Take the following steps to display MoneySaver fares for travel from Paris to Dubai
departing 28 March:
Enter: 4FPARDXB/L28MAR

9
Points to Note:
 L28MAR indicates leaving 28 March.
 Edits used indicates that restrictions relating to seasonality,
blackout dates, day of the week, advance purchase and effective
travel dates have been taken into account before displaying the
fares.
Take the following steps to display Airline Specific fares for travel from London to
Athens with Olympic Airlines, departing 16 July, returning 20 July:
Enter: 4FLONATH-OA/L16JUL/R20JUL
Points to note:
 R20JUL means returning 20 July.
 This time Worldspan has used All Edits, which indicates that all
restrictions relating to the dates have been checked before
displaying the fares.
The number of days may be used instead of the return date, e.g.
4FLHRHKG-VS/L26AUG/R14D
Fare Rules
Fare Rules may be accessed from the Fare Display. It is possible to access:
 The Mini Rule
 Menu of Categories
 Specific Categories
 The entire Rule in Full Text

10
Mini Rule
The mini rule is a summary of the applicable fare rules.
To display the mini rule for the fare on line 1 of the fare display.
Enter: 4F.R1 OR select the Fare basis code

Response:
You can move down the screen by using the scroll bar on the right and read the
summary information for each category
Note: Enter 4F to return to Fare Display screen or click on the link at the top of the
screen.
Rule Categories
Within the rule summary are rule categories. To expand the rule category, click on
the link within the section.
Example:
Where there is *MORE* displayed, this means more information is available within
the category.

11
Response:
Use the scrollbar to view all information.
View the entire rule

To display all rule categories for the fare on line 1 of the fare display.
Enter: 4F.R1#ALL or if within the fare rules click on the link at the bottom of the
page.
To view the interactive category list

Enter: 4F.R1#MENU
Response:
Fare Display Options

A more appropriate fare display may be obtained by using fare display options.

12
Fare display options are used to change the type of fares displayed and may be used
in two ways:
 As part of the initial fare display input

 To update an existing display
Fare Passenger Type Code

The system default is for Normal and Excursion Adult fares. Fare type codes may be
used to specify either a different passenger type, or different types of fare.
Use a fare type code to display other passenger types and/or other fare types.
Take the followings step to display child fares from Manchester to Cape Town with
SA, departing 7April, and returning 30April.
Enter: 4FMANCPTCNN-SA/L7APR/R30APR
Screen response:
Note: For a full list of all passenger type codes see,

HELP PTCCODES1 (A-M) and HELP PTCCODES2 (N-Z).
For Fare type codes see HELP FTC.

13
Fare Display Continuation Entries

Once a Fare Display has been requested, options can be used to update the initial
request. The use of options results in a new fare display reflecting the new
requirements.
For example:
4F* Redisplay fare display
4F*/L25AUG/R30AUG Update to show new departure and return

dates.
4F*-AA-UA-CO Update to show AA, UA and CO fares.

Note: When more than 1 carrier is used
Worldspan reverts to a MoneySaver fare
display.
4F*#L Update to show fares for a specific class of

service, (in this case L class)
4F*CNN Update passenger type code (child)
4F*P Display associated fare and passenger type

codes from a MoneySaver fares display.
4F*@N Update to show fares in NUC.
4F@DEDI Update to change departure city
4F@AYUL Update to change arrival city
Fare Booking Class Display

Continuation entries may be made after a fare display to determine the correct class
of service that must be booked for different carriers participating in an international
itinerary.
Check the booking class when a different carrier is participating in an international
itinerary.

14
Refer to the following fare display from LON – LAX.
To the view the booking class code click on the 2-letter carrier code.
To view secondary carrier codes, click on the fare basis code. In this screen you can
enter the secondary carriers and the relevant booking class codes will be displayed.
Example: Line number 4 PRIMARY booking class code, is K, enter the secondary
carrier and press OK.
Response:
This indicates the booking code should be S. It also lists any flight number
restrictions.

15
Historical Fare Display
Sometimes a passenger’s plans change after the ticket has been issued. If they
change on the same day that the ticket was issued it is possible to VOID the ticket,
however it is more likely that the change is made after this time.
There are strict IATA rules governing the procedure which is covered in more
advanced Fares and Ticketing courses. The fares information contained in this
module will help you to understand the exchange ticket procedure.
There are also useful tools to assist agents follow the procedure e.g. Rapid Reprice
and World Ticket Image (WTI).
However, should you wish to view the rules of the fare that has been issued you may
use the historical fare display entries.
The basic entry must include the routing, travel date including the year of travel and
airline code.
Example: 4FMSPORD25JUN1610JUL16-UA
For additional entries and follow up formats enter:

HELP 4FHIST

16
Worldspan Fares Formats

The following are some example fare display and fare rule formats.
4FMANAMS-KL Specified carrier
4FLONMAD#B Specified booking class
4FJNBPAR-SA#C Specified carrier and booking class (carrier

must come first)
4FROMYYZCNN Passenger type –child
4FLONNBOYTH-KQ Passenger type and specified carrier
4FLONFRA@N-BA Fares in NUCs, with mandatory carrier
4FLONMCOSR Private fares only
4FLONMCOSRN Private and normal fares
4FLONMCOSRX Private and excursion fares
4FLONMUC/L12MAY With outbound and return dates

/R20MAY
Fare Rules
4F.R2 Display mini rule for fare on line 2
4F.R1#MENU Display menu of fare rule categories for line 1
4F.R4#ADV/MIN/ Display specific fare rule categories (Advance

MAX Purchase, Minimum and Maximum stay) for fare
on line 4
4F.R2#ALL Display all fare rules for the specified line number
4F.R5#BRI Display brief fare rules for line 5
4F.R3#TKT Display ticketing fare rules categories for line 3

17
Module Review
Use your study guide and the Worldspan system as you work, and use the date provided on your
name card.
1. A customer wishes to fly from London to Copenhagen on 1st of next month and asks you for
the lowest one-way fare. What is the:
 Fare Display entry:
 Lowest fare:
 Which airline:
 Fare Basis Code:
2. Your customer then asks you for the lowest round trip fare for travel with BA. Update your
Fare Display and answer the questions. What is the:
 Lowest fare:
 Booking class:
 Fare basis:
 Minimum stay:
 Maximum stay:

18
3. Your customer wishes to travel from London to Hong Kong with his family on 1st of next month.
The party consists of two adults, one child aged 7 years and an infant. He wishes to fly with
British Airways (BA) and stay in HKG for at least 3 weeks. He wants the lowest fare. What is the:
Fare Display entry:
Lowest adult fare:
Lowest child fare:
Lowest infant fare:
Booking class:
Fare basis (adult):
Minimum stay:
Maximum stay:
4. One of your customers is based in Dallas and wishes to attend an oil conference in Aberdeen,
Scotland, next month. He asks you to compare one-way fares with American Airlines (AA),
United Airlines (UA) and British Airways (BA). What is the cheapest one-way fare for each
airline?
Fare Display entry:
AA:
Fare:
Booking class:
Fare basis:
UA:
Fare:
Booking class:
Fare basis:
BA:
Fare:
Booking class:
Fare basis:

19
5. Obtain a Fare Display for round trip travel from London to Lisbon, departing on 1 st of next
month.
Update the display to show fares for TAP Air Portugal (TP) only.
How much is the lowest round trip fare?
 Fare:
 Fare basis:
 Booking class:
What are the restrictions to this fare?
 Minimum stay:
 Maximum stay:
 Advance purchase:
Are changes permitted after reservations have been made?
Write down your Entry.
If the booking is cancelled the day before departure, how much of the fare may be refunded?

20
6. Obtain a Fare Display for travel from London to Bangkok, departing on 1st of next month with
Thai Airways (TG). Your customer requests information about the QKSX2M fare (or equivalent Q
class fare for season).
What are the minimum and maximum stay restrictions to this fare?
 Minimum stay:
 Maximum stay:
If the booking is cancelled the day before departure, how much of the fare may be refunded?
Does this fare allow stopovers?
7. Obtain a Fare Display for travel from Manchester to Brisbane, departing on 1 st of next month
with Qantas (QF).
What is the lowest round trip fare?
What are the child an infant fares for the same journey?
 Entry:
 Child fare:
 Infant fare:
In which class must reservations be made on Qantas?
Write down your Answer.

21
Travelport 360 Fares provides quick and accurate pricing for air segments, and fares
are updated several times a day to ensure accurate fare quotes.
The system is designed to quote a fare for a maximum of 16 segments and a
maximum of 8 fare components. Fares for a maximum of 99 passengers may be
quoted in one entry for a maximum of 4 passenger types.
Module Objectives
 Identify Travelport Worldspan pricing assumptions
 Price an itinerary as booked
 Use the Low Fare Finder
 Store a fare quote in the PNR
 Book branded fares from a fare quote
 Create a Ticket Record
 Use additional pricing options
Travelport Worldspan Autoprice Assumptions

The Travelport Worldspan system makes several assumptions when you price an
international itinerary:
 All passengers in the booking require fare quotes
 All passengers are adults unless an infant or a specific passenger
type code has been used when the name field was added
 All segments are to be quoted
 Ticketing to take place on the same date as the fare is quoted.
 Sale and ticketing to take place in the country of the terminal
location
 A stopover is assumed where connections are 24 hours or more for
international travel and 4 hours or more if the journey is within
North America
 Passengers are not exempt from any ticketable taxes
Modifiers may be used to override any, or all of these assumptions.
Price as Booked
1
HELP 4P
After you sell the flights, you must price the itinerary.
The function identifier to price an itinerary is: 4P
This quotes the lowest applicable fare for the booked itinerary, in the booking class
held.
Refer to the following PNR:
Example Entry: 4P
Response:
-
The system quotes the lowest applicable fare for the booked itinerary.
The fare, taxes and total are displayed individually.

2
The cost and baggage allowance for each segment is displayed. In this example for
travel between London and Amsterdam there is one piece of free baggage
allowance. The passenger can pay GBP 59 for the second bag if required.
Note: This fare is not stored in the PNR anywhere. To store you must use 4PQ.
(Covered in the next section)
Store the Fare Quote

HELP 4PQ
Pricing the fare with the 4P entry does not store it in the PNR. Storing the fare
quote places the quote on the front of the PNR for future reference. This is useful
for situations where the ticket is not to be issued immediately, but you want to
record the fare quoted.
To store the fare for the previous PNR, use the entry 4PQ
Example entry: 4PQ
Response:
You must now End and Retrieve the PNR to store the quote.
Example entry: ER
Response:

3
Low Fare Finder (4PLF)

HELP 4PLF
Low Fare Finder prices the lowest available fare for the itinerary, in the same cabin
as booked.
An entry may be used to automatically rebook the itinerary when a lower fare is
found in an alternative booking class.
Note: The @ key may be added to any of the entries to ensure Travelport
Worldspan checks last seat availability for Direct Access participants.
To price this itinerary using the Low Fare Finder, enter 4P followed by the letters LF.
Example entry: 4PLF
Response:
The response indicates segment 1 should be rebooked in R class and segment 2

should be rebooked in V class to qualify for this fare, and the entry to rebook it
automatically is 4PLFB. (You could also manually change the classes and then do a
‘price as booked’ 4P entry.)
Use 4PLFB when you wish to rebook in the correct booking class for the lowest fare.

4
The 4PLFB format automatically cancels the booked flight segments and resells them
at the lower fare.
Note: 4PLFB can be used without doing a 4PLF first if you want to automatically
price and rebook without seeing the lowest fare first.
Select the 4PLFB prompt to rebook in the lowest fare.
Response:
The Travelport Worldspan system automatically rebooks the itinerary in the classes
required for the lowest fare.
The following table lists the key components of the 4PLFB response.
4PLFB Rebook the lowest fare entry
REBOOKED Agent alert indicating automatic rebook status.

Note: If the lowest fare is already booked, the
following response will display: LOWEST FARE
ALREADY BOOKED IN THIS COMPARTMENT
Note: 4PLFB does not store the fare in the PNR, to store use 4PQ. You must now End
and Retrieve the PNR to save the changes.
Low Fare Finder – All Cabin Search

If the itinerary is booked in different classes, 4PLF will return the lowest fare in the
cabin booked. The All Cabin Search returns the lowest available fare for the itinerary
regardless of the cabin already booked.

5
Example entry: 4PLFC

Response:
Points to note:
• The lowest available fare is in O class (economy), even though the
original PNR was held in J class (business).
• To rebook O class the entry 4PLFCB or 4PLFCB@ must be used.
• After rebooking, you may store the fare with 4PQ.

6
The following table lists the most frequently used pricing options.
This option: Prices itinerary at:
4P Lowest fare for the class of service sold per passenger

in the PNR. For example, if you sell segments in Y
class, the Travelport Worldspan system quotes the
lowest available Y fare.
4PLF Lowest fare available in the cabin booked for the

corresponding class of service, e.g. out in business
class and returning in economy class.
4PLFB Rebook the itinerary in the lower fare
4PLFC Lowest fare regardless of the cabin booked
4PLF.F Lowest available fare in First class cabin
4PLF.C Lowest available fare in Business class cabin

4PLF.Y
Lowest applicable in Economy class cabin
Branded Fares from a Fare Quote

Branded fares can also be accessed from a fare quote if applicable and if they have
been loaded by the carrier.
If branded fare information is available then when a fare quote entry is made (e.g.
4P, 4PLF) it will be indicated by a total fare that is clickable and colour coded blue or
the option to press “View” which is also colour coded blue.
PTC modifiers may also be used in the fare quote entry.
Hovering over the fare or View option will also display a tool-tip advising branded
fares may be available.
Refer to the following PNR that is booked with Aegean Air, the 4P entry has been
made
Enter: 4P
You can see the name of the booked fare is “ECOGOLIGHT” you are offered a Brand
upsell from GBP38.00 and the option to “VIEW” or press the total amount to access
full details of the brands.

7
Selecting the total fare or View launches the brands and ancillaries screen in the
Smart Panel.
The branded fares are listed on the left-hand side of the screen with the additional
price (per sector) for each option displayed.

8
Some airlines may use the same booking code for different brand tier levels. Hover
over the brand name to display the Brand Modifier.
The Economy GoLight (P) with a Fare Basis code of PNOBAGD is Brand Modifier BF1
The Economy Flex which is also in booking code P, has a Fare Basis of P2A3M with a
Brand Modifier of BF2.
Selecting the ALL OPTIONS button displays all available downsells if applicable.
Details of the services offered for the fare are displayed in the middle section of the
screen. Extra ancillary services that may be purchased after booking will also be
listed in the right-hand column. The details change depending upon which option
you select.

9
For more information on the Ancillary services listed you can select the icons in the
Ancillaries panel to expand the information.
You can see here that the fare quote button is currently disabled, this is because you
already have a fare held.
Only when changing the brand selection does Fare Quote become enabled, at this
point the Close button will also become Cancel to allow you to return to the booking
without making any upsell changes if required.
You can sell multiple branded fares for any flight option in the same branded fares
screen.
In this example let’s select GoLight on the outbound and Flex on the inbound which
is an upgrade.
A running total will be displayed at the bottom of the screen, the cost for each
portion is shown at with a plus or minus amount along with the original selection;
the color indicates an upsell versus down sell.
To finalize the fare, select the FARE QUOTE button.

10
The summary screen displays the details of the selected flights. In this example you
can see the LHR-ATH with Economy GoLight and on the ATH-LHR sector the
Economy Flex. Hovering over the brand names displays the Brand Modifier.
As the original flight is already booked you must now click on Rebook, this will cancel
the original flight(s) and rebooks the new flight(s) confirming the upgrade and/or
downgrade.
As soon as the new flights have been sold, a notification will appear, and the flights
can then be viewed in the PNR Viewer or Smart Screen.
The PNR now shows the TKG FAX line as AUTO PRICED which indicates a ticket
record has been created.
To display the ticket record:
Enter: 4*

11
The ticket record, displays with the Brand Modifier making it easier to verify the
fare(s) that were quoted.
In this example:
Segment 1 has been priced with Brand Modifier BF1
Segment 2 has priced with Brand Modifier BF2
For more information see the section on Ticket Records.
Multiple Flight and Carrier Branding
Multiple flight and carrier branding in the same branded fares screen is also
possible.
For example, a booking from Atlanta to Chicago with Delta Airlines on the outbound
and United on the return gives a branded fare when a fare quote entry is made.
Then when the brands and ancillaries screen is presented you can choose to upsell if
available.
There could be occasions where multiple carrier bookings offer branded fares with
one carrier but not the other. A message will appear advising that the brand
information is not available.

12
Branding can still be added for the other flight leg if required and the process can be
completed in the usual way.
In the summary screen however it will show information for the flight that has the
upgrade and the flight that doesn’t offer branding will just show the price as
originally booked.
Private Fares
When a pricing entry includes a private fare, the request screen will show the
response with the lock symbol
The same symbol appears in the Brands and Ancillaries screen. Hovering over the
lock symbol displays a tooltip stating that it is a Private Fare.

13
OB fees
Travelport Smartpoint now displays OB fees, also known as carrier ticketing fees on
pricing entries 4P and 4P* showing the GRAND TTL and the TKT FEE.
A displayed ticket record does not include the details of the OB fees; however, they
will show at the time of ticketing.
The Brands and Ancillaries response shows the fare including tax and OB fees.
Screen example:

14
When upselling on any part of the trip, the fees are shown as PENDING.
Screen example:
The Summary includes the details of the FARE, TAXES, FEES AND DISCOUNTS and the
TOTAL FARE.
Screen example:

15
Ticket Record
HELP TR
When pricing an itinerary using the Brands and Ancillaries screen, the Ticket Record
is created automatically.
When pricing without the Brands and Ancillaries screen you must create the Ticket
Record for the PNR.
The Ticket Record guarantees the fare for ticketing purposes and is valid only on the
date it was created. Travelport Worldspan guarantees the fare until midnight local
time on that date.
The ticketing date entered in any 7TAW or 7TAX field must also match the date on
which the Ticket Record is being stored, or an error will be displayed.
The entry 4P* creates a Ticket Record based on the current autoprice for ticketing
the same day.
The PNR has been previously booked, and a fare quote stored to the front of the
PNR (4PQ). However, as you can see it still states, ‘NOT PRICED’. This is because
there is not a Ticket Record created.
The PNR is now ready to be ticketed. Use the entry 4P* to store a Ticket Record.
Example entry: 4P*

16
Response:
The following table lists the key components of the 4P* response.
4P* Ticket Record entry
PNR PRICED ON 19DEC for TKTG 19 DEC The date the PNR was priced and is
valid for ticketing the same day
PRICING RULES VALIDATING CARRIER Validating carrier

DEFAULT KL
FBC ADT YFFGB Fare Basis Code and Passenger Type
LON KL AMS251.07KL LON251.07NUC Linear fare construction and

502.14END segment fee in NUCs (Neutral Units
of Currency)
END = end of fare construction
BASE GBP TX/FEE GBP TKT TTL GBP Base fare, taxes, and total fare with
currency
321.00 129.24 450.24

17
You must End and Retrieve to store the Ticket Record.

Example entry: ER
Response:
In this example the Ticketing Fax Line (TKG FAX) now shows ‘AUTO PRICED’,
indicating a Ticket Record has been created by means of an autoprice entry. If the
Ticket Record was not created by an autoprice entry, the TKG FAX line would show
‘MANUALLY PRICED’.
You can display the Ticket Record using the entry 4*
Ticketing Fax Line

The Ticketing Fax Line (TKG FAX) is an information field in the PNR that shows the
current status of the Ticket Record.
You may see the following text in the Ticketing Fax Line:
TKG FAX Explanation
AUTO PRICED When you enter 4P* in a PNR with

a current ticketing date.
MANUALLY PRICED Rate Desk Pricing (RDP) or World

Ticket Image (WTI) formats have
been used to add the fare
manually. The fare is not
guaranteed.
AWAITING PRICE VERIFICATION When you enter 4P* in a PNR with

a future ticketing date.
NOT PRICED A Ticket Record does not exist.
AGENT ASSISTED PRICED When you add a pricing option to

the 4P*- entry that alters the fare
rules. The fare is not guaranteed.

18
View Brand Details from ticket record and stored fare
When a ticket record or stored fare quote has been added to a PNR, an interactive
link is added to the pricing details.
Example of a displayed ticket record using the entry: 4*
Example of a display stored fare using the entry 4*Q
Selecting the link displays a read only brand details screen. This gives you gives you
access to the Brands and Ancillaries applicable to the pricing in the PNR.

19
The total price including taxes is shown and if you hover over the brand name you
can view the brand tier level.
Penalties and cancellations quick access

Penalty and rules information can now be viewed from a booked PNR, select the
hyperlink in the Ticket Record or the Electronic Ticket Record in the Smartscreen.
Selecting the fare basis code displays the voluntary change information.
There is a Search field at the top which allows you to find the specific penalty for
your customer. If more information is required, select the View All Rules link and
hyperlinks for all rules are displayed.
If a PNR has multiple fare basis codes, select FBC at the top of the list, and each code
will come up in multiple columns of information.
If the fare basis codes are part of a round trip, then you can select any of the fare
basis codes to display the fare rules. An alert message is received if it is not the first
segment advising that the most restrictive rules apply.
Use the back button near the upper left corner of the screen to return to the
previous page.

20
Screen examples:
If there is no voluntary change information, it returns the penalty information

(#PEN) related to the fare basis code.
• Each column header identifies the fare basis code and route.
• Within each column, a View All Rules link displays the Rules
Summary page for the FBC and on it all 4F entries are active links.
• When multiple FBCs return multiple columns, a Hide button enables
you to hide columns that are not required.
• Enter text in the search box to find text in the rules. The results are
highlighted.
• Press the back button to return to the previous screen

21
Pricing Options
Pricing options may be added to the basic 4P, 4PLF, and 4P* entries to override the
basic assumptions listed at the beginning of this module.
Some pricing options which may be used are:
 Passenger Type Code
 Segment Select
Passenger Type Codes (PTC)

HELP PTCCODES1 (A-M)
HELP PTCCODES2 (N-Z)
It is not normally necessary to include a passenger type code as part of the pricing
entry as it can be incorporated into the name format.
However, if it is omitted from the name field, the system will assume all passengers
are adults (with the exception of infants, who are specifically identified in the PNR).
In this PNR you will need to use passenger type codes to identify a passenger type
when the names and relevant PTCs have not been entered into the PNR yet.
Example entry: 4PPADT/ADT/CNN
This will price a fare for all passengers in the PNR, identifying passenger 3 as a child.
Points to note:
 You can add a two-digit age to the PTC if there is an age restriction.
 The number of PTCs used in the entry must equal the number of
seats held.

22
Response:
Note: If the PTC is not in the name field and you try to create a Ticket Record with
4P*PADT/CNN you will receive an error CK FORMAT-PTC, as the system tries to
match PTCs in name field and the Ticket Record.
So, in this scenario you should add the correct PTC to the name field before creating
the Ticket Record.
If a PNR contains a child and the parents are in another PNR, when you price or
create the Ticket Record you must add the PTC e.g. 4PPCNN or 4P*CNN to obtain
the child fare as the child fare is valid only for an accompanied child, and as there is
no adult PTC in the PNR, the system defaults to the adult fare.
Passenger Type Codes with an Age Requirement

If an airline has not filed any age restriction and standard rules apply, then the
passenger type codes such as CNN, SNN may be used in the pricing entry, e.g.
4PPCNN or 4PPSNN
However, if an airline has filed an age restriction, NN must be replaced by the age
for fare quote purposes, e.g. 4PPC10 or 4PPS65. The age entered is validated
against the age restriction in the fare rule.
If the PTC has been included in the name field, it is not needed when you price. If it
is used, then it will override the PTC in the Name field.

23
Segment Select
The segment select pricing modifier overrides the assumption that you want to price
all segments.
The segment select modifier is: S
You can use this modifier to price a single segment, a segment range, or selected
segments.
Single segment
To price segment 2 of the itinerary as booked, enter 4P followed by the segment
select modifier (S), and the segment number.
Example entry: 4PS2
Segment range
To price segments 1 through to 2 and segment 5.
Example entry: 4PS1-2/5
Note: All segments within the range must be air segments.
To price segments 1, 2, 3 and segment 5, 6, 7, 8

Example entry: 4PS1-3/5-8
Selected segments
To price segments 1 and 4 as booked, enter 4P followed by the segment select

modifier (S), segment number 1, forward slash (/), and segment number 4.
Example entry: 4PS1/4
Points to note:
 The / (slash) is equal to plus and the – (dash) is equal to through to.
 You can use segment select with the Low Fare Finder entries e.g.
4PLFS1/4 and for creating Multiple Ticket Records (refer to the next
section for Multiple Ticket Records).
Fare Savings Comparison
HELP 4P.Y
The Fares Saving Comparison function displays a comparison price for different
classes of services, passenger type codes or segments in a PNR.
Examples:
4P.B
The system prices the itinerary in B class.
4P.C
The system prices in C class.

24
If there is a Ticket Record present in the PNR, then the system will calculate the
difference.
Example entry: 4P.F
As a Ticket Record is present the response shows the fare comparison.

If you don’t have a Ticket Record the system will still price as though booked in the
designated booking code (e.g. 4P.B) but the difference in the price cannot be
calculated, you will receive the following response:
Note: If the comparison price is required then you would need to rebook the
segments in the correct booking code.
Custom Discount Pricing

HELP 4PFEX
ASK Answer ID 12947
There may be some instances when your passenger qualifies for a discount, you can
use custom discount pricing to price the itinerary.
Note: The Ticketing FAX line will display MANUALLY PRICED and will not be
guaranteed
Percentage discount
To price the itinerary with a discount amount off the base fare, enter 4P or 4P*
followed by FEX a forward slash (/) a dash (-) the $ symbol and the discount amount.
Example entry: 4PFEX/-$100
Note: The $ means a monetary value, so if you are working in FRA it would be EUR,
in LON it means GBP and in ATL in means USD
25
Amount discount
You can also apply a percentage discount:
Example entry with ticket designator: 4PFEX/-75/TKTDSG1
Combining Pricing Modifiers

You can combine pricing modifiers to override multiple assumptions. Pricing
modifiers can be specific to a Passenger Type Code or segment.
After entering the first modifier, enter additional modifiers separated by an end
item (#).
Example entry: 4PPCNN#S1/6
The above entry would price segments 1 and 6 only for a child.

26
Multiple Ticket Records

Segment selection entries can also be used with Ticket Record entries. However,
when a PNR contains a Ticket Record, and another Ticket Record is created, it will
automatically override the existing Ticket Record. If multiple Ticket Records are
required, as in the case of separate tickets, then the Multiple Ticket Record option
must be added to the 4P* entry.
Example entry: 4P*S1/4#TR
Input: Description:
4P* Function identifier for creating a ticket record
S1/4 Segments 1 and 4
#TR Format to indicate multiple Ticket Records.
(This may be omitted from the first Ticket Record but
MUST be included on any further Ticket Record entries).
You may want to issue separate tickets for this itinerary for example the BA flights
on segments 1 and 4 and then the VS flights on segments 2 and 3. You can use the
standard ticket record entry for the first ticket record.
Example entry: 4P*S1/4
Then you must append #TR for the second ticket record.
Example entry: 4P*S2/3#TR
Response:
The PNR will show ‘Multiple Ticket Records Exist’. You must End and retrieve (ER)
the PNR to store the Ticket Records. You can place a copy of all the fares on the
front of the PNR (if required) by using the entry 4PQCTRALL and then display the
fare quote using the entry *FQ.

27
You can display the Ticket Records using the entry 4*this shows if the Ticket Record
has been Auto-Priced, manually priced etc. and which segments are included in
which Ticket Record.
Example entry: 4*
Response:
Refer to the next section ‘Working with Stored Fares’ for information on how to
view specific Ticket Records when multiple Ticket Records exist.
Working with Stored Fares

Fares are stored in the PNR, as fare quotes on the front of the PNR, and as Ticket
Records. Any subsequent quoting or Ticket Record entries will override the one
currently stored unless qualifiers are used to prevent this.
Here are some sample formats to display and delete quotes and ticket records:
4* Display single ticket record
Display specific ticket record when multiple

4*TR1
records exist
4P*@ Delete single ticket record
4-TR@2 Delete specific ticket record
4-TR@ALL Delete All ticket records
4*Q Display single fare quote
*FQ Display multiple fare quotes
Delete the stored fare quote (stores in

4PQ@
history)
Delete the stored fare quote for specific

4PQ@TR3
ticket record.
4PQ@TRALL Deletes all stored fare quotes

28
Displaying Fare Rules

HELP 4PR
After pricing an itinerary, you can access detailed fare information. Automated fare
rules display subjects, such as the type of penalty that may apply or advance
purchase requirements. You can see a rule summary or a rule category on a specific
subject (refer to Module 6 for more detail).
You can display fare rules if you’ve priced the itinerary using 4P, 4P* or 4PLF. The
fare rules screen identifies the types of rules and restrictions that govern the fare,
such as penalties that may apply, advance purchase requirements, and blackout
dates.
Example entry: 4PR

Response:
Fare rules may be displayed for a single fare component.

If there are multiple fare components, you must specify which component you wish
to display.
Example entry: 4PR-1

29
Response:
You can scroll through all the fare details. The most frequently used categories are
highlighted in orange.

30
Summary
This module described the formats you need to store the fare in the Travelport
Worldspan system.
Specifically, you learned how to:
 Price an itinerary as booked
 Use the Low Fare Finder
 Store a fare quote in the PNR
 Book branded fares from a fare quote
 Create a Ticket Record
 Use additional pricing options

31
Module Review
1. Identify three assumptions Travelport Worldspan makes when pricing an itinerary.
_________________________________________________________________________
2. What is the format to find the lowest price regardless of the cabin booked?
_________________________________________________________________________
3. Describe the fare quote you receive as the result of a 4PLF entry.
________________________________________________________________________
4. What is the format to price segments one and four only using the low fare finder?
_________________________________________________________________________
5. What does ‘AUTOPRICE’ indicate in the Ticketing FAX line?
________________________________________________________________________
6. What is the Passenger Type code ACC?
________________________________________________________________________

32
Travelport Worldspan is capable of quoting many fares automatically. However,
there are occasions when you may wish to price an itinerary at a different fare from
the response obtained from an Auto Priced entry, or price using a fare which is not
included in the Fares Display.
Module Objectives
 Create a Ticket Record using Agent Assisted Pricing options
 Create a Ticket Record using World Ticket Image (WTI)
 Create a Ticket Record using Rate Desk Pricing (RDP)
 Modify Ticket Records
Agent Assisted Pricing

ASK Travelport Answer ID 16581
INFO AAP
HELP AAP
Agent Assisted Pricing (AAP) is sometimes referred to as Pricing by Fare Basis Code
and may be used when PNRs do not Auto Price, or they Auto Price at a fare other
than the desired one. You can direct the system to price, using specific Fare Basis
Codes (FBC) which are shown in the Fares Display. Only fares which appear in the
Fares Display may be used in AAP.
When using AAP, the system validates the rules attached to the specified FBC unless
the override option (#NR) is used to inhibit the system from checking the Fare Rules.
Agent Assisted Pricing – Not Overriding Rules

Not Overriding Rules is used when there are two or more applicable fares using the
same booking code. The system is designed to price at the lowest applicable fare
and there may be times when a passenger prefers to take a higher unrestricted fare.
For example, an itinerary qualifies for the C2BAD fare, but the passenger wants the
more expensive, less restrictive C2BA fare.
To price the itinerary for all segments, all passengers using the C2BA fare, the basic
entries are 4P or 4P* followed by two dashes (--) and the fare basis code you wish to
price:
To price the fare: 4P--C2BA
To create a Ticket Record: 4P*--C2BA
As you are not overriding any rules and allowing the system to validate the C2BA
fare, the response in the TKG FAX line is an Auto Priced PNR.

1
Agent Assisted Pricing – Overriding Rules

There are occasions when you need to price a booking and not comply with the Fare
Rules. For example, an airline gives you authority to make the reservation in a
booking class which is not the one shown in the Fare Rules, or when the airline
allows you to book within the Advance Purchase requirement.
To use AAP to price an itinerary you must include an option to inhibit the system
checking some of the rules, or all of the rules. The options are:
Explanation: Entry:
Override validation of the rules. #NR

The system will include any applicable Q
surcharges.
Same as the #NR entry but includes the #NRV

validity (NVB/NVA) as per the dates in the
segments.
The #NR and #NRV entries override the validation of the Fare Rules except for:
 Ticketing effective and discontinued dates
 Passenger Type Codes
 Sales Restrictions
 Stopovers
 May require endorsement information to be added manually if
penalty and/or restrictions are applicable to the Fare Basis Code.
Additional endorsements may be added manually to the PNR, or at the
time of ticket issuance.
There are other entries which inhibit the system checking ALL of the rules. This
includes any applicable surcharges except for airport/fuel and security surcharges.

2
Explanation: Entry:
Override validation of ALL rules. #NRX
Same as the #NRX entry but #NRXV

includes the validity (NVB/NVA) as
per the dates in the segments.
The #NRX and #NRXV entries override the validation of ALL the Fare Rules
 These entries do not include any applicable surcharges except for
airport/fuel and security.
 Any endorsements which are shown in the Fare Rules are not added
to the Ticket Record. Endorsements must be added manually to the
PNR or at the time of ticket issuance.

Example of Overriding Rules using #NRV
The airline has given you authority to price at the lowest available fare, with the
itinerary in the booking code of Q.
Step 1
Determine the FBC you are going to use in the AAP.
There are several ways to check on the FBC:
 Check the Fare Display and Fare Rules. Manually select the FBC(s).
 If the airline has advised that you may use a booking code, and price
using another lower booking code, you could use the Fare Comparison
entries. For example, if you are able to book in Q class, but charge a T
fare, price using the entry: 4P.T
 The system will check on the price as though the itinerary was
booked in T.
 Use the Low Fare Finder entries if you require the lowest available
fare. Entry: 4PLF or 4PLF@

3
The response shows the lowest available fare with the corresponding FBC.
In this example the segments will be priced using the FBC of TLWSXUK.
Also, check the endorsements that apply as these may have to be added
manually.
Step 2
Price the itinerary using the AAP entry including the option #NRV
 The option #NRV, inhibits the system from the checking the rules
and adds the validity for the dates, Not Valid Before (NVB) and Not
Valid After (NVA) as per the dates in the segments.
 To price the itinerary for both segments using the FBC of TLWSXUK,
with the validity dates as per the segment, the basic entries are 4P or
4P* followed by two dashes (--) and the selected FBC. The last option
is the #NRV:
 To price the fare: 4P--TLWSXUK#NRV
 To create a Ticket Record: 4P*--TLWSXUK#NRV
The TKG FAX line shows Agent Assisted Priced which indicates this was
manually priced and is not guaranteed by Worldspan.
To display the Ticket Record, enter: 4*

4
The validity dates shown in the Ticket Record are the same as the segment
dates.
If you require validity dates other than the segment dates, use the entry
#NR or #NRX to override the rules and include the dates in the entry. See
example entries below.
Notice that the endorsements have not been added to the Ticket Record.
Use the manual entries 5-ER, or use the endorsement section in the
Create/Modify PNR script:
Note: A maximum of 29 characters are permitted per line.
Manual Entries for Agent Assisted Pricing
The most common options used in AAP are; specifying PTCs, Segment Selection, No
Rules Check and adding Validity Dates.
There are other options using AAP. See HELP AAP and INFO AAP for additional
information.
To start the entry, use the Pricing Function Identifier of 4P or if a Ticket Record is to
be created, use 4P*
If there are no PTCs or segment selection, the 4P or 4P* is followed by 2 dashes (--)
to indicate there are only ADT type passengers, and the FBC applies to all segments.

5
Examples for Basic AAP with No Segment Selection or PTC

selection
All segments, all customers are ADT. FBC applies to all segments.
Not overriding the rules.
4P*--CBA2
All segments, all customers are ADT. FBC applies to all segments.
Overriding the rules using the #NR option. Validity Dates same as
segment dates
4P*--KLAP3M#NRV
If you are overriding the rules, the options NR, NRV, NRX and NRXV are added to
the end of the AAP entry.
PTC and Segment Selection

When using PTC and Segment Selection there are some points to remember:
 The Passenger Type Code identifier of P is followed by the PTC or
PTCs separated with a slash (/).
 Up to a maximum of 4 PTC codes may be priced per entry.
 The child PTC may be entered using the numerical age or NN for
example: CNN or C06
 After entering the PTCs add an end item (#)
 When using PTCs, the specific FBC for each passenger type must be
entered and separated with an asterisk (*). You may need to check
the Fare Rules to determine the correct FBC.
 If the same FBC applies to all segments, then segment selection is
not required.
If segment selection is required, the identifier S is used followed by the segment
number(s)
 When segment selecting, if the same type of FBC is used, the
segments are linked using an end item (#). For example: S1–
QLSX1M#S2-QHSX1M
 If the FBCs are not the same type (trip select), the segments are
linked using 2 asterisks (**). For example: S1–QLSX1M**S2-YEE1M

6
Examples for PTC and Segment Selection.
Segment select with different FBCs of the same type:

Segment 1 FBC QLSX1M
Segment 2 FBC QHSX1M
4P*-S1–QLSX1M#S2-QHSX1M#NRV
Segment select with different FBCs of the same type:

Segment 1 and 2 using the FBC of BLXAP
Segments 3 and 4 using the FBC of BLWAP
4P*-S1/2–BLXAP#S3/4–BLWAP#NRV
Passenger Type Codes:

PTC of ADT using FBC QLSX1M
PTC of CNN using FBC QLSX1M/CH33
4P*-PADT/CNN#-QLSX1M*QLSX1M/CH33#NRV
Passenger Type Codes and Segment Selection:

PTCs of ADT and CNN
Segment 1 - ADT FBC of QLSX1M and QLSX1M/CH33 for the CNN.
Segment 2 – ADT FBC of QHSX1M and QHSX1M/CH33 for the CNN.
4P*-PADT/CNN#S1-QLSX1M*QLSX1M/CH33#S2-
QHSX1M*QHSX1M/CH33#NRV
Segment Selection with different FBCs – Trip Select:
4P*-S1–QLSX1M**S2-YEE1M#NRV
Validity Dates
The override options of #NR or #NRX may be followed by V.
 This option picks up the dates of the segments and places them in
the Not Valid Before and Not Valid After area of the Ticket Record.
 If required, you may specify the validity dates using the option #NV
 The option is followed by the NVB/NVA dates separated by a slash
(/).
 You may leave either the NVB or NVA blank depending upon how
you wish the validity dates to show in the Ticket Record. For example:
 Specify both NVB/NVA : #NV10NOV/15NOV
 Specify NVA only: #NV/15NOV
 When PTCs and/or Segment Selection are used, the Validity option
must follow each FBC.

7
Examples for PTC and Segment Selection and Specifying Validity

Dates:
Segment select with a NVB/NVA dates:

Segment 1 FBC QLSX1M. Validity NVB 09OCT and NVA 09OCT
Segment 2 FBC QLSW1M. Validity NVB – blank and NVA 09NOV
4P*-S1–QLSX1M#NV09OCT/09OCT#S2-QLSW1M#NV/09NOV#NR
Passenger Type Codes with NVB/NVA dates:

PTC ADT using FBCs – Segment 1 MJSX3M and segment 2 MKSX3M
PTC CNN using FBCs - Segment 1 MJSX3M/CH33 and segment 2
MKSX3M/CH33
Segment 1 Validity Dates: NVB 09OCT NVA 09OCT
Segment 2 Validity Dates: NVB 16OCT NVA 09NOV
4P*-PADT/CNN#S1-
MJSX3M#NV09OCT/09OCT*MJSX3M/CH33#NV09OCT/09OCT
#S2-MKSX3M#NV16OCT/09NOV
*MKSX3M/CH33#NV16OCT/09NOV#NR
Passenger Type Codes with NVB/NVA dates and Trip Select:

PTC ADT using FBCs– Segment 1 MJSX3M and segment 2 YEE1M
PTC CNN using FBCs – Segment 1 MJSX3M/CH33 and segment 2
YEE1M/CH33
Segment 1 Validity Dates: NVB 09OCT NVA 09OCT
Segment 2 Validity Dates: NVB 16OCT NVA 09NOV
4P*-PADT/CNN#S1-
MJSX3M#NV09OCT/09OCT*MJSX3M/CH33#NV09OCT/09OCT
**S2-YEE1M#NV16OCT/09NOV*YEE1M/CH33#NV16OCT/09NOV#NR
To complete the process:

 If required copy the Ticket Record to the front of the PNR, enter:
4PQC
 End and Redisplay PNR to store the Ticket Record and Fare Quote
 To display the completed Ticket Record, enter: 4*
 Check the endorsements and if required, add or change the
endorsements manually (5-ER) or use the Endorsements section in the
Create/Modify PNR Script.

8
Manual Pricing
Manual Pricing is used when you wish to price an itinerary using a FBC that is not
included in the Fares Display. The most common reason for creating a manually
priced fare is if you have negotiated rates with an airline.
All details of the fare, such as FBCs, fare amount, surcharges, baggage allowance and
taxes must be known before you start the manual pricing process. Endorsements
must be added manually using the 5-ER entries, the Create/Modify PNR Script, or
included at the time of ticket issuance.
You can price up to a maximum of 4 Passenger Type Codes and a maximum of 24
segments using Manual Pricing.
There are two methods for Manual Pricing:
 World Ticket Image (WTI)
 Rate Desk Pricing (RDP)
Manual Pricing Using WTI

INFO WTI / HELP WTI
The WTI template, sometimes referred to as a mask, must be completed in the
Terminal Emulator screen using a PNR which includes all the mandatory fields.
The entries to initiate WTI are:
Explanation: Entry:
All PTCs, all segments 4/MR
Specific PTC, all segments 4/MR-PCNN
Specific PTCs, all segments 4/MR-PCNN/MIL
Specific segments, all PTCs 4/MR-S2/4
Specific PTCs, specific segments 4/MR-PADT#S1/3
Specific segments, all PTCs, using Multiple 4/MR-S1/3#TR

Ticket Records
Example of creating a Ticket Record using WTI

The following PNR is for one adult passenger, and the manual price applies to both
segments.

9
To initiate the WTI process, enter: 4/MR

The response is the WTI mask with the flight details from the PNR added to the mask
as coupon 1 and 2 of the ticket.
The first line of the mask indicates that the fare is for a PTC of ADT and there are no
other PTCs to be priced.
Traditionally a paper ticket consisted of a “book” of four coupons. As there are only
two coupons required for this itinerary, the system advises that you are viewing
Book 1 of 1. The unused coupons 3 and 4 are shown as VOID.
If an itinerary required six coupons, you would need two books. The system displays
the information as to which book you are viewing. The first book would be Book 1
of 2, and the second book would be Book 2 of 2. As the mask is completed, the
system automatically displays the next book of coupons for you to input the data.
The fields in the mask require the following information:
Field: Explanation:
FBASIS/T-DSG Fare Basis Code and Ticket Designator. Enter * to copy
previous fare basis code.
BASE FARE Base Fare for each Fare Breakpoint. Enter * to copy previous
base fare amount.
NVB Not Valid Before. Use # to add the same date as the segment,
or type a different date, example: 10JAN
NVA Not Valid After. Use # to add the same date as the segment,
or type a different date, example: 10FEB

10
BAG Baggage Allowance. Add baggage allowance using piece or

weight. Examples: 2PC (2 pieces), 30K (30 kilos) 20L (20
pounds)
FC/FARE FC1 indicates flight coupon 1, FC2 indicates flight coupon 2
CONSTRUCTION etc. This field is where you show any additional charges such
as:
Q – Security Charges, S – Stopover Charges, M – Mileage
Increase.
Example: (S25.00) for stopover charge.
Enter * to copy amounts from the previous FC.
TT Total Type. Example BN (Base fare no tax) or IF (International
Fare to input Base Fare and an Equivalent Amount).
ADD TAX Additional tax screen holds up to 20 taxes. Enter X to display
additional screen.
TX 1-7 Tax fields. Also used for PFCs (Passenger Facility Charges).
ROE Rate of Exchange
BF Total Base Fare and Currency Code
EV Equivalent Amount and Currency Code
NUC Neutral Units of Construction. Enter Y if the fare construction
is in NUCs.
BBR Bank Buying Rate
Example of completed WTI screen

Note: Before using a template or mask, ensure that you are in the OVR mode. Using
the INS mode inserts characters and corrupts the template.
The Shortcut entries used for filling in the template are:
Shortcut: Explanation:
* Placing an asterisk in the first space of the appropriate field, copies
the data or the amount from the last field entered. This can be
done for the Fare Basis Code, Base Fare and Q/S/M fields in FC
fields.
# Not Valid Before/Not Valid After dates – same as segment dates.

11
In this screen there is space for 7 taxes. If additional space is required, place an X in
the ADD TAX field to display the Tax Screen.
Note: Taxes are always input in the currency of payment. In this example, the
journey originates and the ticket is being purchased in FRA. The fare will be in EUR
and the taxes will be calculated and shown in EUR.
Enter in the template after the last entered field. In this example after the
NUC(Y
The response is the Tax Screen pre-populated with the 7 taxes from the first screen.
Add the additional taxes to the screen. If PFCs apply, the airport code must be
included in the tax entry.
Note: The PFC amount is your local currency, in this example EUR. The IAD3.33 is
the EUR amount for the PFC for IAD. When the mask is completed, the system adds
the applicable USD amount automatically to the PFC charge.
Enter after the last tax has been added.

12
When the final template has been completed, the response is a screen where you
can Store the Ticket Record (4/M) or add additional options.
The response to a completed template for all PTCs and segments is:
The first line of the response shows that the fields of the template have been added
correctly (OK) and shows the currency code and the total amount.
Additional options such as adding commission or IT/Tour Code numbers are
available on this screen.
If there are no other options to add, tab to Store Ticket Record 4/M and enter.
Alternatively, you may wish to review the Ticket Record before Storing the Ticket
Record:
Tab to 4*T and enter.
The response to the 4*T shows the details of the Ticket Record that has been
created including the FBCs, Validity Dates and Baggage. In the Fare Construction
area, you have the breakdown of the fare and the breakdown of the XT taxes.
Notice that the system has added the USD amount of 4.5 for the IAD XF tax.
At the bottom of the screen you have the entries to Store, or to return to the Item in
Progress.
If the Ticket Record is complete enter: 4/M
The response advises the PNR has been priced and to End Transaction to Store.

13
When the PNR has been ended and displayed, the TKG FAX lines shows MANUALLY
PRICED.
If required, you can Store the Fare on the front of the PNR by copying the Ticket
Record using the entry: 4PQC
Note: Remember to add endorsements either using the 5-ER entry or the
Create/Modify PNR script, or, add the endorsements at the time of ticket issuance.
Multiple Passenger Type Codes

If there are multiple PTCs included in the PNR, as the first screen and Tax Screen are
completed, the system will display the first screen again for you to complete the
information for the next PTC.
The first screen will keep displaying until all the PTCs have been priced.
Alternatively, you can create a separate Ticket Record for each PTC by including the
PTC in the 4/M entry when you start the WTI process. If more than one Ticket
Record is to be created, the Multiple Ticket Record option of #TR must be added to
the 4/M entry.
Explanation: Entry
Specific PTC, all 4/MR-
segments. Multiple PADT#TR
Ticket Records to be
created
Specific PTCs, specific 4/MR-
segments. Multiple PCNN#S1/3#TR
Ticket Records to be
created
Rate Desk Pricing

INFO RDP
HELP RDP
Rate Desk Pricing (RDP) is the alternative method to creating a manually priced
Ticket Record.
When exchanging a ticket, the only method for creating the new Ticket Record
manually is Rate Desk Pricing.
The PNR must include all mandatory fields prior to using RDP.
A series of steps are required to complete the RDP and as each step is completed,
the system prompts you for the next step.

14
RDP Steps
Step 1 – Initiate RDP – 4/R
Start the RDP process by selecting all segments, all PTCs, or specify PTCs
and segments:
Explanation: Entry
Basic entry for all PTCs, all segments 4/R
PTC select 4/R-PCNN
Segment select 4/R-S2/3
PTC and segment select 4/R-PADT#S1/5
Multiple Ticket Records. Specific PTC 4/R-PADT#TR
Multiple Ticket Records. Specific segment 4/R-S2/3#TR
Step 2 – Stopover/Connection – 4/X-

Specify which segments are to be connections. If all segments are
stopovers, then enter a zero (0):
Explanation: Entry
Specify no connections - X. All points are 4/X-0

stopovers
Specify connections on segment 2 4/X-2
Specify connection on segment 2 and 4 4/X-2/4
Step 3 – Segment Data – 4/S-

The Segment Data refers to the coupons in the ticket and includes the
information on: FBC, Validity Dates and Baggage.
The Validity Dates(NVB/NVA) may be the dates in the segment (#A) or
specific dates:
Explanation: Entry
FBC applies to coupon 4/S-1-BAP3#A#*23K

1
Validity Dates as per

15
the segments
Baggage 23 kilos
Multiple FBCs: 4/S-1/4-BHAP#A#*2PC**2/3-YX#A#*2PC

FBC applies to coupons
1 and 4
the segments
Baggage 2 pieces
FBC applies to coupons
2 and 3
the segments
Baggage 2 pieces
FBC applies to coupons 4/S-1/2-BHAP#NV01JUN/28JUN#*2PC

1 and 2
4/S-1/2-BHAP#NV01JUN/#*2PC
Specific Validity Dates
Baggage 2 pieces 4/S-1/2-BHAP#NV/28JUN#*2PC
Step 4 – Fare Calculation – 4/L-

The Fare Calculation line is for the fare breakdown including the city codes
and airlines, and charges such as surcharges or stopover charges. If the
itinerary is International, the breakdown should be shown in NUCs or if
Domestic, then the local currency may be shown.
The 4/L- entry is free-format with a maximum of 240 characters (8 lines of
30 characters each). When entering a lengthy fare breakdown, the spaces
between letters and numbers may be omitted.
Explanation and entry:
Fare Calculation entry using NUCs:

4/L-LON BA AMS 103.96 BA LON 103.96 NUC207.92END ROE. .610616
Basic Domestic Fare Calculations:
4/L−ATL DL LAX 580.91 DL ATL 580.91 USD1161.82 END
4/L-FRA LH HAM 305.50 LH FRA 305.50 EUR611.00 END
Step 5 – Fare Data – 4/

The Fare Data includes the amount of the fare plus the tax codes and tax
amounts. A maximum of 20 taxes may be added.
There are various options depending upon the itinerary, and whether you
require U.S. taxes to be calculated and added automatically to the fare:

16
Explanation: Entry
Base Fare with all taxes added manually 4/BN
Base Fare – automatically adds U.S. Domestic 4/BF

Excise Tax
Base Fare – automatically adds U.S. Departure and 4/BD

Arrival Tax
Total Fare – automatically calculates Base and 4/TF

Standard Domestic Excise Tax
International Fare – used when travel originates in 4/IF

another country and an Equivalent Fare amount is
required
Examples:
4/BNEUR628.00#XDE6.57#XRA32.53#XOY42.18#XUS12.83#XXA3.67#X
XY5.14#XYC4.04#XYQ132.00
4/BFUSD160.82#XXF6JFK3MIA3#XZP2.50MIA2.50
4/BDUSD389.00
4/TFUSD278.00
4/IFJPY294300#EVEUR2095.00#XOI3.56#XSW14.52#XYQ81.84
Step 6 – Store the Ticket Record – 4/

Once the Fare Data has been entered you must Store the Ticket Record and
End the Transaction.
Explanation: Entry
To Store the Ticket Record 4/
End Transaction E or ER
If required copy the Ticket Record to the front of 4PQC

the PNR
Note: Remember to add the endorsements either pre-stored in the PNR or

added at the time of ticket issue.

17
Displaying RDP Ticket Record in Progress

Prior to storing the RDP, you may display the progress of the Ticket Record
Explanation: Entry
Display Ticket Record in progress 4*T
To return to the item being worked on prior to the 4/*

4*T entry
RDP Error Corrections

Prior to storing the RDP, you are able to modify the RDP.
Explanation: Entry
To ignore all data that has been entered for all PTCs. 4/IGNPNR
The Stopover/Connection cities prompt is returned.
This entry can be used after any RDP step.
To ignore all data that has been entered for the current PTC. 4/IGNPTC
The 4/L- prompt is returned. This entry can be used on any step
prior to entering the Fare data.
To ignore the fare calculation data that was entered for the 4/IGNLDR
current PTC. Use if an error is detected in the fare calculation.
The 4/L- prompt is returned. This entry can be used directly
after the fare calculation entry (4/L-). If an error is detected in
the Fare Calculation, after the Fare data has been entered, the
fare data must be ignored (4/IGNFAR) before the Fare
Calculation can be ignored.
To ignore the last Fare/Tax entry. 4/IGNFAR

This entry is used directly after the 4/BN type entry.

18
Deleting the Ticket Record

The Ticket Record created using AAP or RDP may be deleted using the normal delete
entries:
Explanation: Entry:
To delete a single Ticket Record 4P*@
To delete specific Ticket Record in a 4-TR@2

Multiple Ticket Record PNR (#TR)
To delete multiple Ticket Records 4-TR@1/2/4

4-TR@1-2/4
To delete all Ticket Records 4-TR@ALL
Modifying A Ticket Record

HELP 4/@R
A Ticket Record may be modified regardless of the method used to create the Ticket
Record. The process is the same whether the PNR was priced using Auto Priced
entries, AAP entries or RDP entries.
Note: Modifications made to any Ticket Record will cause the TKT FAX line in the
PNR to show MANUALLY PRICED which indicates the price is not guaranteed by
Worldspan.
Rate Desk Pricing entries are used to override the existing data in the Ticket Record,
however, there are no prompts in the modification mode.
The steps used to change a Ticket Record are:
Step 1 – Initiate RDP modification
Step 2 – Modify one or more areas of the Ticket Record.
Step 3 – Store the changes
Explanation: Entry:
Initiate RDP modification on single 4/@R

Ticket Record
Initiate RDP modification for specific 4/@R-TR2

Ticket Record when Multiple Ticket
Records exist. Example to modify
Ticket Record 2.

19
Step 2 – Make the modification

Determine the area or multiple areas to be modified:
 Stopover/Connection data
 Segment data
 Fare Calculation data
 Fare data
When making modifications to Segment data, the Fare Calculation data or
the Fare data, the Passenger Type Code (PTC) must be included in the
entry, even if only one passenger type exists.
Stopover/Connection data: 4/X-
Explanation and Entry:
Modify Stopover/Connection data to show connections on coupons 2 and 4
4/X-2/4
Segment data: 4/S-PTC

When changing Segment data, all information on FBC, Validity Dates and
Baggage must be re-entered even if only one piece of the data is being
changed.
Modify Segment data for a Ticket Record with single coupon.

Change coupon 1 to new FBC of YL
4/S1-ADT-YL#A#*20K
Modify Segment data for a Ticket Record with multiple coupons.

“Starting” at coupon 1, change the Baggage Allowance for coupons 1 through 4
4/S1-ADT-1-4-VXE14#A#*1PC
Fare Calculation: 4/L-PTC

When changing the Fare Calculation area and no changes are to be made
to the Fare Data, the breakdown of the XT taxes must be added to the 4/L-
entry.

20

Modify Fare Calculation data
4/L-ADT-RIO TA LIM 500.00 NUC 500.00END ROE1.00
4/L-ADT-LON VS HKG 1899.72VS LON Q4.25 1899.72NUC3803.69END
XT239.YQ 9.40HK
Fare Data: 4/BN-PTC

Modify Fare data using the applicable Base Fare code: BN, BF, BD, TF or IF
4/BN-ADT-EUR580.00#XDE6.57#XRA25.73#XOY7.50#XYQ43.00
The other additional options for Commission, Ticketing Date, IT numbers

may be modified as well. Note that Commission and IT numbers require
the applicable PTC to be included in the entry.
Modify Commission 4/K-ADT-R03
Modify Ticketing Date 4/D-26FEB
Modify/Add IT Number 4/T-ADT-IT1AAGD29
Delete IT Number 4/T-ADT
Step 3 – Store the changes
Explanation: Entry:
Store the changes 4/
End the Transaction E or ER

21
Example:
The following Ticket Record had been created using WTI (the headerline
shows the entry used to create the Ticket Record 4/MR).
The FBC for coupon 2 is incorrect and should have been HRTWLH1M.

Entry: 4/@R
The response shows that the entry was accepted, and you are (OK) to enter
the changes (@).
Step 2 – Make the modification
The change is to the FBC which is included in the Segment data area of the
Ticket Record (4/S-).
To make the change, the entry is 4/S followed by the coupon number
where the change is starting from, followed by a dash (-), the mandatory
PTC followed by a dash (-), the coupon number(s) that need to the changed
followed by a dash (-) and the required changes. Remember all the data on
the specific line(s) such as Validity Dates and Baggage must be included.
Entry: 4/S2-ADT-2-HRTWLH1M#A#*1PC
The response shows the change is complete.

You may either make additional changes or if no other changes are
required, store the Ticket Record.
Entry: 4/

22
To complete the process, End the Transaction.

Entry: ER
The changes will be reflected in the Ticket Record. Display the Ticket
Record:
Entry: 4*
The response shows the modified FBC for coupon 2.

The headerline shows the entry 4/@R indicating that the Ticket Record was
changed using RDP Modification.
Summary
In this module you learnt how to:
 Create a Ticket Record using Agent Assisted Pricing options
 Create a Ticket Record using World Ticket Image (WTI)
 Create a Ticket Record using Rate Desk Pricing (RDP)
 Modify Ticket Records

23
Module Review
Use your Course Book, HELP/INFO pages and Online Help to answer the following questions.
1. What is the entry to create a Ticket Record using AAP for the following PNR?
Override the rules using the option #NR

Fare Basis code of BE6MUK1 for both segments
The Validity Dates are to be the same as the segment dates.
____________________________________________________________
2. In WTI, which shortcut symbol is used in the NVB and NVA fields to have the validity
dates as per the dates in the segments?
____________________________________________________________

24
3. Your trainer will advise the routing and booking code for a round trip itinerary.
Origin: _______________ Destination: _______________
Dates: _______________ / _______________
Booking code: _______________
Using the information, create a PNR for one passenger in your name and
End and Retrieve the PNR.
Note the PNR record locator: ____________
Your trainer will advise the details of fare and whether you are to use
World Ticket Image (WTI) or Rate Desk Pricing (RDP) to create the Ticket
Record:
Fare Basis Code: _______________
Base Fare: _______________
Validity Dates: As per the dates in the segments.
Baggage allowance: _______________
Taxes: _______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
Advise the trainer when you have created the Ticket Record. Then copy
the fare to the front of the PNR and End Transaction.

25
4. Your trainer will advise the routing and booking code for a round trip itinerary.
Origin: _______________ Destination: _______________
Dates: _______________ / _______________
Booking code: _______________
Using the information, create a PNR for 3 passengers, your name and 2
others. The 3rd passenger is a child aged 10. End and retrieve the PNR.
Note the PNR record locator: ____________
Create a Ticket Record for the PNR using Agent Assisted Pricing (AAP).
Your trainer will advise the details of Fare Basis Code:
Fare Basis Code: _______________
Validity Dates: As per the dates in the segments
Advise the trainer when you have created the Ticket Record. Then copy
the fare to the front of the PNR and End Transaction.

26
Fare Shopping provides access to the wealth of Travelport 360 Fares and Low Cost
Carriers, incorporating a wide variety of options to customize and streamline the
search.
The Aggregated Shopping results are returned with lowest available fares and
flights. Fare Shopping is able to integrate all public, private and net fare content
housed within the Travelport 360 Fares database.
Direct Payment Carriers use the ACH (Air Content Hub) allowing access to Low Cost
availability and fares. The Direct Payment Carriers load their data on the ACH and
agents can access this content alongside the standard GDS carrier fares through
Travelport Smartpoint.
A maximum of 6 flight segments may be handled by a single request.
A maximum of 9 passengers can be included in each transaction.
Accounts codes and ticket designator codes can be included in the search criteria.
The option to exclude economy unbundled fares may be selected
One-way, round-trip, circle trip, single and double open-jaw itineraries are
supported.
Low fare searches can be performed with or without a booked itinerary.
Pricing and Availability modifiers can be used to influence the search process and
provide customized results.
Fare Shopping merges the manual comparison of tariff data and seat availability in a
single request. You can search for low fares and available flights and make
reservations in three easy steps:
1. Search for low fares
2. Book the itinerary
3. File the fare in the PNR
Note: e-Pricing must be activated for your agency before you can make a
request.
Fare Shopping Objectives

 Use Power Pricing with a booked itinerary
 Use Power Shopper without a booked itinerary
 Identify Branded Fares
 Use the interactive calendar to access the e-Pricing script
 Use Flex Shopping without a booked itinerary

1
Tier Levels
ASK Answer ID 13913
INFO EPG
The number of alternative flight options returned depends on the tier level
designated to your agency. There are 3 tier levels as follows:
Tier 1
Power pricing 4 alternatives
Power Shopper 25 alternatives
Power Flight Search 10 alternatives
Flex 1 Day 9 alternatives
Tier 2
Flex Airports 9 alternatives
Flex O & D 9 alternatives
Tier 3
Flex More Days 49 alternatives
Flex Airports 36 alternatives
Flex O & D 36 alternatives
Flex Weekend 42 alternatives
Your agency will automatically be activated with Tier 1.
Autofill city codes/names

When city or airport codes are required, there is a combo box that is triggered to
autofill by typing in airport codes, city codes, departure or arrival city codes.
Entering one or more characters for an airport/city code displays a drop-down list
that tries to match the entry being made. When entering a full city name with
multiple airports, an alphabetical list is provided.

2
Screen example:
Fare Options
The ePricing screen contains a section for Fare Options. Drop-down the option to
view fields that can be used when pricing.
The default for the fare type is Public and Private Fares and you have the option to
select Public Fares Only or Private Fares Only

3
If required, you can change the default by choosing the required option and
selecting Save Fare Option. This will save the default to your local settings and next
time you open the ePricing screen your selected option will be the default.
Promotional fares indicator

Promotional fares have a time-saving indicator. When a Promotional code is
included in the ePricing script, the results clearly show the difference between
promo fares and regular fares.
Screen example:
The Pricing Options show the promo label and is also included in the Brands and
Ancillary screen.

4
Screen examples:

5
OB fees
In the ePricing response, OB fees, when applicable, are included as part of the grand
total.
Screen example:
The Fare Detail shows the TICKET TOTAL, ADDITIONAL ITINERARY FEES (OB), and
GRAND TOTAL.
Screen example:

6
The Brands and Ancillaries response shows the fare including tax and OB fees.
Screen example:
When upselling on any part of the trip, the fees are shown as PENDING.
Screen example:
The Summary includes the details of the FARE, TAXES, FEES AND DISCOUNTS and the
TOTAL FARE.

7
Screen example:
Using Power Pricing with a Booked Itinerary

ASK Answer ID 13914
HELP 4PLI
Power Pricing prices a booked itinerary at the lowest available fare and searches
schedules and fares to find the lowest priced alternative itineraries.

8
Example entry: 4PLI (optionally append @)

Note: 4PLI quotes a total fare for all passengers in the PNR instead of quoting a fare
for each passenger. Example response:
The ePricing screen opens with the results from the price search.
The first option returned is always the lowest available fare in the applicable cabin
for the booked itinerary.
Following this you have the alternative itineraries and fares offered, up to the
maximum number of alternatives for your tier level. You can rebook or view the fare
breakdown for any of the alternatives offered.
E-Pricing script
You can also use Power Pricing via the e-Pricing script. This can be accessed from the
Fares & Pricing heading in the Menu Items; the Top 10 Go! Scripts in the Smart Panel
and the Shopping option in the interactive calendar.
The e-Pricing script offers additional search options and the facility to email your
customer with the alternate options. Refer to the next section for more details on
this.

9
Using Power Shopper with an Unbooked Itinerary

HELP $P
ASK Answer ID 22985
Power Shopper searches for low fare alternatives without having a booked itinerary
offering both GDS and Direct Payment Carrier options (known as Aggregated
Shopping.) As well as one way and round-trip journeys, a maximum of 6 city or
airport codes can be specified in the entry to form longer itineraries.
The basic entry starts with $P followed by the departure date, the routing and the
return date. There are many other optional entries which may be added to tailor the
shopping request to your customers’ requirements.
Example entry: $P10NOVLONBCN/R14NOV
You can also access Power Shopper via the e-Pricing script.
Example of Power Shopper via the e-Pricing script:
The Miscellaneous Search Options contain drop-down menus for you to select the
number of Adults, Children, Senior’s, Passenger Type Codes and the Class of Service.
Multiple airports: Using the Flight Shopping Search, you may use airport codes,
and then specify if you want multiple airport results for only the origin or destination
or both by simply checking the Multiple Airports box.
When an airport code is entered, response will only return matching airport codes.
When a city code is entered, all airports within that city code will be returned.
Multi airport options will be returned when operating in the metro area.

10
Note: The Number of Alternates restricts the number of flight options returned. This
must not be greater than the number allowed within your activated Tier Level.
If your agency has negotiated air fares you can optionally add the Account code if
required. Click on the arrow to display the Fare Options.
Response:
Fare Options allows you to select fare types, add specific account codes for GDS
carriers and also to limit GDS carrier fares to those with the account codes.
Direct Payment Carrier options exist to add an account and carrier code. There is
also the option to add any promotional codes and the carrier code to avail of any
promotional fares offered by the airline.
Multiple carriers and account codes can be added using the + option or delete using
the trashcan icon.
Click the ‘More Options’ link if you wish to select a Specific Alliance, specify
connection preferences or use Equivalent Currency Pricing.

11
Response:
Once you have completed the required fields click Continue.

When a shopping request is made either manually or via the e-Pricing script, it will
go out to Shared Services to gather the aggregated content, the following response
will be received:

12
Aggregated Shopping Response:
The results are displayed in the Smart Panel within the e-Pricing script. Pricing
options will be ordered from low to high and results will contain Traditional GDS and
Direct Payment Carrier content if available, but not mixed in the same pricing
option.
Number of pricing options message/ headline advises how many total pricing
options and additional itinerary options have been returned.
The More button is displayed when an airline offers several itinerary choices at the
same price. Selecting the More button, enables you to view and sell any itinerary at
the displayed price point.

13
Option to display Page 2, this displays the second page of results.
In the results screen you can decode airline codes, booking codes, airport codes and
arrival indicators by hovering over the links. Clicking on the Flight Number opens a
dialog box containing the Flight Service information for GDS carriers only.
GDS Carrier Example:
Details Display
To view the fare details, such as the last day to purchase and fare basis information
click on
The detail opens in a new dialog window.
Rules
You can view the rules of both GDS and Direct Payment Carrier options by clicking
on of the desired option. You will then need to click on the component of the
journey you wish to view.
GDS Carrier response:

14
Direct Payment Carrier Response:
A GDS Carrier will display the full rules in a scrollable pop-up box. The most
frequently used categories are highlighted in orange.

15
Direct Payment Carrier Response:
The rules of a Direct Payment Carrier will display in a pop-up box giving brief
information regarding changes and usually stating that the ticket is non-refundable.
It will also advise customers to refer to the airline website for full terms and
conditions of carriage.
Filter
You may change the requirements for the shopping results using the Filter icon
which displays at the top right-hand side of the screen. Click on the icon to open the
Filters. Clicking on the icon again will close the Filters.
The filters window contains many options enabling you to sort your search by price,
stops, specific departure and arrival airports, airlines and time. Once you have made
your selection click on Apply. Clicking on the Reset button will set all the selections
to the default and close the dropdown.

16
When a filter has been applied the search results display is updated with the
selected filter options and ‘FILTERS APPLIED’ will be displayed near the upper menu
to indicate that the search results are currently being filtered. ‘Opening the filters
dropdown and clicking on ‘Reset’ will remove this.

17
E-Mail
The e-pricing script offers you the ability to email your customer the itinerary and
fare options. To do this select the itineraries you would like to email by ticking the
check box of each option, you can select one or multiple alternate itineraries.
Once you have selected all the Alternates that you wish to be sent to the customer,
click at the top of the screen.
Response:
The email screen displays with mandatory and optional fields.

Note: The mandatory fields are marked by a red asterisk.

18
Add your email and add any comments you may have. the recipient’s email and
optionally add any comments you may have. You can save your email address and
create comments for future use, so that the next time you access this screen, these
fields will contain the saved data.
The itinerary contains the flights and includes the Journey Time. This will be
included in the email to the recipient.
Once the fields have been completed with the required data, click CONTINUE and an
advisory will appear at the top of the screen to let you know that the e-mail has
been sent successfully. The email will be sent to the Recipient(s) and show that it
has been sent from your email address and >youritinerary@worldspan.com
Book
Once your customer has selected which option they would like to confirm, click
. Both GDS and Direct Payment Carriers may be booked within the same
PNR.
Response:
The response shows the ‘selected flights are booked’ with additional options for you
to choose e.g. book seats, car or hotel.
Once your flights have been booked you will need to do a fare quote entry such as
4P to quote and store the Direct Payment Carrier fare, all other GDS flight segments
will need to be priced separately.
For all Low Cost reservations required information such as FOP, email address,
billing information and gender may need to be added to complete your PNR, (these
requirements vary from carrier to carrier.) Required information can be added using
manual entries or the Create/Modify PNR script.
To view Low Cost information within a PNR use *ML

19
Branded Fares
Branded Fares may also be available in your fare shopping results screen depending
on your routing. Branded Fares can be available on both Direct Payment Carrier and
Traditional GDS Carriers and they are easily identified as the prices are clickable and
color coded blue. Fares that are colored black are not Branded Fares.
Once you have clicked on a branded fare a Brands and Ancillaries screen will appear
in the Smart Panel.
Response:

20
Fare Family is the name given to the hierarchical grouping of branded fares. Fare
families will be listed on the left-hand side of the screen such as Standard, Inclusive
and Flexi (some airlines will call their families by different names.) The additional
price (per sector) for each option will also be displayed.
You can select a fare family option by ticking the check box.
This will display detailed information on that fare, what it includes and extra
ancillary services that may be purchased after booking.
For more information on the Ancillary services listed you can click on the icons in the
Ancillaries panel to expand the information.

21
Example Response:
The outbound flight will automatically be selected once you have chosen your fare
family for the outbound flight you must click to select the return flight, you can then
choose an upgrade/downgrade.
If booking EasyJet and an upgrade is selected on the outbound flight this upgrade
will automatically be applied to the return flight also. A running total will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen which will show the additional costs if you
choose to upsell the flights you have selected.
You can also choose to view the fare families as a Matrix View showing at a glance
what is included and what is not for each fare family.
Matrix view makes it very easy to quickly compare the fares and make an informed
choice.
The services are shown in a structured order with like items together, for example
baggage information.

22
In the Matrix View the Green Ticks are clickable and will expand the Ancillary
information in a pop-up window.
When all selections have been made, click on Fare Quote to send the Information
through (with the updated prices if applicable.)
A summary screen will then appear detailing your selection along with a price
breakdown and Fare total.

23
If the price has been updated from the original fare a prompt at the top of the
screen will advise this.
Response:
to choose e.g. shop Ancillary services, book a car or hotel etc.
Once flights have been confirmed you will need to make a fare quote entry such as
4P to quote a Direct Payment Carrier fare, all other GDS flight segments will need to
be priced separately.
All Direct Payment Carrier reservations require additional information such as form
of payment, email address, billing information and gender, these items will need to
be added to your booking before it can be completed, (requirements can vary from
carrier to carrier).
Required information can be added using manual entries or the Create/Modify PNR
script.

24
Brand Modifiers
When available, the brand tier level will be included in the pricing response as a
Brand Modifier.
Example for booking a branded fare using PowerShopper.
The customer wishes to fly on non-stop or direct flights to Tokyo on JAL Hong Kong
on Japan Airlines (JL) and wants to have non-penalty fares quoted.
The partial PNR has been created and the epricing screen has been displayed. You
complete the Departure Information and the Arrival and Return Information and
scroll down to view the Miscellaneous Search Options.
Select the check box for Nonstop/Direct Flights only as the customer does not want
connection flights. He also wanted non-penalty fares, so the Include Penalty Fares
has been de-selected. The Specific Airline radio button has been selected and JL
added to the airline code.
Press CONTINUE to search for flights and fares using Power Shopper.
25
Select the blue fare link to display the Branded Fares and Ancillaries screen. In this
example, the customer prefers Itinerary 2.
Hover over the brand name to display the Brand Modifier for the Economy Class (B).

26
The brand tier level for the Brand Modifier is BF10.

When the desired fare type has been selected, press FARE QUOTE to move to the
Fare Shopping Summary screen.
To display the Brand Modifier on the Shopping Summary screen, hover over the
brand name.
Press CONFIRM to book the flights.
to choose e.g. shop Ancillary services, book a car or hotel etc. You must end
transaction to confirm the booking.

27
Close the ePricing screen to return to the Smart Screen.
The flights have been booked and the TKG FAX line shows AUTO PRICED indicating a
ticket record has been created.
Display the ticket record:
Enter: 4*
The ticket record shows the Brand Modifier for each segment and the other
modifiers used in the pricing entry. In this example the default modifier #FSR was
used to search for public and private fares. The other modifier is the #NP to search
for non-penalty fares.
The last modifier is #TR which used to specify multiple ticket records. This modify
was automatically added to the 4P* entry by the system.
Currently the other modifiers supported with the Brand Modifier are:
PTC select
Currency override
Segment select
Penalty modifiers
Account code
Fare type
Tax exempt
Unbundled economy fares

28
Fare shopping using the Calendar

The Smartpoint Calendar is contextual, that means that you can trigger air
availabilities, Fare Shopping requests, hotels and cars from the calendar.
The calendar is located with the icons in the top right-hand area of the screen:
Select the date range by clicking on a start date and then click on the return date.
Right click to display the options and Select Shopping.
Note: The departure date and return date are pre-populated from the calendar.
Enter the origin, destination and complete the optional fields as required e.g. specify
an airline or the number of passengers.
Once all required fields are completed click CONTINUE.

29
Flex Shopping
A Flex Shopping request provides the lowest itineraries for the date requested, one
day before the requested departure date and/or return date, one day after the
requested departure date and/or return date, and a combination of all three
options.
Note: Flex Shopping must be activated before it can be used in a Power Shopper
request and e-Pricing must be activated before Flex Shopping is activated.
When you launch the e-Pricing script and select the option for Flex Shopping you are
presented with additional options.

30
The default is Flex Days or Weekends and One Day, change the selection if
necessary, however, remember the available options will depend on the tier level
designated to your agency.
Example response:
In the above example the response shows the lowest fares in a grid view. The lowest
fare on the dates requested is shown in green and the lowest fare on an alternative
date is shown in orange. You click on the fare to view the itinerary options for that
fare.
Summary
In this module you learnt how to:
 Use Power Pricing with a booked itinerary
 Use Power Shopper without a booked itinerary
 Identify Branded Fares and Fare Families
 Use the interactive calendar to access the e-Pricing script
 Use Flex Shopping without a booked itinerary

31
Module Review
1. Name 2 ways to launch the e-Pricing script?
______________________________________________________________
2. What information would display if you clicked on the flight number in following screen shot?
_____________________________________________________________________
3. In the above screen shot what does the +1 indicate?
_____________________________________________________________________
4. What do you press to view other options for the same fare?
_____________________________________________________________________
5. Detail the steps you would take to send an email to a customer with details of the alternate
itineraries.
_____________________________________________________________________
6. What is the difference between Power Pricing and Power Shopper?
_____________________________________________________________________
7. Can both GDS and Direct Payment Carriers be booked within the same PNR?
_____________________________________________________________________

32
8. How would you identify a Branded Fare?
___________________________________________________________________________
9. True or False: When booking Branded Fares, the same fare family for the outbound and return
flight should be selected for EasyJet?
___________________________________________________________________________

33
Introduction
Travelport Smartpoint offers an easy system to book ancillary services available on
participating Traditional GDS carriers. Such bookable items that fall under ancillary
services are extra baggage allowance, lounge access, pre-bookable meals etc. Each
carrier may offer different services and these optional services maybe booked once
you have ended the PNR.
Payment for optional services is collected via EMD. Some carriers may offer a credit
card facility.
Ancillary services are also available on Direct Payment Carrier bookings, for details
on the booking and payment process for these carriers refer to the Direct Payment
Carrier Module.
Objectives
 Access the Ancillary script
 Book ancillary services offered by participating airlines
 Be familiarized with Ancillary formats

1
Ancillary script
Traditional GDS Carriers require Ancillary Services to be added once the PNR has
been ended. For Direct Payment Carriers Ancillaries must be added before the PNR
has been ended, the exception is easyJet who will allow ancillaries to be added
before or after end transaction.
To book Ancillaries follow the easy booking steps using the script available.
The Ancillaries Script can be accessed in the following ways
From the Reservations Tab
Selecting the Shopping Trolley Icon in the PNR Viewer or Smart Screen.
Using the Quick Command option #ANC or the cryptic format DAS*
Look at the following example:
By launching the ancillaries script via the methods illustrated above, this will display
in the Smart Panel

2
Steps to booking ancillary services:

1. Firstly, select the relevant passenger name from the drop-down list, if
there is only one passenger in the booking it will default to their
name.
2. At the top of the screen you have the option to filter your results by
Ancillary group for example baggage; however, the default it set to
ALL. Choose the applicable group if required.
Note: Frequent Flyer numbers may affect Ancillary prices; therefore,

Frequent Flyer numbers should be added prior to selling Ancillaries
to ensure the passenger is offered all services they are entitled to.
3. Enter the amount required of each desired ancillary, for the

respective segment. You have the option to segment select your
Ancillaries as the outbound and return flights are listed separately.
4. You also have the option to include/exclude View-Only Services. The
default is ticked however you can untick so that these services are
not displayed. View Only Services are only bookable at the airport.
3
5. You can double click on the ancillary to obtain more information.

After viewing, press the X to close out.
6.
7. When you hover over the box to add the number of pieces, the
maximum number is displayed. If you try to add more than
maximum, the review button is disabled and a red box appears.
8. SSR/Pencil icon – some ancillaries will require additional SSR

information; you will need to check with the carrier if this is required
and the specific format that should be used.
If SSR is required click on the pencil icon, a pop-up window will

appear, select the relevant ancillary, enter the SSR information in the
4
correct format and click on Add and then click on Apply.
9. Once you have completed your Ancillary selections click on Review.

10. You will be presented with a summary screen listing all selected
Ancillaries with a total cost at the bottom of the screen. Any free
form SSR text you have added will also be displayed, if free form text
has not been added a prompt will advise you to add this if it is
required by the carrier.
If you are ready to confirm your Ancillary Services click on Apply, you
can also click to modify or cancel your request.

5
Travelport Smartpoint will respond letting you know that the Ancillaries
you selected are booked.
Note: You may also see EMD in the total area indicating that the carrier
requires the ancillary to be purchased with an EMD.
If you selected multiple ancillaries at a tiered price, the Summary screen
shows the breakdown by making each cost a separate line item.
Hover over the multiple amount in blue to display the number of pieces
per price.
If the airline has Embargo information press the information button to
view the full details.
If you ignore an Embargo Alert and try to book a conflicting ancillary, a

further error message displays on the review screen.

6
To display a summary in the PNR of the Ancillaries services that have

been booked click on *DAS from within the smart screen or make the
manual entry.
The additional services will be listed along with the cost and associated
flight segment. A status code of CD will show that they are confirmed.
Clicking on *G from within the PNR viewer will also show the automatic
SSR (ASVC) requests for the Ancillary Services booked and the status
codes should be KD for confirmed.
For most Traditional GDS Carriers payment for Ancillary services will be
made via EMD. For more information regarding EMD please refer to Ask
Travelport Answer ID 43782 for a factsheet for individual carrier
requirements.
For Traditional GDS carriers, you may see EMD in the total area
indicating that a carrier requires the ancillaries to be purchased with an
EMD.
Note: Ancillaries are sold in local currency and agents in dual currency
regions need to fulfil the traveler’s local currency requests. Travelport
Smartpoint offers the option to select an alternative currency for
ancillaries in these regions.

7
Ancillary services
Ancillary services are not displayed for unconfirmed segments. If the PNR contains
multiple segments with some segments confirmed and others unconfirmed,
requesting ancillaries displays only those segments that are confirmed.
Name
A name is required in the PNR. If no name is present the following advice is

returned:

8
Useful Formats
Commands: Description:
DAS* This entry will launch the graphical

screen.
DAS*Cxx This entry will launch the graphical screen
for the carrier specified xx = carrier code
for multi-carrier PNRs
#Sn The Segment number can be appended
#Sn/n (and) on to the DAS* entry
#Sn-n (range)
#Nn.n The Passenger number can be appended
on to the DAS* entry
DAS*Exxx/yy This entry is used to launch the graphical
screen where xxx is the requested
currency code and yy is the requested
country code
4P#DASO This entry will launch the graphical
screen.
Optional Form of Payment

You may wish to add the Form of payment using the Form of payment script, which
is accessed via the Create/Modify PNR script (pencil icon in PNR viewer.) The script
is specifically designed for Direct Payment Carriers. If you are adding ancillaries to a
direct payment carrier booking before end transaction add the form of payment
here.
If you are adding ancillaries to an easyJet booking after you have ended the booking,
a pop-up window will appear after you have confirmed your ancillaries for you to
enter payment details.
In this example you can see that the only options for Ryanair are Credit or Debit
card.

9
Form of Payment
The display will change depending on the methods of payments selected by each
airline.
The following are the options available.
 Cash
 Credit card
 Debit card
 Agency payment
 Travel account card
 MCO
 eNett VAN
The Payment scripts in the ancillary shop/seat map shop are modified to support
multiple direct payment airlines and the total due for each airline.
In this display you can see that there are two airlines due payment and that Delta
airlines is due USD 260.00.

10
Prepopulate FOP from PNR

If a credit card has been entered as the FOP in the PNR this will be prepopulated.
Remember that the security code is mandatory, and the address field can be
prepopulated from the address field in the PNR
Add the cardholders’ details. Use the drop-down arrow to populate each line of the
address from the PNR.

11
Once you have completed a PNR in Travelport Worldspan for your customer, you
may need to issue documents such as tickets, invoices or itineraries. This module
describes how to issue these documents through the Travelport Worldspan system.
Module Objectives
 Display the A.I.R. Table to determine printer address to check printer status
 Describe Ticketing Options and pre-store in PNR
 Issue electronic and paper tickets
 Void tickets
 Exchange tickets
 Process a Full Refund
Travelport Worldspan can issue two types of tickets:
 Electronic tickets
 Paper tickets
Paper tickets may be restricted from use depending upon the location and
the validating airline. Additionally, an airline may have a total restriction on
paper tickets and may not accept any paper ticket coupons for their flights,
even if the ticket has been validated on another airline. Check with your
local procedures or with the specific airline regarding the issuance of paper
tickets.
Emphasis in this module will predominantly be on the issuance of electronic tickets.

1
A.I.R. Table
INFO A.I.R. or INFO 4G
INFO 4GEXPL
The Agency Information Record displays the location of the agency, the IATA
number and contains the fields which are used to control the specific functions
allowed within an agency.
Below the specific functions in the A.I.R. Table you will find the Ticket Distribution
information together with the CRTs associated to a Printer Address.
To display the A.I.R. Table
Enter: 4G
 The Interface Level determines the information generated to the agency

accounting record, the TAIR (Travel Agency Interface Record).
 The EZ Options are used when issuing documents.
 APRVD E-TKT must be set to YES to be able to issue e-tickets
The Interface Level and EZ Options are covered later in the module in Ticketing
Command Options.
Each CRT (LNIATA) that is designated for issuing tickets must be associated to a
printer. The A.I.R. Table contains the Printer Distribution screens which control the
association of the CRTs to the printers.
Move Down (MD) or click on more to view the Printer Distributions screens for the
Paper Ticket Printer, Electronic Ticket Coupon Printer and the LLI Printer
(Invoice/Itinerary printer):

2
Partial Response:
Partial Response:
Partial Response:
Detailed information on the Printer Distributions screens may be found in INFO 4G

Note: Changes to the A.I.R. Table require an FA duty code.
Printer Status
HELP REPEAT / INFO REPEAT
ASK Answer ID 15317 Worldspan formats for ticketing, document issue, interface and printers.
ASK Answer ID 15854
You can check the status of the printers using the Printer Address.
The entry to check the status of the printer is JZXMSG followed by mandatory space,
DQ followed by mandatory space, followed by the Printer Address:
Entry: JZXMSG DQ EFE203

3
Status responses are:
Status Explanation
VALID Active and ready to print. The printer may be
stopped to prevent the printing of documents.
The entry to stop is “YSTP” followed by the
printer address.
STOP Printing has been stopped by a “YSTP” entry. A
printer is usually stopped to load more
documents. When a printer is in STOP status,
and a document is sent to the printer, it will fall
on a queue until the printer is re-started.
The entry to start the printer is “YSTR” followed
by the printer address.
FAIL Printer is unable to accept messages for printing.
If a printer is in FAIL status, check printer for
document jams.
Preparation for Ticket Issue

When a ticketing entry is made, the system checks the PNR for the following:
 A valid Ticket Record which may be Autopriced, Agent Assisted Priced or
Manually Priced.
 Note: If there is no Ticket Record created, the system will attempt to price
the PNR at the time of ticket issuance, however this method is not
recommended.
 An airline record locator (most airlines require their record locator to be
present in the PNR before an e-ticket may be issued).
 The GFAX for the applicable SSR items for Secure Flight Data.
 Some carriers may require a Form of Identification (FOID) to be added to the
PNR as an SSR item prior to ticket issuance.
 The system also checks the PNR for the mandatory ticketing options which
may be pre-stored in the PNR.
 The mandatory ticketing options are:
 A plating carrier
 A form of payment (FOP)
In addition to the mandatory ticketing items, the system checks for other pre-stored
ticketing data such as, commission, Tour Code Numbers and manually entered
endorsements.

4
Pre-Store Ticketing Options in PNR
Most of the mandatory ticketing options and non-mandatory ticketing options may
be pre-stored in the PNR using the Create/Modify PNR script.
In Module 4 you covered many of the optional fields using the Create/Modify PNR
script. Here we will do a brief overview of how to pre-store the ticketing options
using cryptic entries.
When the ticket issue entry is made, the system checks to see if any ticketing
options have been pre-stored in the PNR. If the options have been pre-stored the
ticket will issue using those options. If the mandatory options are not pre-stored,
they must be added to the ticketing entry.
The pre-stored options may be overridden in the ticketing entry. For example, you
may have an FOP pre-stored in the PNR as Cash. At the time of ticketing, the
passenger advises they will use their credit card for payment, and you enter the FOP
using the credit card details. This will override the FOP pre-stored in the PNR and
the ticket will issue using the credit card as the FOP.
Validating Carrier
HELP 7TAW
The validating carrier may be pre-stored in the PNR using Create/Modify PNR script
or by using the ticket field entry and adding a dash (-) followed by the letter C,
followed by the two-character carrier code:
Example: 7TAW/00/11FEB-CDL

5
Form of Payment
HELP FOP / INFO FOP

ASK Answer ID 12081
The form of payment may be pre-stored in the PNR using the 5$ entries, or the FOP
field in the Create/Modify PNR script.
Example basic entries:
Add FOP Entry:
Cash 5$CA
Check 5$CK
Agent non-refundable 5$AN
Credit card - Present 5$CCAX374511112222000P1216
Credit card – Not 5$CCAX374511112222000N1216

Present
For information using the eNett VAN as the FOP see the guide available in the HELP
button or MyTravelport

6
Itinerary/Invoice Remarks
HELP 5 / INFO 5
ASK Answer ID 15401
If an Itinerary/Invoice is to be printed at the time of ticket issuance, Itinerary
Remarks (#RM) and Invoice Remarks (#IR) may be included in the PNR.
If the itinerary is e-mailed to the passenger, the Itinerary/Invoice remarks will be
included in the information displayed in Viewpoint.com
The Itin/Inv Remark option in the Create/Modify PNR script allows you to add,
change or delete both Itinerary and Invoice Remarks.
Add Itinerary/Invoice Remarks Entry:
Itinerary remark 5RM-HAVE A PLEASANT TRIP
Itinerary segment associated remark 5S1/4*RM-SPECIAL MEAL

CONFIRMED
Itinerary name associated 5N1.0*RM-SPECIAL MEAL

CONFIRMED
Itinerary/Invoice remark 5IR-HAVE A PLEASANT TRIP
Itinerary/Invoice segment associated 5S4*IR-SPECIAL MEAL CONFIRMED

remark
Itinerary/Invoice name associated 5N1.0*IR-SPECIAL MEAL CONFIRMED

remark
Tour Code
HELP 5-IT / INFO 5-IT

A Tour Code may be pre-stored in the PNR, using the entries 5-IT or in the
Create/Modify PNR script.
As the Tour Code is a single item entry, if an IT code is present in the PNR when the
Tour Code script is launched, the options displayed are for you to Change or Delete
the existing Tour Code data.
Add Tour Code Entry:
Add Tour Code of SP567SQ 5-ITSP567SQ
Add Tour Code of ITSP567SQ 5-ITITSP567SQ

7
Endorsements
HELP 5-ER / INFO 5-ER

ASK Answer ID 12436
Endorsements are added to the ticket automatically using the Endorsement
category in the Fare Rules. If you are ticketing a Manually Priced or Agent Assisted
Priced PNR, the endorsements may be pre-stored in the PNR using the entries 5-ER
and are free-format.
As the Endorsement Remark is a single item entry, if a manually added endorsement

is present in the PNR when the Endorsement script is launched, the options
displayed are for you to Change or Delete the existing endorsement data.
You may have a maximum of 2 lines endorsement with a maximum of 29 characters
per line.
Add Endorsements Entry:
Add single line 5-ERNON-REF/0VALUE AFT DEP
Two-line 5-ERNON-REF/0VALUE AFT DEP*VALID UA

endorsements linked ONLY
together with an ‘*’

8
Commission
HELP 5-CM / INFO 5-CM

ASK Answer ID 15825
Commission may be added as a percentage or a dollar amount, or a combination.
Description: Entry:
To add a percentage commission 5-CM5
To add a dollar amount of commission 5-CM$10.00
To add combination of commission 5-CM5*$5.00
To change commission 5@-CM6
To delete commission 5@-CM
Display of PNR with pre-stored options:
The Commission, Endorsements and Tour Code are pre-stored in the A field with the
FOP as a separate field following the TKG FAX line.
Itinerary/Invoice Remarks are stored in the ITEMS SUPPRESSED. To display enter:
*ML
The mandatory PNR items of Secure Flight Data and Form of Identification are
created using the SSR field.

9
Secure Flight Data
HELP DOCS / INFO DOCS

The Secure Flight data may be added using the manual entries, or the Secure Flight
Info script accessible from the Information item menu.
If an entry is made to issue a ticket and the Secure Flight Data is not contained in the
PNR, an invalid response is received advising which airline requires the data:
Form of Identification
HELP FOID
A FOID is entered using an SSR format – see HELP FOID for examples and the codes
for the types of identification.
Alternatively, you may use the SSR field in the Create/Modify PNR script. Display the
script and select SSR. From the drop-down menu in the SSR codes, select Form of
Identification
The response is a drop-down menu for the different types of documents accepted as
FOIDs.
Note: Not every airline accepts all the FOID options and you may receive an invalid
response when issuing the ticket if the airline does not accept a specific type of
FOID.

10
Electronic Ticketing Functions/Guidelines
Some airlines may have specific ticketing instructions and require additional
information be added to the PNR prior to ticket issuance.
To display the list of airlines that participate in e-ticketing in Travelport Worldspan,
see
INFO ETLIST
The partial response above shows the airlines with a link to the specific
function/guidelines for each airline.
To display the specific information for Aerolineas Argentinas (AR) either click on the
link or enter: INFO ETAR0
The first part of the guidelines show the functions that are applicable on the airline.
If Interline Ticketing is allowed on the airline, it will show YES together with the entry
required to check on the agreements.

11
Scrolling down the display will show a list of countries which are applicable as Points
of Sale
The bottom of the display shows any Notes and the Additional References.
Note 2 advises that a FOID is mandatory for this airline.
Interline Ticketing Agreements

INFO AGREEMENT / HELP AGREEMENT
For interline travel, each airline in the itinerary must have an agreement with the
ticketing airline.
Travelport Worldspan verifies the interline ticketing agreements for participating
airlines on both electronic and paper ticket transactions at the time of ticketing.
Interline Ticketing Agreements may be checked using the script available from the
Information menu item.

12
To display a list of Electronic Interline Agreements for a specific ticketing carrier, in

this example Aerolineas Argentinas, enter the code AR in the Validating Airline field.
Make sure the correct Ticket Type button has been selected, either Electronic (the
default) or Paper. Press CONTINUE.
The responses received for agreements vary depending upon whether it is an
electronic ticket or paper ticket that is being issued.
The response to an Electronic Ticket on AR is:

13
The response if Ticket Type Paper has been selected for AR:
If there are multiple airlines in the itinerary, you may include up to 5 on the initial
screen, and if required, click on More to display additional fields up to a maximum of
15.
In this example below, VS is the Validating Airline and SQ, HR and CX are to be
included in the ticket.
The system checks the Interline Agreements and confirms that the agreements have
been verified.

14
For carriers who do not participate in e-ticket interline agreements the responses
are:
When an attempt is made to issue a ticket where no interline agreements exists

between the participating airlines, an invalid response is received advising that there
is no interline agreement. For example, in the displays above, AR does not have a
ticketing agreement with Air Canada. The response to an e- ticketing entry will be:
Note: If an airline chooses not to store their interline ticket agreements with
Travelport Worldspan, a ticket is issued without verification.
It is the responsibility of the issuing ticket agent to check for interline ticketing
agreements.
ISSUANCE ACTIVITES
When you issue travel documents, Travelport Worldspan:
 Checks the Ticket Record is still valid for ticketing and verifies the pricing
validation carrier in the Ticket Record is the same as the validation carrier in
the ticketing entry
 Verifies the interline agreements for participating carriers
 Verifies the validating carrier using the Positive Authorization Table
 Updates the Ticketing field to show ticketed
 Sends the PNR to the accounting system (Interface) if specified in the
ticketing entry
 End transacts the PNR

15
Fare Validation
When you issue travel documents for your customer, Travelport Worldspan checks
the Ticket Record is still valid for ticketing. If it is not valid, a new Ticket Record
should be created and any fare increase advised to the passenger.
When the Validating Airline used at the time of ticketing does not match the pricing
rules validating carrier shown in the Ticket Record, and the carriers are not listed in
the Sponsoring Carrier Table, (see INFO 4F//SCT* and HELP 4F//SCT*) there is a
mismatch and you will receive the error response:
Positive Authorization Table (PAT)

INFO PAT / HELP PAT
The PAT is a list of the carriers your SID has authority to use as a validating carrier
(sometimes referred to as plating carrier). The PAT table is updated with
information received from the Agent Reporting Plan (ARP) and the Bank Settlement
Plan (BSP).
When a ticket is issued in your agency, the system checks the PAT to make sure you
have the authority to issue a ticket on the specific carrier.
To display the PAT for your SID, enter: 4G/AT
The list contains the airlines you may use as a validating carrier and if applicable, the
type of ticket you may issue is specified. For example, in the PAT Table above, CX
and EK both have –E following the carrier code indicating electronic ticketing is
required. If a carrier requires paper ticketing, then the list will show the airline code
followed by –P

16
Update of Ticketing Field

Travelport Worldspan changes the ticketing field in the PNR to show that your
customer has been ticketed.
In the example above, the ticket was issued on 10FEB at 1309 Greenwich Mean Time
(GMT) using the SID of 1DQ, followed by the agent ID and the ticket number. A
ticket number preceded by an E indicates an electronic ticket was issued.
End Transact PNR

The final activity that Travelport Worldspan performs when issuing travel documents
is to end the PNR. A tab or link to redisplay the PNR is available.
Alternatively, you can add the option of #*R to the ticketing entry to redisplay the
PNR automatically.
Electronic Ticketing
You can issue an e-ticket provided the PNR is eligible for e-ticketing. For the PNR to
be eligible for e-ticketing:
 The carrier must be an e-ticketing participant
 The flight segments must be e-ticket eligible. An E indicator is usually
present in the segment; however, it is not mandatory and an e-ticket may be
issued without the indicator.
 If there are multiple carriers in the PNR, the interline agreements must be
verified.
 The airline Record Locator for each carrier must be present in the PNR.
 The Secure Flight Data must be present when required
 Check the carrier specific e-ticketing functions/guidelines in
INFO ETXX0 (XX = carrier code) for additional information such as:
 The FOP must be accepted for e-ticketing by the carrier.
 The passenger type code (PTC) must be accepted for e-ticketing by the
carrier
 The travel agency must be within the carrier’s e-ticketing Points of Sale.
 Additional requirements may be applicable, check the Notes in the e-ticking
Functions and Guidelines.

17
Ticketing Command Options

HELP EZOPT / INFO EZOPT
ASK Answer ID 11618
Easy Documentation (EZ DOC) is designed to generate documents stored in the
Agency Information Record (A.I.R. Table).
To display the A.I.R. Table enter: 4G
The Interface Level determines the information generated to the agency accounting
record, the TAIR (Travel Agency Interface Record). Your A.I.R. Table may contain one
or more Interface Level options.
Interface Level Options:
Option Explanation
Level Indicates the level of the interface. Note:

Travelport Worldspan does not support Levels 1
through 19.
A The ATB TAIR indicator allows the seat

information and ATB ticket numbers (paper
tickets) to be transmitted in the TAIR message.
V The VOID TAIR sends a message to update the

accounting system when a void entry is made.
The accounting system must have software that
can accept this special TAIR.
R The REFUND TAIR sends an interface message

for the automated Refund and e-Ticket Refund.

18
EZ Options:
EZ is the command to issue a document. The options shown in this field designate
which documents will print automatically using the basic ticketing entry. If only
certain options are required, you may specify the options in the ticketing entry.
Your A.I.R. Table may contain one or more of the following document identifiers:
Option Explanation
T Paper Ticket
E Electronic Ticket
L Invoice with Itinerary
I Interface Message
N Itinerary
P Pocket Itinerary
D Divider Card
M Service Fee MCO
Using one or more of the document types shown above, the ticketing command EZ
will generate the applicable document(s).
Description: Entry:
Basic entry EZ*

Defaults to e-ticket and issues all associated documents including
itineraries and sends interface message based on the EZ Options set
up in your A.I.R. Table
Issue e-ticket with Interface message EZEI
Issue e-ticket and Passenger Itinerary Receipt EZEL
Issue e-ticket and Passenger Itinerary Receipt and Interface message EZELI
Issue Itinerary EZN
Issue Paper Ticket EZT
Issue Paper Ticket, Itinerary and Interface message EZTNI
Issue Paper Ticket and Invoice EZTL
Options may be added to the EZ entries above using an end item (#) followed by the
option code.

19
A list of document production options may be found in INFO EZOPT. For a full list of
all ticketing options including those for the Itinerary/Invoice (L) and Itinerary (N) see
INFO EZAOPT
The following options are the most commonly used:
Description: Option:
Validating Carrier #C
#CDL
Carrier Validation Override #ERTK-
#ERTK-#CSK
Commission #K
#K2
Form of Payment #$
#$CA, #$CK, #$AN,
#$CCVI4444333322221111N1215
Credit Card Approval Code #$*Z
#$*Z53721
Tour Code – check carriers INFO ETXX0 #IT
for guidelines XX = airline code
#ITYY12345SP
Name Select #N
#N1.2
Redisplay PNR automatically after #*R
ticket issue
Ticketing Record when multiple Ticket #TR
Records exist
#TR2
Document Instruction #DI
A Document Instruction is a method to store ticketing and Itinerary/Invoice options
and document types in a PNR.
For information on how to store the Document Instructions see:
HELP DI / INFO DI
Ask Answer ID 13840

20
Ticket Issuance
Example of e-Ticket issue:
An e-ticket is to be issued for the following PNR. The FOP and Commission have
been pre-stored in the PNR and an auto priced Ticket Record has been created. The
Validating Airline has not been pre-stored and will be included in the EZ entry.
Note: Before issuing a ticket, End and Redisplay the PNR.
To issue an e-ticket using BA as the validating carrier:

Enter: EZE#CBA
The response to the ticketing entry is for the PNR to be end transacted and display
the ticket number with the Gross and Net Amounts. A link to retrieve the PNR is
display on the right-hand side of the screen.
Alternatively, the ticketing entry could have included the option to redisplay the PNR
automatically:
Entry: EZE#CBA#*R
When the PNR is retrieved, the TKG FAX line has been changed to Ticketed, and
shows the date, time, SID and agent ID who issued the ticket. The ‘E’ preceding the
ticket number indicates that it is an e-ticket.

21
The e-ticket number has been generated to BA automatically by Travelport

Worldspan using the SSR code TKNE (Ticket Number Electronic). There are two SSR
items, one for C1 (coupon 1) and one for C2 (coupon 2).
In the ITEMS SUPPRESSED you have additional options to display:
 DH indicates that a Document History is available
 ETA indicates an Electronic Ticket Acknowledgment/Authorization
has been added to the PNR.
Displaying Document History

HELP DOCHIST / INFO DOCHIST
Each ticket issued has a Document History containing the details of the ticket
number and the entries used to issue the ticket.
To display the Document History, enter: *DH

22
The Document History contains the information on the Document Commands and
the Document:
Item: Description:
EZ The entry the system sent to the host to issue the ticket
AGENT The actual ticketing entry made to issue the ticket
4P How the ticket was priced. In this example the entry made
was 4P*
The date and time the fare was stored
The Pricing Carrier as used in the Ticket Record
FOP The Form of Payment used to issue the ticket
ENDOR Endorsements. If the Ticket Record is autopriced, the

endorsements are taken from the Fare Rules. If manually
priced the endorsements are added in the 5-ER field or
included in the ticketing entry.
FARE The Base Fare and the taxes
FCALC The Fare Calculation
TTN Transmit Ticket Number. How the ticket number was

transmitted to the airline.
In this example the system automatically transmitted the
ticket numbers to BA using SSRs with the code TKNE (Ticket
Number Electronic)
SCN Stock Control

A – Audit coupon
T – Travel Agent coupon
P – Passenger coupon
In e-ticketing the Audit and Passenger coupons are
suppressed from printing, and the Travel Agent coupon is
printed to plain paper.

23
Displaying Electronic Ticket Acknowledgement/Authorization (ETA)
HELP ETA / INFO ETA

The ETA is a message returned from the airline, acknowledging that they have
received and stored the e-ticket transaction in their database. This could be an
issued, voided, exchanged or refunded transaction.
To display the Electronic Ticket Acknowledgement field
Enter: *ETA
Item: Description:
1 ETA item number
BA Validating carrier
I Type of Acknowledgement
I – Original Issue
V – Void
VI – IAR Void (ARCs Interactive Agent Reporting)
E – Exchanged ticket
XI – Exchange Reverse
RF – Refunded
RR- Refund Reverse
RV – Revalidation

24
Displaying Electronic Ticket Record (ETR)
HELP ETR / INFO ETR

To display the Electronic Ticket Record, enter ETR followed by the required item
number:
Entry: ETR1
The response is the Coupon Status Display
Coupon Status Display (CSD)
HELP ETR / INFO ETR

The Coupon Status Display contains the passenger’s name and the current status of
each flight coupon in the Electronic Ticket. See below for Coupon Status Options.
The options shown at the bottom of the CSD will display only if the function is
supported by the validating carrier. In the example above, BA support the display of
ETR History so the option is displayed in the CSD.
To view the ticket data, click on the link for:

25
Ticket Data Display (TTD)
The Ticket Data Display (TTD) contains:
The ORIG/DEST of the ticket, in this example LHR/LHR with the number of tickets
issued and the total number of segments.
The status of the coupons is shown as a single character. The letter O indicates that
the coupons are OPEN FOR USE. See below for Coupon Status Options.
The next section of the Ticket Data Display is regarding the fare:
Here you find the information on the endorsements, fare calculation, form of
payment and commission.
The FARE CALC INDICATOR determines whether the ticket is eligible for review by
Travelport if an Agency Debit Memo is received from the airline.
In the screen shot above the Fare Calculation Pricing Indicator is 9, which means the
fare was autopriced using the Travelport Worldspan system.
See ASK Answer ID 48646 for information on the Fare Calculation Pricing Indicators
and ASK Answer ID 48645 for Travelport’s Fare Guarantee Policy.

26
The FOP of CA (cash) is shown for all forms of payments used to issue a ticket,
except for credit cards. If a credit card was used the FOP will show the CC details
with the masked credit card number, expiry date and the credit card approval code.
The next section of the TTD is the Passenger Information:
This contains the passenger information which shows the passenger name and other
details from the PNR, such as Frequent Flyer Number, Customer Name Data,
Customer Account Number and the passenger phone number if this was entered in
the PNR using a 9* entry.
The FA indicates File Address and shows the Travelport Worldspan Record Locator
(1P) and the airline’s record locator in this example from Amadeus (1A).
The last section is the Miscellaneous and Agency Data:
The Miscellaneous section is blank unless Exchange Ticketing has occurred in which
case the exchange information will display here.
In the Ticketing Agent information you see the agent ID of the person who issued
the ticket and the SID that was used to issue the ticket.
The date of ticket issue and the IATA Number
The Name and Place of ticket issue and the Free Baggage allowance.
The TKT MODE INDICATION:/ is not used and is always blank.
The options for other functions are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

27
Coupon Status Options
In the Coupon Status Display (CSD) the status is shown in full text, in the Ticket Data
Display (TDD) the applicable status code is shown:
CSD TDD EXPLANATION:
OPEN FOR USE O The coupon is available for passenger

airport check-in, refund, exchange, reissue,
and revalidation or void.
USED F The passenger has used the coupon (flown)
REFUND R The coupon has been refunded by the

carrier or travel agent
VOID V The entire E-Ticket has been voided
EXCHANGED E Coupon has been exchanged by the carrier

or travel agent
UNAVAILABLE A/L/C/ Operating carrier has secured coupon prior

I to departure
UNAVAILABLE U Operating carrier has determined that the

coupon is no longer available for use as
ticketed. The coupon may be exchanged.

28
Daily Document Log

HELP DD / INFO DD
The Daily Document Log (DDL) provides a means to track daily transactions to verify
receipt of interface accounting data from the home office and/or branch offices.
Travelport Worldspan maintains the data for a period of up to 11 days.
The DDL consists of the Primary and the Secondary display
Primary Document Log
INFO DDLPRI / HELP DD

The Primary Document Log may be displayed for the current date, a previous date
(up to 11 days) and/or the passenger name:
Required Display: Entry:
Current DDL DD
Previous Ticketing Date DD*10FEB
Current DDL for specific DD*-ROBSON

passenger name
Previous Ticketing Date for DD*-ROBSON*10FEB

specific passenger name
To access the current DDL, enter: DD

29
Item: Description:
Payment The Form of Payment column may have:
A – indicating cash transaction (all transactions except for
credit card)
C – indicating credit card transactions
Status The letter ‘E’ indicates an e-Ticket was issued and may be
preceded by the status code:
For example, in the DDL above, Item 1 shows as ERE which is an
Automated Electronic Ticket Refund (ER) for an Electronic
Ticket (E).
Some of the status codes you may see are:
R – Automated Paper Ticket Refund

ER – Automated Electronic Ticket Refund
EX – Electronic Ticket Exchange
V – Agent Voided Ticket (Electronic Ticket or Paper Ticket)
V* - System Void (Electronic Ticket only)
XI – Exchange Reverse (Electronic Ticket only)
RR – Refund Reverse
For a full list of Status Codes see:

INFO DDLPRI or ASK Answer ID 22878
Secondary Document Log
INFO DDLPRI / HELP DD

The Secondary Document Log contains detailed information for a specific ticket.
Clicking on the link in the Item column displays the Secondary Document Log
To display the ticket that was electronically refunded, click on Item 1.

30
Item: Description:
FA The Record Locator for the PNR
TLI – YNN This indicates what documents or messages were generated

from the ticketing entry using a Y for Yes and N for No
T – Ticket (Electronic Ticket or Paper Ticket)
L – Itinerary/Invoice
I – Interface
In the example above, a Ticket was generated (Y), an
Itinerary/Invoice was not generated (N), and an Interface
message was not generated (N)
AGT- Ticketing agent ID
SID- The SID used to issue the ticket
NAME Passenger name on ticket
TTL TAX The Total including the tax
COMM AMT The commission amount if the commission field was either pre-
stored in the PNR or included in the ticketing entry
FOP Form of Payment – in this example it was AN (Agent Non-Ref).

If the FOP was a credit card, the masked credit card number is
shown here, together with the credit card approval code.
Additional Displays and Resources
For additional information on the Primary and Secondary Document Log see:
INFO DDLPRI or INFO DDLSEC or ASK Answer ID 15355
For specific information on ARC:
INFO ARC
For information on other reports that may be displayed see:
INFO DD

31
Penalties and cancellations quick access

Penalty and rules information can now be viewed from a booked PNR, select the
hyperlink in the document information.
The e-ticket number is now a clickable link in

The PNR Viewer: *DH, *ETA, *AD
The Smart screen: *DH, *ETA, *AD and ETR VIEW TICKET DATA screen Display Ticket
script.
Select the e-ticket number to display the e-ticket information. On this screen, the
fare basis codes and the header FBC are hyperlinks. When there are multiple fare
basis codes in an e-ticket, select the FBC header to display rules information for all
the fare basis codes on the next screen.
Screen examples:

32

33
Voiding Tickets
INFO ET VOID
INFO DDV
Travelport Worldspan enables you to void a ticket from the ETR (Electronic Ticket
Record), or from the Daily Document Log (DDL).
The period during which you can void a ticket differs in each county. The voiding
period is specified by BSP and in some countries it is only possible to void a ticket on
the day of issuance.
Void Ticket using ETR
Display the PNR and from the Documentation Menu Tab, select Display Ticket.

34
The Document History displays in the Smart Panel. Select the link for the ticket
number to display the Electronic Ticket Record (ETR).
Select ETR VOID ELECTRONIC TICKET

Note: Caution must be used when using the Smart Screen to void a ticket as clicking
on the ETR VOID ELECTRONIC TICKET option takes immediate action.
The response advises that approval for the void has been obtained, the void has
been processed and LH has returned a Settlement Authorization Code (SAC).
Note: Not all airlines return a SAC
If required you may check the void on the Daily Document Log, by selecting the
button at the top of the screen. If not required as the void has been process, you
may exit the script.
When the Daily Document Log button is selected, a list appears for you to choose a
date for the log.

35
Click on TODAY to view the Daily Document Log showing the voided LH ticket.
Two tickets have been issued today. In the Status column, both tickets are showing
V for Void.
Note: If you accidently void the wrong electronic ticket number, it is not possible to
Void Reverse.
Void Ticket using Daily Documentation Log
You may void a ticket using the Daily Documentation Log. First display the log for
the current date, enter: DD
To void a ticket from the DDL, type DDV followed by the item number.
To void the ticket for item 3, enter: DDV3

36
The response shows the approval for the void has been obtained, and the void has
been processed. The airline has returned a Settlement Authorization Code (SAC).
The DDL shows the ticket has been voided.
Void Reverse – Paper Tickets
For paper tickets:

 BSP allow Void Reverse on paper tickets which have been voided in
error. You may Void Reverse only on the same day the void
transaction was made.
 See INFO DDVR and HELP DDVR for details.
 For ARC ticketing, a paper ticket may be manually added to the DDL
using DDA entries.
 See INFO DDA, HELP DDA or ASK Answer ID 13886 for details.

37
Exchanging a Ticket
When passengers change their travel plans and have a flexible fare which allows
changes, it may be possible to use the old ticket as part or full payment towards the
cost of a new ticket.
The type of exchange that can result, depending on the cost of the original ticket
compared to the new ticket is an:
 Even Exchange
 Additional Collection (Uneven Exchange)
Travelport Worldspan does not validate fare rules when an exchange ticket is
processed. It is your responsibility to check the fares rules prior to processing an
exchange ticket.
In this module you will cover the basic steps for exchanging a ticket and an example
of the Ticket Exchange Plus script.
Exchange Process
The process to perform an exchange starts with creating a new Ticket Record using
Rate Desk Pricing (RDP). The exchange ticket is then issued against the new Ticket
Record.
The Rate Desk Pricing steps to price the PNR, as follows:
 Basic entry 4/R
 Stopover/Connections 4/X-
 Segment Date for the new ticket 4/S-
 Fare Calculation for the new fare 4/L-
 Reissue Fare information 4/RF
 Note: This is required for BSP markets. In ARC exchange ticketing
this step is not required
 Origin and Destination 4/OD
 Note: This is required for BSP markets. In ARC exchange ticketing
this step is not required
 Store the Ticket Record 4/
 End and Retrieve the PNR
 Issue the ticket
When moving through the RDP steps, a prompt appears regarding entering a Sales
Indicator – this is not required except when creating an RDP in Japan. Other
locations may ignore this prompt.

38
Even Exchange Example – Same Currency BSP Procedures

ASK Answer ID 15379
ASK Answer ID 16652
In this example travel has not commenced and the ticket has not been used. The
passenger wishes to delay the return reservation until 15DEC.
The Fare Rules Penalties category must be checked to determine if changes are
allowed, and if there is a penalty for changing the ticket.
In this example, the ticket may be changed without a penalty.
Make the necessary changes to the PNR

39
1. Price the new itinerary to check the new fare. In this instance the fare
and taxes are the same.
2. Begin the RDP to create a new Ticket Record: 4/R
3. Stopover/Connections 4/X-0
4. Segment Data: 4/S-1/2-Y77RT#NV/03DEC#*1PC
5. Fare Calculation:
4/L-LON AC YTO1848.95AC LON1848.95NUC3697.00 END ROE .610616
6. Reissued Fare (This entry is used with BSP exchanges only).
Note: any taxes paid on the original ticket are included in the Reissued
Fare information by an:
#X followed by the tax code, the tax amount and PD to indicate Paid:
4/RFGBP2258.00#EVGBP#XGB69.00PD#XUB43.75PD#XYQ213.00PD#XCA1
4.40PD#XSQ13.90PD#XRC1.80PD#ANOADC
Item: Description:
4/RF Reissued Fare
GBP2258.00 New Base Fare
#EVGBP Original ticketing currency
#XGB69.00PD Original taxes. PD indicates paid taxes on original

ticket
#ANOADC A indicates Additional Collection

NOADC indicates No Additional Collection
7. 4/ODLONLON - This is used for BSP exchanges only

8. Store new Ticket Record: 4/
9. End and Retrieve PNR to save the Ticket Record: ER
10. Issue the new ticket
EZE#$AN*EET0149010070081X*A/OILON17FEB149942302/O$AN
#CAC#K0

40
The exchange ticket entry contains the following information:
Item: Description:
EZE Issue Electronic Ticket
#$AN New Form of Payment (same as original for Even

Exchanges)
*EE Type of Exchange:

EE - Even Exchange
IE - Uneven Exchange (Additional Collection)
T Type of Exchange Document

T - Ticket (14 digits including check digit)
M - MCO (14 digits including check digit)
O - Other e.g. voucher (2 – 14 alphanumeric
characters)
0149010070081X Ticket number including check digit. If check digit

is not known an ‘X’ may be used instead
*A Coupon numbers uplifted for exchange

transaction
A - All coupons
*12 - Uplifting coupons 1 and 2
*123 - Uplifting coupons 1, 2 and 3
/OILON17FEB149942302 Original Issue details:

OI - Original issue
LON - Place
17FEB14 - Date including year
9942302 - 7 digit IATA number
/O$AN Original Form of Payment
#CAC Validating carrier
#K0 Commission amount is not mandatory on even

exchanges
Note: If endorsements are required on the new ticket, they must be pre-
stored in the PNR or added as an option in the ticketing entry:
Example option: #ER VALID ON AC ONLY
For additional examples of an exchange ticket entry see:

ASK Answer ID 38714

41
When the PNR is retrieved the new ticket number is shown in the Ticketing Field.
Display the Electronic Ticket Acknowledgement/Authorization (ETA)

Entry: *ETA
The ETA shows the original ticket number with:

Original Issue - I
Exchange Ticket Transaction: - E
New Ticket Original Issue - I
To display the Electronic Ticket Record for item 2:
Entry: ETR2
The status shows the ticket was EXCHANGED.

Display the Electronic Ticket Record for item 3 (new ticket)

42
Entry: ETR3
The status shows the ticket is OPEN FOR USE.

The Daily Documentation Log: Entry: DD
The DD shows:
Item 4 is the original electronic ticket (E)
Item 5 is the new ticket issued in exchanged and an electronic ticket was
issued (EXE).
The Document History: Entry: *DH
The Document History shows two document items:

Item 1 is the new ticket
Item 2 is the original ticket.

43
To display Item 1 either click on the link for the number you require, or:
Enter: *DH1
The Document History shows the Document Commands and the method
of pricing which was Rate Desk Pricing (4/R).
Even Exchange – Same Currency ARC procedures
ASK Answer ID 15451

The ARC procedure for exchange ticketing is similar except when pricing the new
fare, the Reissue Fare (4/RF) and the Origin/Destination (4/OD) entries are not
required.
Make the changes to the PNR and then follow the steps.
1. Price the new itinerary to check the new fare. In this instance the
fare and taxes are exactly the same.
4. Segment Data: 4/S-1/2-BA0HYJ#NV/03DEC#*1PC
5. Fare Calculation: 4/L-NYC UA WAS Q27.91 379.00 UA WAS Q13.95
379.00 USD799.86END
6. Note: As the ticket is domestic the fare may be shown in local
currency – USD.

44
EZE#$CK*EET0264865432115X*A/OINYC17FEB149942302/O$CK#
CUA#KEX
Item: Description:
#$CK New Form of Payment (same as original for Even

Exchanges)
*EE Type of Exchange:

EE - Even Exchange

characters)
0264865432115X Ticket number including check digit. If check digit is

not known an ‘X’ may be used instead
*A Coupon numbers uplifted for exchange transaction

A - All coupons
OINYC17FEB149942302 Original Issue details:

OI - Original issue
NYC - Place
/O$CK Original Form of Payment
#CUA Validating carrier
KEX Prints EXCH on coupons and updates DDL with zero

commission.
If there is a commission for the exchange the format
is #KEX*3 if a percentage or #KEX*$5.00 if dollar
amount
Note: If endorsements are required on the new ticket, they must be pre-
stored in the PNR or added as an option in the ticketing entry:
Example option: #ER VALID ON UA ONLY

45
Uneven Exchange Example – Same Currency
The process for an Uneven Exchange is similar to the even and the same steps are
used.
For example, a passenger has purchased a round trip economy class ticket and
wishes to upgrade the ticket to Business class.
The Fare Rules Penalties category must be checked to determine if changes are
allowed, and if there is a penalty for changing the ticket.
In this example, the ticket may be changed without a penalty.
Make the changes to the PNR

46
1. Price the new itinerary to check the new fare and compare to the
original ticket to calculate the Additional Collection:
Original Fare New Fare
Base Fare: GBP 1320.00 Base Fare: GBP 4835.00
Taxes paid on original ticket: Taxes applicable to new ticket:

GB 69.00 GB 138.00
UB 40.19 UB 40.19
YQ 213.00 YQ 319.00
AY 1.50 AY 1.50
US 21.40 US 21.40
XA 3.00 XA 3.00
XY 4.30 XY 4.30
YC 3.40 YC 3.40
XF 2.70 IAD 4.5 XF 2.70 IAD 4.5
Total GBP 1678.49 Total GBP 5368.49
The taxes are the same except for the GB tax. On the original ticket the
tax was GBP 69.00 and on the new ticket GBP 138.00. The additional
collection is the difference in fare plus the difference in taxes:
Difference in fare: GBP 3515.00
Difference in GB tax: GBP 69.00
Total Additional Collection is:GBP 3584.00

4. Segment Data: 4/S-1/2-CFFGBW#NV/18OCT#*2PC
5. Fare Calculation:
4/L-LON LH WAS3959.11 LH LON3959.11NUC7918.22END ROE
.610616
6. Reissued Fare (This entry is used with BSP exchanges only). Note: any
taxes paid on the original ticket are included in the Reissued Fare
information as:
#X followed by the tax code, the tax amount and PD to indicate Paid:
4/RFGBP4835.00#EVGBP#XGB69.00PD#XGB69.00#XUB40.19PD#XYQ
319.00PD#XAY1.50PD#XUS21.40PD#XXA3.00PD#XXY4.30PD#XYC3.4
0PD#XXF2.70IAD4.5PD#AGBP3584.00A

47
Item: Description:
4/RF Reissued Fare
GBP4835.00 New Base Fare
#EVGBP Original ticketing currency
#XGB69.00PD Original taxes. PD indicates paid taxes on original ticket.

#XGB69.00 Here we have 2 GB taxes. The first one for the paid tax on
the original ticket, followed by the unpaid GB tax required
for the Additional Collection of #XGB69.00
#AGBP33584.00A A indicates Additional Collection followed by the currency

code the Additional Collection amount and the letter A
7. 4/ODLONLON - This is used for BSP exchanges only

8. Store new Ticket Record: 4/
EZE#$AN*IET2209010070084X*A/OILON17FEB149942302/O$AN
#CLH#K0#ERFL/CNX/CHG RESTRICTED/CHECK FARE NOTE
Item: Description:
$AN New Form of Payment
*IE Type of Exchange:

EE - Even Exchange

characters)
2209010070084X Ticket number including check digit. If check digit

is not known an ‘X’ may be used instead
*A Coupon numbers uplifted for exchange

transaction

48
A - All coupons
/OILON17FEB149942302 Original Issue details:

OI - Original issue
NYC - Place
/O$AN Original Form of Payment
#CLH Validating carrier
#K0 Commission percentage is not a mandatory item,

however, if commission is payable you must
include it to obtain commission on the Additional
Collection.
#ERFL/CNX/CHG Endorsements added to ticket entry.

RESTRICTED/CHECK
FARE NOTE
Ticket Exchange Plus Script – Manual Process
The Ticket Exchange Plus script may be used for exchange transactions both for Even
Exchange and Uneven Exchanges (Additional Collection).
The script has been designed to offer the automated exchange process of Rapid
Reprice and a manual process. When the script is accessed it checks the PNR for the
carrier and if they participate in Rapid Reprice you may choose to process the
exchange either through Rapid Reprice which is a chargeable product, or select the
manual process. In this module the Manual Exchange will be processed.
The following example is for an Even Exchange using the Ticket Exchange Plus script.
1. Display the PNR
2. Check the Fare Rules allow changes and if there is a penalty amount
to pay. In this example, the ticket has not been used, and the Fare
Rules allow changes with no penalty.
3. Make the required changes to the PNR
4. As the ticket has not been used, we can reprice and create a new
Ticket Record for the upgraded flights.
5. The Ticket Exchange Plus may be accessed from the Fares & Pricing
item menu or from the Top 10 Scripts in the Smart Panel.

49
The message appears advising that the PNR qualifies for the Travelport
Rapid Reprice. In this example we will click on NO to continue to the
Manual Exchange.
The Ticket Exchange Plus script for Manual Process displays.
In the Pricing Option for New Fare the default is for E Ticket. From the
drop-down menu select 4P
When 4P has been selected, another area appears at the bottom of the
screen for you to select the Ticketing Carrier.

50
Click on Continue
The Flight Information is at the top of the screen and includes the Fare
Basis Code and Baggage Allowance.
The next section is Taxes.

There an alert message advising it is the responsibility of the user to
check that the taxes and tax codes are correct.
If required, the taxes can be changed by inputting the correct tax amount
in the tax boxes.
The next area of the script is the US Passenger Facility Charge (XF).

51
Here it shows the IAD4.50 as a paid tax, but the total is showing in the
USD amount. This needs to be changed to the currency of where the
ticket is being issued. You may be able to use the link to convert the XF
charges to local currency or just correct the Total box.
The Total Paid now shows the correct amount of 2.70

The final area is the New Fare Ladder
 The system has completed the New Fare Calculation with the

52
information from the 4P entry. Check that it is correct before

moving onto other boxes in the screen.
 The New Currency and Base Fare has been pre-populated with the
amount of the new fare, and has added the Original Currency and
Base Fare from the information in the Document History for the
original ticket.
 The Origin Destination has been pre-populated for you.
 The Base Due shows as 0.00 as this is an even exchange.
 If a penalty is applicable for changing the ticket, add the amount in
the Penalty Amount Due box. Complete the Penalty Collection
Method depending upon how the airline requires the penalty to be
collected.
 The Total Amount Due will be calculated by the system and will pre-
populated the amount box.
 The system highlights in orange the type of exchange, whether an
even or an additional.
The last part of the screen is where you can specify a New Commission
Amount and add a Tour Code.
For the New Endorsement field, the default is From Ticket if an
endorsement is not stored in the PNR. The box is auto-populated from
the information in the ETR.
If the PNR has an endorsement stored in the PNR, the default is From PNR
and will contain the auto-populated data
For ARC agents, the New Endorsement field is exactly the same, but is
found on the Exchange Information screen.
The endorsement may be overridden when necessary, for example in the
case of an involuntary change and the airline has advised that an
endorsement needs to be included on the exchange ticket.
Press CONTINUE to proceed with the process.

53
The screen continues to the Exchange Ticket Number, Original Issue

Information and the Ticketing Instructions.
A message briefly displays at the top of this screen to advise the Price has
been stored successfully. It is then removed from the display.
At the top of the screen the original Ticket Number, Check Digit number,
the Coupon(s) that are being uplifted are automatically pre-populated.
The default for the Document Type is Ticket.
If this is not the first exchange, the Original Issue Information will be
automatically pre-populated with the document number from the
Document History of the original ticket.
For BSP transactions, the Add Collect FOP and the Validating Carrier must
be included. For ARC transactions these options are not mandatory.

54
As this is a BSP transaction, the Add Collect FOP has been added, and the
Validating Carrier was automatically added by the system.
The final part of the screen is the Ticketing instruction.
The Ticketing Instructions offer two options:

 Issue the Ticket Now
 Store the Ticketing Options in Document Instructions (DI)
By selecting to store the Ticketing Options, you are able to complete the
exchange transaction and issue the ticket later.
You also have the option to add information to the Ticketing entry such as
Service Fees.
Selecting the Exchange Remarks stores the information on the exchange
for the original fare and new fare in the Unique Remarks (5.Z).

55
In this example, we have selected to store the Ticketing Options in a

Document Instruction and have the Ticket Exchange Remarks added to
the 5.Z
Click on Continue
The Ticket Entry area displays, and you may change or add additional
information in the entry as required. For example, adding additional
options for the Itinerary/Invoice.
The ticket entry includes the entry for the Document Instruction for name
1.1 (4-DI#N1.1)
The remainder of the entry is the very similar to the manual entry we
covered earlier in the module.
In the script entry, the system has added the check digit of 2 to the
ticket number, and in our example we used an ‘X’. For the
commission as we did not complete the area in the script, the
commission option has not been included in the system’s ticketing
entry.
If no changes are to be made, click on CONTINUE.

56
A message appears at the top of the screen advising that the DI line was
added successfully.
The PNR updates to show that DI ITEMS EXIST. This is found just above
the GFAX display.
To display the Document Instructions, enter: *DI
There is one Document Instruction which is DI1.
To issue the ticket:

Enter: EZE#DI1
The response is the screen advising the Gross and Net Amount, with a link
to redisplay the PNR.
Select the link to display the PNR.

57
The PNR now shows that it has been MANUALLY PRICED.
To display the Ticket Record, enter: 4*
The header line shows that the Ticket Record was created using Rate
Desk Pricing (4/R). The TTL shows that the exchange was a no additional
collection (NOADC).
If you display the Document Instructions after the ticket has been issued,
the ticketing details are added to the DI.

58
The Ticket Exchange Remarks have been added to the PNR in the Unique
Remarks. To view the remarks:
Enter: *U
Here you have the information on the New Fare and the Old Fare
For additional examples of manual entries and the Ticket Exchange Plus
script see ASK Travelport.
For ARC information see: INFO EXCHG
For BSP information see: INFO BSPEXCH
Refunding an e-Ticket
Automated refunds are processed using a template in the Terminal Emulator. A
series of template screens display as you move through the process.

59
Example of Refund with Penalty

An e-ticket for the following PNR has been issued and the passenger is no longer
travelling and wishes the ticket to be refunded.
First establish the cancellation or service fees to be charged. In this example the
Fare Rules advises that refunds are allowed at any time without a penalty.
In the Terminal Emulator screen, display the ETA using the entry: *ETA
Display the ETR using the entry: ETR1

60
British Airways allow the option to process an Electronic Refund.
Tab to the ELECTRONIC REFUND AUTHORIZATION REQUEST brackets and type either
‘X’ or ‘R’ and enter.
The response is the Electronic Refund template

This screen is used to enter any penalties, fare used (partial refunds), and
commission recalled. For full refunds, just the ADDL DATA and ACTION
boxes need to be completed.
FIELD Explanation
FULL FARE DATAT Shows the full fare of issued ticket and cannot be
changed.
PARTIAL FARE Use this for partial refunds only.

DATA Show unused amount (how much is to be refunded).
PENALTY FOR Show cancellation/penalty fee if applicable.

REFUND
FARE USED Use this for partial refunds only.

Show the amount used.

61
COMMISSION Commission on Penalty

EARNED
COMMISSION The commission percentage/amount to be returned

RECALLED
RN Number of Refund Notice copies. Default is 2, but 1-9

are acceptable.
ADDL DATA Input an ‘X’ here to see Additional Data template. (If a
‘Y’ is shown here overtype it with an X to ensure the
ADDL DATA screen appears)
ACTION F for Full Refund

P for Partial Refund
H to access Help
E to Exit the template
As this is a Full Refund with no penalty to pay, just tab to ACTION and
type F for full refund.
Enter after the (F).

The response is the ADDITIONAL DATA screen showing the amount to be
refunded and if the journey is domestic and net.

62
FIELD Explanation
ORIG FOP Original Form of Payment – pre-populated
AMOUNT Pre-populated with the ISO currency code and the

amount to be refunded from the previous template.
DOMESTIC Y for wholly domestic journey within the BSP location.

N for non-domestic journeys within the BSP location.
Example: Agency Location: PAR
Journey: PAR-NCE is domestic journey
PAR-NYC is not domestic
Example: Agency Location MAD
Journey BCN-MAD is domestic
Journey PAR-NCE is NOT domestic.
NET Y for a Net transaction, otherwise N
ORIG FOP2 Second Form of Payment if ticket is issued with 2 FOPs.
AMOUNT Amount applicable to Form of Payment 2
TOUR CODE Tour Code as per ticket

(mandatory if Y in Net field).
NET FARE AMT The net fare amount excluding taxes if a Net Remit
transaction.
SELLING FARE Selling fare amount if used. (Not used in all BSP
AMT markets).
A/L AUTHORITY Enter airline authority if required.

(If ticket is non-refundable, but authorization has been
given to refund the ticket). Minimum 1, maximum 25
characters.
REFUND PENALTY Cancellation charge. Pre-populates from previous

template
COMM EARNED Commission earned on penalty if applicable. (Not used

in all BSP markets).l
CUSTOMER FILE Optional reference number for credit card. Used if data
REF entered in original sales transaction. Maximum 27
characters.

63
ACTION C to Confirm and process refund

I to Ignore all data manually entered in template
E to Exit refund template
H to access Help
In the template, type ‘C’ to CONFIRM and enter.

The screen response is:
Two Refund Notices will print unless you changed the number in the
initial screen.
The ETA shows the original ticket number is now refunded (RF). The
number at the end of the line is the Settlement Authorization Code (SAC)
transmitted by the airline.

64
The ETR using either ETR1 or ETR2 shows the Status as REFUND
For additional information on Refunds:

For ARC market see: INFO REFUND
For BSP markets see: INFO REFBSP
The Daily Document Log shows that an electronically processed refund
(ER) has been completed on e-ticket number 0819010070074.
The Document History (*DH) may be displayed to show the refund

details:

65
Refund Fare (RFARE) is the original amount of GBP1661.00 plus taxes of

377.15.
Refund Ticket (RTKT) shows the ticket number and the coupons that were
refunded (coupon 1 and 2)
Refund Reverse
When an e-ticket has been refunded in error Travelport Worldspan provides the
capability to cancel/reverse an Electronic Refund on the same day as the refund
transaction is processed, providing the validating carrier and local BSP support the
function.
To check if an airline supports this function see INFO ETxx0
Enter: INFO ETTG0
On BA both e-Reverse is allowed on Exchanges and Refunds

To reverse the refund, display the ETR
The options to cancel or reverse both Exchange transactions and Refund

transactions are shown in the ETR.
To reverse the refund, tab to CANCEL/REVERSE REFUND TRANSACTION
and type an ‘X’
Enter after the (X)

66
The response shows that approval has been obtained for Refund
Reversal.
The status is now shown as RR followed by the E-ticket number.
The ETA shows the date and time the transactions were processed with
the code advising what action was taken
The original issue (I)

The Refund was processed on 17FEB (RF)
The Reverse Refund was processed on 17FEB (RR)
The ETR shows the Status of the coupons as OPEN FOR USE
The Daily Documentation Log shows the Status as RRE (Reverse Refund of
E-ticket)

67
68
There are two ways to sell rental cars in Travelport Worldspan:

 Direct sell when the customer is a frequent renter and knows the car type
and company.
 Reference sell from low-to-high availability
Module Objectives
 Use Travelport Worldspan to determine car company codes and names
 Identify different car type codes
 Sell rental cars in Worldspan using the steps identified in this module
 Search for car availability using qualifiers
 Update a car availability display
 Cancel a sold car segment
 Modify a sold car segment
 Display car company descriptions and policies
 Display a car rental location
Car Company Participation Level

The car rental companies that participate in Travelport Worldspan use the Car Select
Database.
Car companies participate in three levels of participation:
 Car Source
 AccessPlus
 Non AccessPlus
Car Source
Car Source is the highest level of connectivity making it quick and easy for you to
find the best value for your customers. A Car Source participant gives direct access
into the rental car company’s inventory, rates, and rules.
The # symbol indicates a Car Source availability associate.
When you rent a car from a Car Source participant, you receive an instant
confirmation number. The confirmation number and Car Source indicator of #XX#
(XX = Car vendor code) are displayed immediately in the PNR when the sell is made.

1
AccessPlus
AccessPlus is the second level of participation available.

The $ symbol indicates an AccessPlus associate.
All AccessPlus associates offer instant confirmation numbers prior to end
transaction. The confirmation number and AccessPlus indicator of $XX$ (XX = car
vendor code) are immediately displayed in the PNR when the sell is made. If the
AccessPlus link is not available, the confirmation is processed after end transaction.
However, not all associates participate in all AccessPlus features.
Note: There are very currently very few AccessPlus participants.
Non AccessPlus
Any car companies that are not AccessPlus or Car Source are considered non-
AccessPlus. Non-AccessPlus participants do not have a symbol in front of the
company name. Confirmation numbers are returned from the car company after
end transaction.
Note: There are very currently very few AccessPlus participants.
For a list of car companies participating in Car Select see HELP CRLIST

2
Determining Car Company Codes and Names

ASK Answer ID 14698
To determine car rental company codes and names, you can use encoding and
decoding.
The function identifier to encode and decode car rental companies
is: CRC
Finding a Car Code
HELP CRC
Use the encode format when you have the name of the car rental company and
need to find its corresponding code.
To encode a car rental company, enter CRC followed by the car vendor name.
Example entry: CRCHERTZ
Finding a Car Name
HELP CRC
Use the same format to decode when you have the two-letter code of the car rental
company and you need to determine its name.
To decode a car rental company code, enter CRC followed by the car rental company
code.
Example entry: CRCZI
Car Types
In availability, Travelport Worldspan displays rental car types with four-letter codes
to represent the features of the car:
 Car size
 Car category
 Transmission/Drive type
 Fuel/Air conditioning

3
The following table lists the car codes for each of the four features and their
descriptions.
Size: Category: Transmission /Drive: Air conditioning

/Fuel:
C - Compact B 2-3 door A - Automatic A - Hydrogen with A/C
D - Compact elite C 2 door or 4 door unspecified drive B - Hydrogen without
E - Economy D 4-5 door B - Automatic four wheel A/C
drive C - Electric without
F - full size E - Coupe
C - Manual all-wheel A/C
G - Full size elite F - SUV (sport utility
drive D - Diesel with A/C
H - Economy elite vehicle)
D - Automatic all-wheel E - Electric with A.C
I - Intermediate G - Crossover
drive
H - Motor home H - Hybrid with A/C
J - Intermediate M - Manual unspecified
elite J - All terrain open air I - Hybrid without A/C
drive
L - Luxure K - Van or truck L - LPG compressed
N - Manual four wheel
(commercial) gas with A/C
M - Mini drive
L - Limousine N - Unspecified fuel
N - Mini Elite
without A/C
O - Oversize M - Monospace
Q - Diesel without A/C
P - Premium N - Roadster
R - Unspecified fuel
R - Standard elite Q - Pickup extended cab
with A/C
S - Standard P - Pickup regular cab
U - Ethanol with A/C
U - Premium elite R - Recreational vehicle
V - Petrol with A/C
W - Luxury elite S - Sport
X - Ethanol without
X - Special T - Convertible A/C
V - Van (passenger) Z – Petrol without A/C
W - Wagon/estate
X - Special
Y - Two-wheel vehicle
Z - Special offer car
For example, a CDMR type is a compact, 4 – 5 door car, with manual transmission
and air conditioning.
Note: When you display car availability, unique car type codes can appear in your
response. To make it easier to shop and compare similar vehicles for multiple
vendors, you may see codes like JEAD (Elite Intermediate/Coupe/ Automatic/Diesel
with Air Conditioning) and OJBR (Oversize/All Terrain/Automatic with 4-Wheel
Drive/Air Conditioning).
Direct Selling a Rental Car

You can direct sell a car:
 With air segments and a Name field.
 Without air segments and a Name field.
The function identifier to direct sell a car is: CRN

4
With Air Segments
When selling a rental car with air segments, Travelport Worldspan assumes that:
 The Before the car segment is the arrival air segment with the pickup airport,
date, and time.
 After the car segment is the departure air segment with the drop-off airport,
date, and time.
To direct sell a car with air segments, enter CRN followed by the segment number
after which you are inserting the car segment, slash (/), a C for chain code followed
by the car rental company code, slash (/) and a V for vehicle followed by the car
type.
Example entry from segment 1, using chain code ET for a vehicle type of ICAR:
CRNS1/CET/VICAR
Without Air Segments
You can sell a rental car when air segments do not exist in a PNR.
Note: Since there is no PNR information, you must specify pickup and drop-off dates
and times in the format
To direct sell a rental car without air segments, enter CRN followed by the airport
code, pick-up date, drop-off date, slash (/), the car rental company code, slash (/),
car vehicle type code, slash (/), the arrival time, slash (/), drop-off time, slash (/) and
passenger name.
Example entry: CRNATL1AUG7AUG/CZI/VECAR/ARR-10A/DT-1P/NM-SMITH JOHN
When you sell the rental car, Travelport Worldspan Car Source participants respond
with a sold segment and an instant confirmation number.

5
Selling a Rental Car from Low-to-High Availability

Travelport Smartpoint provides an availability display with rates appearing in low-to-
high order, so you can choose the best available rate using manual entries or the Car
Booking Tool script accessed via the Calendar Tab, Reservations Menu or interactive
PNR functions. You can also add search qualifiers to narrow your search for specific
types of rates.
Reference selling a rental car has three steps:
1. Display low-to-high availability.
2. Display rate rules.
3. Sell the car.
Step 1: Display Low-to-High Availability

You can display low-to-high availability to view car company rates and availability.
Use car availability to display a list of car rental options to determine which best
meets your customer’s needs. You can display car availability with Travelport
Smartpoint using interactive links, menus and the calendar either with or without air
segments.
With air segments

When displaying low-to-high availability with air segments, Travelport Smartpoint
will pre-populate the Car Booking Tool with the airport code and flight arrival and
departure times of the air segments booked.
To display low-to-high availability click on the air segment you require.
Select Car Booking Tool to launch it in the Smart Panel. The rental location, dates
and times are pre-populated using the information from the selected segment.

6
Without air segments

You can display low-to-high availability when air segments do not exist in the PNR.
Because there is no information in the PNR concerning pickup and drop-off date and
time, you need to specify that information in the search screen.
To display car availability without an air segment you can select the Car Booking Tool
option from the Top 10 Scripts in the Smart Panel.

7
As no air segment was referenced, the Car Booking Tool is not pre-populated with
the rental requirements. All fields with the red asterisk (*) are mandatory
Car Availability Search screen explained:
Shop/Sell or Direct Choose which method of sell you require.

Sell
Pick-up Location Select the pick-up location from the drop-

down list, including Airport, All Locations, By
Postal Code, By City Name. Add the location
to the blank box below.
Drop-off Location Select the drop-off location from the drop-

down list (same as above)
Pick-up Date Enter the pick-up date or click on the

interactive calendar icon to select the date.

8
Time Enter the pick-up time
Drop-off Date Enter the drop-off date or click on the

interactive calendar icon to select the date.
Rental Car Company Select the rental car company from the drop-
down list (up to 6 rental car companies may
be selected.)
Car Type Select the car type from the drop-down list
(multiple car types may be selected.)
Specific Car Type Click on the link for specific car type to enter
the required car type code. A maximum of
three car codes may be specified.
Scroll down to view additional options.

9
Here you can add additional qualifiers to your search including Corporate ID,
Frequent Renter ID, Rate Codes, Billing information, Currency code, and other
supplementary information. It is important to note that if a Credit Card is being used
for guarantee it must be entered here, you can also choose up to 6 items of special
equipment.
Scroll to the top to view the Settings icon
Settings allows you to choose options regarding the corporate discount number or
ID numbers of your clients. For example, if you save the setting ‘Always populate
/CD and ID information,’ the CD and ID numbers will automatically be added to the
sell entry if you have set up a 5.C entry in a World File or as an entry in the PNR.
For more information select the link, Learn More.
To close the pop-up, select the X in the top right-hand corner.
Autofill city codes/names

Smartpoint now has autofill for the city and airport codes, making searches faster
and more efficient. When city or airport codes are required, there is now a combo
box that is triggered to autofill by typing in airport codes, city codes, departure or
arrival city codes
that tries to match the entry being made.

10
When entering a full city name with multiple airports, an alphabetical list is
provided.
Screen example:
Searching for cars using the calendar

The calendar is located with the icons in the top right-hand area of the screen.
Screen example:

11
The same screen appears, but with the rental dates pre-populated. You can add the
pick-up location e.g. ORD (Chicago O Hare Airport).
Car rental counter location

The location of the car rental counter can now be found directly from the car
availability screen without having to check the rate rules.
From the Car Booking Tool, there is now a sortable Location column next to the
Vendor column. The agent can hover for a quick look at the location information or
select it for more detailed information.
Screen example when the LOCATION code is selected:
Car Availability Results Screen
Once you have entered the travelers search criteria in to the Car Booking Tool the
interactive availability results screen is displayed in the Smart Panel.
Partial example screen:

12
The following table lists components of the low-to-high availability screen.
Search Criteria Re-confirms the specified search criteria.
Vendor Car Vendor with flag/logo
Car Type-Compact Car type code (click on the link to decode and view
an image of the car type selected.)
Total Approximate total cost for the rental
Mileage Mileage limit for the rental
Details Displays location vendor information opening times,

address and other useful information
Rules Displays the rules
Sell Click Sell to book the required car rate
Scroll Bar Scroll down to view more vendors and rates. You
may have a link for More Rates to view further rate
options.

13
Click on the car type to view the image:
Using Manual Entries
If manual entries are used to check for car availability the results screen is displayed
slightly differently.
Example Entry: CRADEN20JAN24JAN/ARR-9A/DT-9A
The following table lists the components of the low-to-high availability screen.
Line Line number for each car rate
Level Participation level of car vendor
Car Co Car Vendor
Code Car type code
Total Rate Approximate total cost of the rental

14
Free Miles Mileage limit for the rental
Guarantee Type of guarantee required
Flight Flight details
Location Location of rental office (Counter service or

shuttle to counter)
TERM – Counter in Terminal – Walk to car
CNTR –Counter in Terminal – Shuttle to car
SHTL – Shuttle to both counter and car
Hover over to display the quick tooltip, or

select the link to display more information.
Rate Code Selecting the rate code displays the rate
rules in a separate pop-up box.
Base Rate Base rate for the car rental.
Selecting this icon displays the vehicle

images
Selecting this icon books the selected rate.
Note: If the Car rental company is specified in the availability request the
participation level is not displayed in the results table but is shown at the
top of the screen on the left-hand side.
Example Entry: CRAORD12SEP14SEP/ARR-0900/DT-0900/C-ZR

15
With a CD number
When you use a corporate discount (CD) number with a CRA request, Car Source
vendors display car types and rates affiliated with the CD qualifier. You can then
view the applicable car types and rates before selling.
When you include a CD qualifier in the availability request, the CD number carries
over to the reference-sell request.
To request availability with a CD qualifier, add a slash (/), followed by CD, hyphen (-)
and your Corporate discount number to your availability entry:
Example option entry: /CD-343AVIS
Many other qualifiers may also be added to a manual car availability entry for a list
of options see HELP CROPT
One-way rental
You may have a customer who would like to pick up a car in one city and drop off in
another city. When you specify a drop-off location in the availability request, the car
vendors display the car types and rates that allow a pickup and drop-off at the
requested points.
For a One-Way rental – check the locations first, for example to check the car
locations for SFO:
CRLSFO
If you want, you can add a specific car chain:
CRLSFO/C-ZE
The response gives you the location code and the location address which is added to
the manual One Way rental entry:
The following entry can be used to pick up a car in LAX and drop of in SFO location
code N06.
CRALAX18MAR20MAR/ARR-10A/DT-10A/DO-SFON06/C-ZE

16
Selecting the Rate Code displays the Rate Rules. If there is a drop charge applicable
for the one-way rental it is included in the response.

17
One-way rentals can also be requested via the Car Booking Tool script.
When you press CONTINUE, a list of locations appears for the drop off city

18
To view a map of the car vendor’s drop-off location, select Map.
To move the map, select the headline and drag the map to a new location on the
screen. To resize the map, click on one of the corners and drag to increase or
decrease the size. Select the X at the top right-hand corner to close the map.
To view the car availability, press the Select option.

19
The Pick-Up and Drop-Off locations are displayed at the top of the screen together
with the dates and times.
To view if there is a drop charge, select Rules for the required car type.
To return to the availability display, select the arrow at top right-hand side of the
screen. The arrow on the left -hand side of the screen will return you to the Car
Booking Tool search screen.
20
Updating an availability display

Once you have requested car availability, you may need to make changes.
Travelport Smartpoint has the capability to update a display either using the Car
Booking Tool or from a manual availability display.
To update the vendor or car type the format function identifier CRA/ followed by the
vendor code or name:
CRA/C-ZR
The following table lists frequently used formats.
To update availability by: Use this format:
Car type CRA/VECAR
Specific rental company CRA/C-ZR
If you need to change the details in the Car Booking Tool display, click on the arrow
to return to the fill in search screen so that changes can be made

21
Step 2: Display the Rate Rules
Because of car rental rate restrictions, you should display rate rules to verify that
you can sell a particular rate. You can then confirm the details with your customer,
such as:
 Rental requirements (e.g. minimum and maximum days).
 Guarantee or deposit requirements.
 Cancellation policies.
You can display rate rules for all participant levels, as well as from any availability
screen.
To display rate rules from a Car Booking Tool availability display, select Rules.
To display rules from a manual availability display, click on Rate Code.

22

23
The following table lists the rate rule components and their description.
#SX – Sixth **Source Rules** Vendor information and Participation Rules.
MIA INTL APO 122-2900 NW Rental Pick up location and address

25th Street STE $07 MIAMI
Pick up MIA 01 Pick up location code
Drop off MIA 01 Drop off location code
Pick Up Details Information regarding rental counter if shuttle bus is

required
Hours Rental desk opening hours
Rate Code: IR5 Rate Code Selected
ECAR Car Type Booking Code
Weekly Rate / Extra week/ Weekly, daily and hourly rate will be listed in the relevant
Extra Day / Extra Hour currency along with the total free mileage
Total Rate Detail Details of the rate for example if it is a weekly rate plus a
daily charge
Total Rate Total amount payable including mandatory charges
Mandatory Charges A breakdown of the mandatory charges
Advisory Advisory that the rate is only guaranteed at time of

booking
Guar Reservation Requirements for reservation guarantee, deposit, and

prepay.
Minimum / Maximum rental Minimum and maximum restrictions on the selected rate
Pick up time / Latest return Time restrictions on the rate selected

time
Rate Guaranteed Length of time the rate is guaranteed from the date of
booking
Restricted Mileage Details on mileage or where the rental is permitted (e.g.

continental USA and Canada only)
General Any other general information regarding the selected

rate

24
From a sold car segment

To display rules from a booked car segment in a PNR, enter CRR followed by the
segment identifier (S), and the car segment number.
Example entry: CRRS3
Note: Some vendors may not provide this feature.
Step 3: Sell Rental Car

After viewing car availability and rate rules, you are ready to sell the rental. Ensure
the passenger name has been entered prior to selling a car.
The sell response varies with the participation level of the car rental company.
However, the sold segment appears the same way in the PNR.
Some rental companies may require a guarantee or deposit payment you will need
to check if this is required when you validate the rate and before you choose to sell.
The credit card details are entered in the Credit Card Guarantee Information area of
the Car Booking Tool screen.

25
To sell a car, simply click on Sell in the Car Booking Tool.
Immediately the prompt to add the passenger name is displayed. You have the
options; add the name, tick to use first name in the PNR or cancel the prompt. This is
useful if you have not already added a name.
If using the Car Booking Tool, it will respond letting you know that the rate you have
selected has been booked.

26
To sell a car from a manual availability display, select the Book icon in the Action
Items column.
The prompt to add qualifiers to the sell entry is displayed.
If you do not have any qualifiers such as a CD number, remove the / and enter.
If you do have qualifiers add them after the /
For example, CR001/CD-XXXXXXX
Example response:
Depending on the vendor participation an instant confirmation will be made prior to

end transaction. The sell response will include information such as dates, the
guaranteed rate, pick-up and drop-off location codes and the confirmation number.
You must end transact your PNR, to confirm it and receive a record locator.
Note: Never ignore a car reservation as the reservation will remain live and the
traveler or agency could be charged no show fees. If the traveler no longer
requires the booking, complete the PNR then take the steps shown later in this
module to cancel.

27
Cancelling a Car Segment

When a customer no longer wants to rent a car or changes an itinerary and needs a
different car rental, you can cancel the rental car.
The function identifier to cancel a car segment is: X
To cancel a car segment, use the following steps.
1. Display the PNR.
2. Enter X followed by the segment number.
3. Example: X2
4. End the PNR.
Note: Because the booking may exist in the participant’s system, always cancel the
car segment instead of ignoring it before you end transaction. Follow the steps
above to avoid having a confirmed reservation in the company’s system while it is
not present in Worldspan.
Modifying a Car Segment

You can also modify a sold car segment, including:
 Pickup and/or drop-off dates
 Car type
 Or deleting optional sell fields
Note: Before modifying, check availability to be sure the car rental company can
accommodate your change.
The function identifier to change a sold car segment is: CR@
To modify a sold car segment, enter CR@ followed by the car segment number,
slash (/), and the new information.
Example entry: CR@1/D12FEB14FEB

28
This identifier generates a message to cancel and rebook the car using new
information. The following applies to these participation levels: If the car company is
AccessPlus or Car Source, the modification is processed immediately. This means the
original booking is subject to cancellation. For non-AccessPlus associates, changes
are processed after end transaction.
The following table lists format examples for modifying a car segment.
To: Use this format:
Change pick-up and drop-off date CR@1/D12FEB14FEB
Change drop-off time CR@2/DT-1300
Change frequent traveler number CR@4/FT-AA1234567
Change Vehicle Code CR@1/VECAR
Change Supplementary CR@1/SI-FREEFORM

information
Delete Supplementary CR@1/SI-

information
Displaying Car Company Description and Policy
You can display corporate policies and descriptions of car rental companies. You can
also display individual location descriptions from an availability screen or sold car
segment.
There are two types of descriptions:
 Location describes policies and procedures that are specific to a location,
such as hours of operation, car types, minimum age, and guarantee
requirements.
 Corporate describes policies specific to a car rental company, such as
acceptable credit cards, promotions, and special equipment.
This section describes how to display, interpret, and use the description menus.
The function identifier to display a car description menu is: CRD
Example entry: CRDGLA/CZE
There is a standardized set of categories for each description menu. Car rental
companies provide numbers and keywords to access these categories.

29
From Availability
To display the location description menu from a Car Booking Tool availability, click
on Details.
To display location description information from a manual availability display, click

on the line number.
Location information is displayed with a list of categories that can be clicked to

display further information on a particular topic.

30
From a PNR
To display a location description menu from a sold car segment, enter CRD followed
by the letter S and the segment number.
Example entry: CRDS3
To display a specific category, click on the interactive category code.
By Car Rental Company

Sometimes you need to look up corporate policy information for a specific car rental
company. To view this type of description, you can display the car company’s
corporate description menu.
To display a corporate description menu, enter G/CAR/Z followed by the car rental
company code.
Example entry: G/CAR/ZIZ
The Avis corporate description menu appears.
Keywords and associated numbers identify the categories of information that
appear for the specified car rental company.
To display a list, enter G/L followed by the listing number, you can then display the
specific page number, enter G/P and the page number.
Example entry: G/P11
Note: Although all car rental companies have a description menu, not every
company includes information for each item. Therefore, you may not see every list
or page number.

31
By Car Rental Company and City

To display a specific car rental company in a specific city, enter CRD followed by the
city or airport code, slash (/) and then the car vendor code.
Example entry: CRDLAX/CZE
The location description menu for Hertz at Los Angeles International airport appears.
Displaying a Car Rental Location
You can display car rental locations by airport code, or city code along with airport
code and car vendor.
The function identifier to display a car index is: CRL
Example entry: CRLGLA
By Airport Code
You can display an index of all car rental locations near an airport.
To display an index of airport car rental locations, enter CRL followed by the airport
code.
Example entry: CRLATL

32
The index for airport car rental locations appears.
By City
You can display an index of all car rental locations in a city.
To display an index of city car rental locations, enter CRL followed by the city code.
Each Location has a location code for example Hertz location code W65 is Houdan.
Example entry: CRLPAR
The index for Paris car rental locations appears.
By Airport/City Code and Car Rental Company

You can display an index of all rental locations near a particular airport or city with a
specific car rental company.
To display an index of car rental locations near an airport or city with a specific car
chain enter CRL followed by the airport or city code, slash (/), C, followed by the car
chain code.
Example entry: CRLIAH/CZE
The index for car rental locations near to Houston airport with Hertz appears.

33
Summary
 Use Travelport Worldspan to determine car company codes and names
 Identify different car type codes
 Sell rental cars in Travelport Worldspan using the steps identified in this
module
 Search car availability using qualifiers
 Update a car availability display
 Cancel a sold car segment
 Modify a sold car segment
 Display car company descriptions and policies
 Display a car rental location

34
Module Review
1. Which car vendor is represented by the code ZD?
2. Describe the car type represented by SCAR.
3. If viewing the availability screen, what would you click on to view the company policies of
Hertz?
4. How can you add a credit card number to a car booking?
5. What format would you use to change your current car booking to an Intermediate size car?
6. From the following availability screen, how do you display the car vendor rules?

35
The Travelport Worldspan hotel booking program is an advanced selling tool that
includes enhanced room reservation capability and extensive access to the latest
hotel information.
Travelport Worldspan availability using the Hotel Select Database provides access to
a hotel’s inventory to view and sell from availability. Through Travelport Smartpoint
you can sell a room quickly using a customer-specific search.
Module Objectives
 Identify and explain hotel participation levels in Worldspan.
 Determine hotel company codes and names.
 Search for and sell hotels quickly and easily using the interactive features
available in Travelport Smartpoint.
 Modify and cancel hotel segments
 Display a hotel list
 Agency Alerts
Hotel Participation Levels

Travelport Worldspan hotel participation levels are:
 Hotel Source
 AccessPlus
 Non AccessPlus
Hotel Source
HC-SOURCE
Hotel Source is the highest level of connectivity and allows you to receive hotel rates
and availability on the initial hotel availability screen directly from the hotel vendor’s
reservation system. Information on the initial screen is taken from the chain CRS.
The confirmation number and Hotel Source indicator of #XX# (XX = hotel vendor
code) immediately display in the PNR when the sell is made.
The # symbol indicates a Hotel Source availability associate.
A sell message results in an instant confirmation. The reservation is built in the
associate’s database prior to end transaction.

1
AccessPlus
HC-ACCESS
AccessPlus is the second level of participation available. The $ symbol indicates an
AccessPlus associate.
All AccessPlus associates offer instant confirmation numbers prior to end
transaction. The confirmation number and AccessPlus indicator of $XX$ (XX = hotel
vendor code) immediately display in the PNR when the sell is made. If the
AccessPlus link is not available, the confirmation is processed after end transaction.
However, not all associates participate in all AccessPlus features.
Non AccessPlus
HC-NACCESS
Any hotel companies that are not AccessPlus or Hotel Source are considered non-
AccessPlus. Non-AccessPlus participants do not have a symbol in front of the
company name. Confirmation numbers are returned from the hotel chain after end
transaction.
For a list of hotel chains participating in Hotel Select see INFO HAP / INFO HSA
Encoding and Decoding

Use Travelport Worldspan encoding and decoding to find a hotel company name or
two-letter chain code.
The function identifier to encode and decode hotel companies is: HC
Finding a Hotel Company Code
HELP HCHAIN
To encode a hotel company, enter HC followed by the hotel company name.
Example HCRAMADA
The following screen appears displaying the two-letter code.

2
Finding a Hotel Company Name
To decode a hotel company, enter HC followed by the two-letter hotel company

code.
Example entry: HCHI
The following screen appears displaying the name of the hotel chain:
You can also encode/decode hotel chains using the Encode/Decode script.
Access the script from the Smart Tools menu and select Hotel Vendor from the drop-
down list. Enter the name or code of the Hotel Vendor and click on Continue. The
response appears in the same screen in the Result area.
The hotel chain code may be used to access information on the specific chain.
( XX = chain code)
INFO XXQ gives information on the features the hotel participates in.
INFO XXHSOURCE shows information on the availability and rate changes during the
stay
INFO XXQERR – shows the Error Responses

3
Steps to Selling a Hotel

INFO HBOOK
To sell a hotel through Travelport Worldspan, use these four basic steps:
1. Hotel List
2. Hotel Availability
3. Rate Rules
4. Sell
Following these steps saves you time when completing the PNR and, ensures the
best accommodations for your customer. The following sections explain each step
in detail.
Step 1: Display Hotel List

HELP HL
Use Hotel List to display a list of hotel properties to determine which best meets
your customer’s needs. You can display a hotel list with Travelport Smartpoint using
interactive links, menus and the calendar either with or without air segments.
There are occasions when your customer may wish to stay at a specific hotel
location. Travelport Worldspan provides a list of all hotel properties regardless of
their availability for a particular date. You can view them in three different
categories:
 Airport and surrounding area

 City and surrounding suburbs
 Surrounding area of a reference point
When requesting a Hotel List, you can append availability search qualifiers to the
format to view hotel properties that specifically meet your needs.
You can request a Hotel List with or without air segments.

4
Requesting a Hotel List

To request a Hotel List, enter HL followed by the city code, airport code, or
reference point name.
Examples
HLNYC (city code) If the city center is required, the A is not used, and the dates may
follow the city/airport code immediately
HLAMIA (airport code) To display airport locations you must use:

HLA. If the A option is used, then the dates must be entered using /D
HL-NIAGARA FALLS (reference point)

Note: If more than one occurrence of a city or reference point exists in Travelport
Worldspan (e.g. Niagara Falls), a similar names list appears. If item 1 is the desired
item, enter HL1 to view the desired hotel list.
Enter HLATL and the hotel list appears.

5
The following table lists the components of the hotel list screen and line 1 of the
display.
View Map icon Link to display hotel location on a

map
CP Chain code
CROWNE PLAZA MIDTO Property Name
ATLANTA GA Property Address
1 Distance from city center
N Direction (North, East, West etc.)
Check Availability status
ACTION ITEMS Select to view hotel

diamond/NTM rating and the
hotel images.
more results Click to view more properties
The hotel list is interactive. Clicking on the hotel code will display the Hotel Detail
pages. Clicking ‘Check’ will display the Hotel Availability and clicking on Action items
will display hotel images and the property location on a map.
The Lowest Public Rate (LPR) program is an agreement with participating hotels to
offer their lowest unrestricted rate available to the general public.
AAA and NTM Ratings

6
The following is displayed if TripAdvisor reviews are available.
Note: The dates and number of persons must be included in the HL entry prior to
clicking on ‘Check’ for the hotel availability to display.
To add the dates and number of persons for a city location:
Example entries:
HLMIA19DEC23DEC2
HLMIA19DEC23DEC/NP-2
To display hotels in an airport location, add the letter ‘A’ after the airport code, and
add the dates using the option /D followed by the dates. The number of persons
may be added by using the number of persons or the option /NP-
Example entries:
HLACDG/D23MAY29MAY2
HLACDG/D23MAY29MAY/NP-2
Autofill city names/codes

Smartpoint now has autofill for the city and airport codes, making searches faster
and more efficient. When city or airport codes are required, there is now a combo
box that is triggered to autofill by typing in airport codes, city codes, departure or
arrival city codes
that tries to match the entry being made. When entering a full city name with
multiple airports, an alphabetical list is provided.
Screen example:

7
With air segments

When using Travelport Smartpoint it makes several assumptions when you request
hotel list.
 It pre-populates the hotel search with the check-in and out dates
based on the flight segments in the PNR.
 It assumes the city centre location (this may be changed to search
for airport location.)
It displays a hotel list within a 40-mile radius from the city centre.
This may be expanded using the Distance option up to a maximum
of 75 miles.
Click on the air segment number to launch the Hotel Booking Tool.
The Hotel Booking Tool script will launch in the Smart Panel.

8
Note: The pre-populated fields match the flight destination and travel dates as
booked.
Without air segments

To display hotel list without an air segment you can again use the Hotel Booking Tool
script this time accessed from the Reservations drop down menu and populate the
information.

9
On selecting this option, the Hotel Booking Tool will launch in the Smart Panel with a
blank fill-in search box. Here you can enter the traveler’s search requirements.

10
Searching for hotels using the calendar

The calendar is located with the icons in the top right-hand area of the screen.
Screen example:
The same dialog box will appear but with the pre-selected dates entered in the
calendar.

11
Hotel Search Screen Explained
Item: Explanation:
Search Hotels By Select how you wish to search for hotels,

choose Address/Postal code, Airport
Code, City Code, Reference Point,
Property Code, Property Name or My
Favorites from a drop-down list.
Airport or City Code Depending on the selection made from

the drop-down list either enter an airport
or city code, choose the type of reference
point or enter your property code or
name.
Address/Postal code You can add partial or full address, if

using address - city name and country
needs to be added. Postal code needs
only the country to be added.
Check-In Date Enter the check-in date or click on the

calendar icon to choose your date.
Check-Out Date Enter the check-out date or click on the

calendar icon to choose your date.
Guests Enter the number of guests
Rooms Enter the number of rooms required
Distance and Direction Enter a specified distance if required
Chain/Loyalty Codes Enter up to 3 chain or loyalty codes
Securate/Plan Codes Enter up to 3 securate or plan codes
Display Available Hotels Tick the box if you wish to display only
Only available hotels
Display Net Rates Only Tick the box if you wish to display net
rates only
Automatically Display Tick the box if you wish the hotel map to
Hotel Map display with the hotel list
More Options Click the more options link to add further

search qualifiers
Settings Click settings to choose how information

is displayed

12
Continue Click continue to submit your availability

request
More Options
Clicking on More Options will allow you to add further search qualifiers such as
Corporate ID, Frequent Guest ID, Currency Code and Rate Type. There is also the
option to search for a hotel with up to four amenities.
Note: Additional search qualifiers may also be used if using manual format entries.
To refer to these please see HELP HOPT
Settings
At the bottom of the Hotel Booking Tool script you have the option for Settings.
Within settings there are a few very useful time saving options. For example, you
can adjust how many Move Downs per Hotel List. This will make scrolling through
the list of hotels easier.

13
If you add hotel remarks in your World File as a 5.H remark or as a PNR entry you
can adjust the setting so that these remarks will automatically prepopulate in the
sell entry.
Show Rate Ranges is useful to view the rate ranges in the Hotel List. If you choose
not to show these there will be no reference to rates as shown here.
Show hotel images can be set to no if you do not wish to view the images or
photographs of the properties.
Favorite Hotels
Favorites are useful if you wish to create a list of up to fifty of your favorite
properties related to a destination. For example, create a list of properties relating
to Disneyland US. Add the name of the attraction as Disneyland, the Airport code
MCO and then add the individual property IDs. Save your settings.

14
When you search for Hotels select My Favorites from the list.
Hotel Results Screen
Once you have entered the traveler’s search criteria the interactive Hotel Results
screen is displayed in the Smart Panel.

15
Example Hotel Results:
Hotel Sort
At the top of the Hotel Results you have various column headings which can be
clicked to Sort your hotel properties, for example clicking on Hotel Name will sort all
hotels alphabetically.
Note: Clicking on an option sorts the list of hotels based on the option selection.
Hotel Compare
The Compare function is useful when you want to create a customized Hotel List.
Place a tick on the box, a prompt is returned indicating that the property is saved.

16
Once you have selected the properties you want to save or compare click on
COMPARE and the properties are displayed.
To return to the full Hotel Results display you can click the back arrow on the top left
of the display or click on View all properties.
Click Clear compare to remove any hotels from the Compare list.

17
Hotel Detail
Hotel property details contain information such as directions to the hotel, facilities,
and room descriptions.
To view this information, simply click on Details on the required property.
Example:
Click on the interactive keywords to view more details. You can go back to results at
any time by clicking on the arrow link at the top of the page.

18
Hotel Images
To speed up the loading of the hotel results screen, the images for the hotels are no
longer automatically displayed on the page. The images can still be displayed by
pressing the view photos icon.
Screen example:
Hotel Map
When the Hotel booking tool Option to Automatically Display Hotel Map is selected
the map displays when the hotel results are returned. If this option is not selected
at the time the Hotel Booking Tool is completed, you can display the hotel map by
selecting the View Map icon in the results screen.
Screen example:

19
The map icon is in the top right-hand side of the screen in the Hotel Booking Tool
Results screen. Select the icon to display the movable map which opens in a new
browser window.
Screen example:
To view More Properties, select the link at the bottom of the Hotel Results display.
The map icon is also available in the Smart Screen when using cryptic entries.
Screen example:
Once the map is displayed, you may:

 Move it to another location on the screen.
 Resize it by dragging the corners Zoom in/out using the +/- buttons
on the top right.
 Change the area of the map by selecting it and then moving right,
left, up or down.
20
 Hover over the pins to see details of the properties. The hotel pin
for the selected property will turn a brighter blue making it easier
to identify on the map. There are links to display the Hotel Detail,
Hotel Rates and view the hotel images.
 If you complete a different hotel search without closing the map, or
request more results, the map automatically updates with the new
results.
 If the map disappears, you can redisplay it by pressing the ALT plus
Tab keys.
Screen example:
 Select the name of the hotel to display the Hotel Details

 Select the Rate to display the Hotel Rates
 Select the photo icon to display the images of the hotel.
Note: If you check the option to “Display Available Hotels Only” on the Hotel
Booking Tool and then select the View Map, all properties are mapped, not just the
available ones. This is because results returned from the host are not limited to the
available ones only.

21
In the example above, you clicked the option in the Hotel Booking Tool to Display
Available Hotels Only. The Hotel Results screen only has two available hotels which
are number 2 and 7. Other hotels are shown on the map, but they are not available
for the dates requested.
Graphical Hotel Headline Ads show Dynamic Rates
You are able to view hotel Dynamic Rate Update (DRU) banner ads to select the
lowest rate and directly book without having to search additional availability. An
interactive banner ad pulls the lowest public rate from the DRU system and displays
it on the banner. It is available for any air, car, or hotel entry and date specific to the
customer’s request.
When you select the banner, the hotel availability screen is displayed. Information is
cached in eight-hour windows, so there is the possibility of a discrepancy if a rate
changes during the eight-hour time period. If the agent selects the graphic rather
than the banner, the ad page opens as it does currently.
Screen example:

22
Hotel Text Headline Ads

When displaying hotels in the Smart Screen using cryptic entries or using the Hotel
Booking Tool you may find that there is a link to a Text Headline Ad.
The link displays the lowest rate for the advertised property with a single click.
The dates and number of persons are based on the original HL entry. If not indicated
in the HL entry, the default is for one night/one person.
Select the HAP* link to display the rates result page for the specified property code.
From the rates screen, you can book a hotel room by selecting Sell or return to the
original HL results screen by selecting the arrow at the top right-hand side of the
screen.
You may also see up to a maximum of three text headlines where hotel vendors can
offer promotions:
To view the promotion, select the link W* followed by the line number.
Example entry: W*01
To return to the hotel list, select the link HL*

23
The text ad headlines also appear in the Hotel Booking Tool at the top of the display
Select the blue Details link to display the promotion.
Using Manual Entries
If manual entries are used to check the Hotel List the same information is produced
but the results screen is displayed slightly differently.
Example Entries:
For city center hotels: HLATL14SEP17SEP2
For airport hotels: HLAATL/D14SEP17SEP2
Example Screen:
Click on “A” to show the available Rates at this property.

24
The description describes the rate types and advises if the rate is flexible or
restricted and has no refunds.
Commission can display as Y for yes or N for No. A number e.g. 10% or this can be
left blank indicating the vendor does not show the commission amount.
Cancellation can show as NR non-refundable or also show the number of days in
advance e.g. 01D or also have the time 1800
The rate shown in blue is clickable and by selecting this option, the rate rule will be
displayed as a printable pop up box.
The Sell icon can be used to sell the rate type, this will add the sell command H001/
to the Smartscreen, where you can add the guarantee or credit card details.
Example entry: H001/G-CCVI4444333322221111EXP12-21

Updating Hotel List
If searching for hotels using the Hotel Booking Tool you can easily update your
display if you need to make changes. Clicking the arrow at the top of the display or
clicking on ‘Back’ at the bottom of the results screen will take you back to the initial
fill-in search screen where changes can be made to your search.
If using a manual hotel list entry, you can easily update your search by typing over
the original request or adding to it, once you have updated the information click on
OK to submit your changes.
Step 2: Display Availability

After choosing a hotel from the list display, click on ‘Available’ or ‘Select’ to display a
list of available rates.
The following screen is an example of available hotel rates. If there are multiple
rates, use the scroll bar to scroll through the rates.

25
Use the back arrow to return to the hotel list.

The Star ratings for the selected hotel and check in and check out time is displayed.
Information from the Details section can be viewed by clicking on ‘See more’.
Details of the rate, cancellation time and commissions are shown with each line of
availability.
Click on the rate Rules to validate your chosen rate, or click on Book to book the rate
without viewing the rules.
Step 3: Display Room Rate Rules
Hotel companies can have restrictive rate policies. Checking room rate Rules is an
important part of the booking process in order to:
 Sell the correct rate for the requested dates.
 Advise the customer of any rate changes during the stay and of any
guarantee, deposit, or cancellation policies.
Note: Rules vary for each hotel company and room type.
To view the rules for a selected rate, click on Rules, This gives you full information on
the room rate selected, and the approximate total cost of the entire stay in the local
currency of the hotel location.
Sometimes a hotel vendor may quote their rates in another currency, so it is
important that you validate the rate you choose to sell to your client.
Note: The rate is $209 for the first night and the rate changes each night.
Generating a total of $687.00.
Text is highlighted in orange for ease of viewing.

26
Step 4: Sell the Hotel Segment

After viewing hotel availability and rate rules, you are ready to sell the hotel room.
Hotel participants respond as follows:
 Hotel Source and AccessPlus participants respond with a sold
segment and an instant confirmation number.
If the hotel booking is part of the air booking you may have already added a name.
When you click to book the rate, you are invited to add the name, you would only
need to add the name if you have not already added this as part of the PNR entries.

27
A Sell Hotel Screen appears for you to enter the sell details. Most hotels require a
guarantee or deposit and you should check the Rate Rules for the acceptable forms
of payment. A link to the Rate Rules is available at the bottom of the screen.
You can also add Corporate Discount ID, Frequent Guest ID and request additional
beds such as child rollaway or crib in the fields provided.
For other requests, for example your customer wants a room on the lower floors, or
with a sea view, you can use the free-format Supplementary Information field to
send a request to the hotel vendor. Once you are ready press continue.
The Hotel Booking Tool will respond letting you know that the hotel you selected is
booked.

28
Depending on the hotel participation an instant confirmation will be made prior to

end transaction.
Note: Never ignore a hotel reservation as the reservation will remain live and the
traveler could be charged no show fees. If the traveler no longer requires the
booking, complete the PNR then take the steps shown later in this module to cancel.
Always End your booking to get your PNR locator.
Sell Response Screen
The following table lists the components of the Inside Availability sell response.
1 Segment number
HHL Travelport Worldspan sold hotel
HI Hotel chain code
SS01 Status code, number of rooms
ATL City/airport code
IN14JULOUT17JUL In and out dates
2231 Hotel property number
Holiday Inn Downtown Property name
NP-2 Number of guests
R-0QNN013A Room type sold
RG-USD209.00 Guaranteed rate for first night
RD-Best Flexible rate Rate description
NM-Smith/Derek Guest name
G-CCCAXXXXXXXXXXXX0000EXP12- Guarantee/deposit credit card
15 number
Cancellation policy

29
CXP-CXL BY 1800 Confirmation number

CF-62412137#HI# Total room rate
TTL-796.92 USD Base Rate
BAS 687.00 USD TAX Percent
TAX 16.PCT
Hotel Billback
Please Note: The following is a brief overview of Conferma Billback, it is not covered
in detail in this course. Conferma requires separate contract and provisioning and
customers will receive full training following this process.
Hotel Billback is available for agencies who have been contracted and provisioned
for Billback. Hotel Billback integrates the Conferma product suite into Smartpoint
and automates the manual Billback process undertaken today by agents by utilizing
Virtual Account Numbers (VAN’s) and automated faxing.
For more information please contact your Hospitality Business Development
Manager or Travelport Account Manager. Alternatively e-mail conferma-
enquiries@travelport.com with your contact details and your Travelport Account
Manager will be in contact.
Please note that the Conferma Forms of Payment, as detailed in the following
sections, will be visible whether the agency PCC has been provisioned or not.
Conferma – New Deployment
Conduct your Hotel availability search and rate selection as usual.

In the Sell Hotel screen select the appropriate payment type for the booking:
Guarantee, Deposit or Pre-payment.
In the Payment Method Options select Conferma – New Deployment

30
This will enable new fields that require completion.
Account ID /Name
Specify the relevant card pool for this booking by entering the ID or Name of the
Account.
E-mail address
Any failed faxes will be sent to the e-mail address specified here. If no e-mail address
is specified any failed faxes will be sent to the e-mail address stored within
Conferma WebPay .
Hotel Fax Number

This is retrieved from the GDS database. An agent can override the default fax
number, by manually entering another fax number. All fax numbers must include the
country code.
Payment Options
Click on up to 5 items which the Guest may include in the Billback instruction. This
information will be contained in the fax sent to the Hotel, stored in the PNR and (if
supported by the Hotel supplier) sent to the Hotel in the booking.
Payment Instructions
Add up to 60 characters of optional additional relevant text for the hotel. This
information will be contained in the fax sent to the Hotel and stored in the PNR.
Amount
This will default from the approximate total rate returned by the Hotel Provider.
Conferma will apply the tolerances as agreed during the implementation process
and as configured in the Conferma system. If an agent decides to over-ride the
amount the agent will be responsible for managing this for any subsequent updates.

31
Please note that when requesting Conferma to deploy the card for the booking the
following rules will apply to the Card Effective dates
 Standard Sell – The start date will be the check-in date and end
date will be the check-out date + 7days.
 Deposit Required Sell - The start date will be the date of the
booking and end date will be the check-out date + 7days.
 Prepayment Required Sell - The start date will be the date of the
booking and end date will be the check-out date + 7days.
Press CONTINUE to complete the hotel billback with Conferma. A fax is

automatically generated to the hotel and your reservation is confirmed. Remember
to end and retrieve your booking to ensure the reservation is received by the hotel
vendor.
The message that the fax has been automatically queued, after end transaction is
displayed as part of the itinerary remarks. This remark takes approximately 5
minutes after end transaction to appear on the PNR.
Sell response screen:
PF- indicates the additional Payment Options, in this example Breakfast

and Food and Beverage charges.
PI-CF. Payment Reference Number (Conferma deployment number)
SN- Agent -email address
FN- Hotel Fax number
PL- Shows the card limit in this example it is auto calculated with the
amount from the rate rules.
CI- Card Pool ID (client name or corporate account code (CAC) as
configured in the onboarding document)
DE - Card Effective dates

32
Conferma – Add a Deployed Card
It is possible to manually deploy cards in the Conferma WebPay product and then
use a manually deployed card in a new booking, instead of generating a new card.
This is achieved by simply adding the Deployment ID to the new booking.
(WebPay is a website provided by Conferma for the deployment and management
of single use cards.)
Conduct your Hotel availability search and rate selection as usual.
In the sell screen select the appropriate payment type for the booking: Guarantee,
Deposit or Pre-payment. In the Payment Method Options select
Conferma – Add Deployed Card
The Account ID/ Name must be entered along with the Alternate email address and
the WebPay Deployment ID.
Modify Payment/Send Fax in Conferma segment

You may make modifications to any of the Conferma fields. However, only Payment
details can be modified together. If you attempt to perform modifications to
payment information and other fields, an error message will advise you submit the
changes separately.
Place a tick on “Send Fax” box to amend the fax number.

33
Note that when you select Send Fax, the system disables all other fields.
When sending a fax command, only the Alternate Email Address and Hotel Fax
Number can be modified.
Adjust the Fax number and press CONTINUE.

34
Modifying a Hotel Segment

HELP H@
You have the ability to modify any hotel booked in Travelport Worldspan after you
have ended the PNR.
You can modify a hotel segment to:
 Change check-in/out dates.
 Change guarantee method.
 Change number of guests.
 Add, change, or delete optional fields.
The function identifier to modify a hotel booking is: H@
You can also use Create /Modify PNR and Select Hotel.
If a hotel chain participates in Session Control a modification is handled as a “true
modification” and it is not canceled / rebooked.
For a list of participating chains see HC-SESSION.
If the hotel chain does not participate in Session Control, then a message is
generated to cancel and rebook the hotel using the new information.
Each hotel chain has information in Travelport Worldspan: INFO XXQ (XX- chain
code) INFO XXHSOURCE
Note: Before modifying a hotel segment, view rules and then display hotel
availability to verify that the hotel can accommodate your change.
To view rules from a confirmed hotel segment 1, enter HRS1
To check new availability, select the Hotel Booking Tool from the Reservations
Menu. Enter the new date or dates and the property number from the sold hotel
segment and click CONTINUE.
If the hotel is available, enter H@ followed by the segment number, slash (/) letter
D, followed by the new check-in and check-out dates.
Example: H@2/D14SEP17SEP

35
The following table lists examples of other hotel modifiers.
To modify: Use this format:
Guarantee Method H@3/G-DEPOTH
Change or add supplemental H@2/SI−REQ LOWER

information FLOOR
Number of rooms H@2/N-2 (number of

rooms 2)
Room Type H@2/R-B2DRAC (2 double

beds, RAC rate)
Alternatively, select the Create/Modify PNR icon and select Hotel. The hotel
segment will display in the Smart panel. Select the pencil icon to modify any of the
fields.
Example:
Response:

36
Press More Options
Update the data as required then press CONTINUE.

Review the response to ensure the hotel segment has been modified successfully.
Example:
End the PNR to save the changes.

37
Canceling a Hotel Segment

INFO HCANCEL / HELP HCANCEL
Once you sell a Hotel Source or Direct Access hotel, Travelport Worldspan instantly
sends a message to the hotel participant. The hotel booking is confirmed as soon as
you sell it.
Important: If you ignore the PNR containing a Hotel Source or Direct Access hotel
before ending it, the hotel space is still confirmed.
The function identifier for canceling a hotel booking is: X
To cancel a hotel segment, use the following steps:
1. Enter X followed by the hotel segment number.
Example
X2
Or enter HX to cancel all hotel segments
2. End transaction the PNR.
Note: Response times vary according to the hotel’s participation level.
A Hotel Source participant responds immediately to a cancellation and provides you
with a cancellation number. After you end the PNR, the hotel enters an OSI message
in the PNR that includes the hotel company code, airport or city code, check-in date,
and cancellation number.
Alternatively, select the Create/Modify PNR icon and select Hotel. The hotel
segment will display in the Smart panel. Select the Cancel check box and press
CANCEL to cancel the hotel segment.
Example:
Review the response to ensure the hotel segment has been canceled successfully.
Example:
End the PNR to save the changes.

38
Summary
 Identify and explain hotel participation levels in Travelport
Worldspan
 Use Travelport Worldspan to determine hotel company codes and
names
 Display a hotel list
 Sell hotels in Travelport Worldspan using Travelport Smartpoint and
steps identified in this module
 Modify and cancel hotel segments sold in Travelport Worldspan
 Agency Alerts

39
Module Review
1. What is the format to find the code for Hilton?
2. What is the format to find which hotel is represented by code TL?
3. List the steps to sell a hotel through Worldspan.
4. What would you see if you clicked on the icon in the hotel list display?
5. What assumptions does Worldspan make when requesting hotel availability with an air segment
present in the PNR?
6. What is entry to see Rate Rules from a sold hotel segment?

40

Travelport Worldspan provides a queue system for the management, sorting and
storage of PNRs. The system is similar to an automated filing cabinet containing
PNRs which require handling.
There are System/Reserved Queues with predetermined functions and queues
which your agency can customize for internal use. Queues may be sub-divided
further into Categories, and Date Ranges.
Airlines, car hire companies and hotels send messages concerning the PNRs and
these are placed on the System/Reserved Queues. Additionally, PNRs may be placed
on queue manually from within your office, or if you have Bridge/Branch
relationships set up, from the Bridge/Branch offices.
The queue system allows you to access and exit queues place PNRs on a queue and
perform various maintenance functions on the PNRs.
Module Objectives
 Identify the types of queues and their purpose
 Display the number of PNRs on queue
 Access a queue and explain queue categories and date ranges
 Identify status codes and advice codes
 Work a queue
 Exit a queue
 Place a PNR on a queue
 Access PNR Search
 Determine if End of Queue Marker is activated for you SID.
 Queue Where
 Queue Search
 PNR Search (QROLL)
 Queue Sort
Types of Queues
INFO QUEUES
INFO QNBR
ASK ANSWER ID 14297
ASK ANSWER ID 14312
Worldspan assigns each SID/pseudo city code up to a maximum of 255 queues, plus
1 Message queue, 1 Holding queue for Unable To Contact and Left Messages and 1
World File queue.

1
Some queues are System/Reserved Queues and PNRs are placed on these queues
automatically. They usually contain items such as flight confirmation, waitlist
clearances, and schedule changes. The non-System/Reserved Queues can be
customized for your office needs.
There are two types of queues: Special and Dual. A queue with categories only is a
Special queue. A queue with categories and date ranges is a Dual queue.
Categories
A queue can be compared to a drawer within the filing cabinet, and a category can
be compared to a folder within the drawer.
An example of a category is the Ticketing Queue 9 where each agent in the office
may be assigned their own category number within Q9. The ticketing field entry
controls the placement of the PNR on Q9 with the appropriate category.
The entry: 7TAW/02/10JUN places the PNR on Q9, Category 2 on the date specified.
Every queue must contain at least one category starting from zero (0). More
categories may be activated up to the maximum allowance.
A Special queue (one with categories only) can have a maximum of 165 categories.
Date Ranges
Date ranges can be set up to organize the PNRs by date priority, and for non-
ticketing queues are placed in the date range based on the date of the first flight
segment. Ticketing queues are placed on queue based on the date in the Ticketing
Field. A maximum of 4 date ranges are allowed per category.
A dual queue (one with categories and date ranges) can have a maximum of 75
categories.
System Reserved Queues

System/Reserved Queues may not be used as personal queues as they have pre-
assigned functions and hold messages sent by vendors to your PNRs or reserved for
future use by the system.
The following table lists the main System/Reserved Queues, with their associated
number, and the types of PNRs they contain.

2
Queue Name: Number: Message and PNR Types:

Default 0 If no queue number is specified, or if a specific
queue has not been activated, PNRs placed on
queue will default to Q0.
Confirmations 1 PNRs with HX, KK, KL, UU, UC, UN, US, NO
status codes.
Schedule 7 PNRs with time changes
Change
Ticket Option 8 PNRs with TAX entries
Date (TAX)
Ticket at Will 9 PNRs with TAW entries
(TAW)
PNR Search 86 Used to place PNRs selected by the QR86
search facility. PNRs with specific criteria can
be searched and sent to queue 86.
Online search – maximum 20 searches per
calendar month at no charge. There may be a
charge if the maximum is exceeded – check
with your office manager.
Overnight search – no limit, returned after 3am
the following day.
Update 102 PNRs are placed on Q102 by airlines to notify
Travelport PNR modifications, advance ticket date
Worldspan PNR information, cancellation information and
other changes made by the airline.
For a full list of System/Reserved queues and their function, see: INFO QNBR
Non-System Reserved Queues

If the queue numbers are not listed in INFO QNBR they may be activated within your
agency to be used internally for individual agents or for processes such as quality
checking.
Dupe Suppression
Dupe Suppression inhibits PNRs from being displayed within a queue if the action for
which it was placed on queue has already been performed.
For example, a PNR is created with a TAW option and placed on Q9. If the PNR is
retrieved and the ticket issued, the PNR still remains on Q9 but will be suppressed
from displaying when the queue is accessed.
When checking the queue count it may show that there are PNRs on queue, but
when you access the queue it states: Q EMPTY. This is because of Dupe
Suppression.

3
Up to a maximum of 50 consecutive PNRs may be suppressed at one time. If the

number of consecutive PNRs exceeds 50, the following response is received, and you
must access the queue again: /50 PNRS SUPPRESSED – REPEAT Q ENTRY/.
Data Suppression
Only the data that is needed to complete the handling of a PNR is displayed when a
PNR is accessed on queue. For example, if special meals have been requested and
the airline responds with a KK (confirmed) status, the PNR will be placed on Q1, the
Confirmation queue.
When the queue is accessed the GFAX Field will be visible, but other fields of the
PNR such as the Remarks Field will be suppressed from view and a notification
placed in the ITEMS SUPPRESSED.
Example GFAX with the Remarks Field suppressed:
To view the Remarks Field either click on the link or make the entry: *M
Queue Management
HELP QC
INFO QC
You can manage the work to be done on PNRs by determining the number of queues
that need to be actioned.
Queue Counts display the number of PNRs on queue and depending upon the entry
made, will either display a list of all activated Queues; show the Queues that have
items to be worked, including the Categories and Date Ranges; or display a count for
a specific queue with Categories and Date Ranges.

4
Displaying All Activated Queues

To display a list of all the queues that have been activated for your SID, make the
entry: QCT
Heading: Explanation:
Queue Queue Numbers for those queues which have been activated
for your SID. The Queues are shown in numerical sequence.
The LM and UTC are the delay queues:
LM = Left Message to Call
UTC = Unable to Contact
Queue Total Number of PNRs/messages on specific Queue
Items Worked Items Worked since totals were last reset
Action Items Actions that may be completed using the display:
= Work this Queue

= Move or copy PNRs on queue
= Deactivate the queue and all associated categories.
Note: The Queue must be empty before deactivating it.

5
Displaying Queues with Activity

To display a list of the queues which have PNRs to be worked and the Categories and
Date Ranges either:
Click on the QCT icon at the bottom of the screen
Or make the entry: QCT*ALL
Queue Only the queue numbers with PNRs to be worked are displayed.
The queues are shown in the order of creation rather than
numerical sequence.
Category The default category of 0 displays together with any additional
categories if they have PNRs to be worked. For example, Q30
has PNRs in C0 and C2. There are no PNRs in C1 as this specific
category has not been included in the display.
Category Name Categories may be labelled with a category name. If no label has
been created the column will be blank.
Date Ranges If date ranges have been activated for a specific queue and there
are items to be worked, the date range appears in the column.
For example, Q1 has PNRs in D4. There are no PNRs in D1, D2 or
D3.
Queue Total Number of PNRs/messages on specific queue, category and date
range.
Items Worked Items Worked since totals were last reset.
= Work this Queue

6
Displaying Specific Queue Details

To determine if a specific queue has category and date ranges set up, or to check if a
label has been attached to a queue you can display the specific Queue Detail by
making the following entries:
Entry: Explanation:
QC Defaults to Q1, Category 0, Date Range 1
QC/9 Specific queue, defaults to category 0, date range 1
QC/9*C3 Specific queue, specific category, defaults to date range 1
QC/1*C4*D3 Specific queue, specific category, specific date range
QC/8*ALL All active categories and date ranges with PNRs to be worked
QC/8*ALL-A All categories and date ranges with or without PNRs to be
worked
Example response for entry: QC/30*ALL-A
Queue Label Queue name which can be assigned to a specific category.
Date Range On Dual Queues the date range column appears with the
dates that have been assigned for the queue.
Category If additional categories have been set up the category
numbers appear in this column.
Date Range Number The date range numbers 1 through to 4.
Queue Total The number of PNRs on the specific category and date range.
= Work this Queue

7
Queue Monitoring
To help you manage your queues you can select specific queues, categories and date
ranges to be monitored throughout the day. When a queue has been selected, a
notification appears at the bottom of the screen to advise you the number of PNRs
on the specific queue.
The Queue icons are located at the bottom of the Smartpoint window. To set up
your Queue Monitoring click on QSETUP
The response allows up to 10 different queues, categories and date ranges to be

monitored.
SID Add the SID if you monitor multiple SIDs.
Queue Number Add the specific queue number you wish to monitor
Category Number Add the specific category number you wish to monitor
Date Range If date ranges have been set up on the queue, select the date
range from the drop-down menu.
Nick Name If required, you can assign a Nick Name up to a maximum of 10
characters. If this is left blank, the system will assign the name
as Queue Number, Category and if selected, the Date Range.
For example, Q1C3 or Q1C3D4.

8
Example of completed Queue Monitoring screen:
To remove a Queue from the setup, add a check mark in the box next to the Nick
Name and click on the Clear All icon (the trashcan) at the top right-hand side of the
screen.
To remove all Queues from the setup, add a check mark in the Select All box at the
top of the screen, and click on the Clear All icon.
The Queue Monitoring interval may be set for 15; 20; 30; or 60 minutes. The system
will perform queue counts based on the designated time of the interval.
Once you have selected the Queues to monitor, click on Save. The QSETUP screen
will close automatically and the queues that were set up appear at the bottom of
screen:
The selected queues show the Nick Name if created, or if not created the system will
assign the name based on the queue number, category and if selected, the date
range. In our example Q1 with Category 0 was set up with no date range or nick
name, so the system has assigned the name Q1C0.
The number in the red box indicates the total number of PNRs in this queue.

9
Displaying a List of PNRs on Specific Queue

There are two ways to display a list of the PNRs on queue
 Queue Monitoring buttons
 Queue count displays
List of PNRs using Queue Monitoring Buttons

Once you have set up Queue Monitoring, you can display a list of PNRs on the
specific queue by clicking on the red box next to the Queue Name. The name box
changes to blue and a list of PNRs with the record locator and passenger name
displays.
If there are too many records to show on this display, a link will appear at the
bottom of list advising ‘More PNRs’. Clicking on the link displays the next PNRs on
the list.
Clicking on a record locator and name will display the PNR in the Smartpoint
Window and the PNR Viewer, but will not access the Queue.
List of PNRs using Queue Count Displays

When you display queue counts using the entries QCT or QCT*ALL, the responses
includes the Queue Number column. Clicking on a queue number displays a list of
PNRs on that specific queue.
The response includes a warning indicating that if you display a PNR by clicking on
the record locator the PNR will be retrieved but away from the queue.

10
Accessing a Queue
HELP Q/
INFO Q/
Queues must be monitored frequently to check if any messages have been received
from an airline or vendor. Those queues which have been set up in Queue
Monitoring will be visible on the screen, other queues should be monitored
manually by frequently checking the Queue Count.
If a specific queue has PNRs to be worked then you must access the queue and work
the PNRs. When a queue is accessed, additional buttons appear in the PNR Viewer
to assist you with working the queue.
For these queue buttons to be visible you must have the PNR Viewer selected when
you access the queue. If you have the Smart Panel or History Tab open when the
queue is accessed, the buttons do not appear in PNR Viewer.
Access Queue Arrow

In many of the queue screen responses you will see an arrow. This is the link to
access a queue. The first one we will look at is the QCT button at the bottom of the
screen. The QCT button performs the entry: QCT*ALL
Click on the QCT button to display a list of queues, categories and date ranges that
have activity.
The arrows at the end of each line access the specific queue, category and date
range. When you hover over the arrow, the arrow turns blue, and a tool tip appears
advising that you are going to Work this queue followed by the queue number,
category and date range.
Click on the arrow to access the queue:

11
You may also access a queue from the list of PNRs displayed using the Arrow in the
Queue Monitoring button or the Arrow from the queue count displays:
Access a Queue
When a queue is accessed, the first PNR in the queue is launched in the Smartpoint
Window and the PNR Viewer:
The Smartpoint Window response:
Clicking on the link “All Active Queues” at the top of the screen redisplays the queue
count list. Following “All Active Queues” is the manual entry used to access Q1,
category 0, and date range 2: Q/1*C0*D2
The headerline for the PNR specifies the queue title; CONFOS (confirmations) and
the optional label MEAL ETC which has been created for category 0
In the GFAX area you can see items 1 and 2 are confirmation of a vegetarian meal
request:

12
Item: Explanation:
G GFAX field
1 Item number within

the GFAX
SSR Special Service

Request
VGML Code for vegetarian

meal
UA Airline code
KK1 Confirming one item
IADLHR Origin and destination
0918Q12JAN Flight details, booking

code and date
1.1 Applies to Name Field

1, passenger 1

13
The PNR Viewer response:
As the PNR Viewer was open when the queue was accessed, the additional queue
buttons appear to assist you in working the queue.
Button: Explanation:
QR Queue Remove PNR
QX#I Queue Exit and Ignore PNR
QX#QR Queue Exit and Queue Remove PNR
EWR End, Work segments and Redisplay PNR
QRD Queue Remove Dupe PNRs
EWGR End, Work segments, and GFAX items and
Redisplay PNR
Move/Copy Move or Copy PNR
Remove Non Active Remove any PNRs from the queue.
PNRS Performs the entry QRD as above

14
Working PNRs on Queue

When a queue has been accessed you can:
 Change segment status and update advice codes in the PNR
 End Transact the PNR
 Ignore the PNR
 Remove the PNR from queue
 Place the PNR on another queue
 Exit the queue
Status Codes and Advice Codes

HELP ACTIONC
HELP CSS
HELP 3@
Airline and vendors use advice codes to advise you of changes in the status of a
segment or SSR item in the GFAX field. The status code indicates whether a segment
or SSR is confirmed, waitlisted, or on request.
When you receive an advice from an airline or vendor you should advise your
customer of the change and update the PNR to show the status of the flight and SSR
item.
The following is a list of codes and required action.
Advice Definition: Change to Status

Code: Code:
KK Confirmed from request HK
KL Confirmed from waitlist HK
NO No action taken XK
TK Schedule change on a confirmed HK
flight.
TL Schedule change on a waitlisted HL
flight
TN Schedule change on a requested HN
flight
UC Unable to confirm flight closed XK
UN Unable to confirm, flight not XK
operating
US Unable to accept sale, flight HL
waitlisted
UU Unable to confirm, flight
waitlisted

15
Updating Advice Codes

When you have advised your customer of relevant changes, the advice code must be
updated in the PNR. You can either use the Queue Buttons EWR and EWGR or use
manual entries.
Manual Flight Changes

Advice codes which advise of a change of flight status may be updated with the
following entries:
Advice Code: Change to Status Code: Entry:

KK – confirming Change flight segment 1 to HK .1HK
reservation
KL – confirming from Change flight segment 5 to HK .5HK
waitlist
TL – waitlisted, Change flight segment 3 to HL .3HL
advising new flight
times
UU – unable, have Change flight segment 4 to HL .4HL
waitlisted
Manual SSR Item Changes

Advice codes which advise you of a change of status for an SSR item may be updated
with the following entries:
Entry:
Advice Code: Change to Status Code:
32.HK
KK – confirming SSR Change status of SSR item 2 to
HK
31-4.HK
KK – confirming Change status of SSR items 1
multiple SSR items through to 4 to HK
Ending Transaction
When you access a PNR on queue and make any changes to the booking you must
save the changes by ending the transaction.
The PNR will be removed from the queue and the next PNR on queue will be
displayed.
If you save the changes and redisplay the PNR using the entry ER the PNR will be
redisplayed and you can either make additional changes and end transaction or
ignore the PNR.
Note: Make sure that all “work” has been done on the PNR before ending
transaction. If you end the transaction the PNR will end without any advisory
message to alert you that there are items still to be updated.

16
In addition to the Queue Buttons EWR and EWGR which are displayed in the PNR
Viewer there are additional manual entries to update the PNR advice codes and end
the transaction. Depending upon the entry used, the PNR may be removed from the
queue or redisplayed in queue:
Explanation: Entry:
End transaction and work flight segments. PNR is EW
removed from the queue and the next PNR on
queue displays
End transaction and work flight segments and EWR
redisplay the PNR in queue
End transaction and work flight segments, and the EWG
GFAX items. PNR is removed from the queue and
the next PNR on queue displays
End transaction and work flight segments, and the EWGR
GFAX items and redisplay the PNR in queue
Ignoring the PNR on Queue

When working on a queue you can Ignore PNR and Redisplay or Ignore the PNR.
Ignore PNR and Redisplay

To ignore and redisplay a PNR, enter: IR
Any changes made to the PNR will be ignored and the original PNR redisplayed.
Ignore PNR
To Ignore a PNR enter: I
The ignored PNR will be returned to the bottom of the same queue, category and
date range.
Removing PNRS from a Queue

HELP QR
If a queue is a Dupe Suppression queue, PNRs will be inhibited from displaying if the
reason why it was place on queue has been actioned already. When you access the
queue, it will remove the Dupe Suppressed PNRs.
On non-Dupe Suppression queues, PNRs are not removed automatically by the
system and will remain on queue. When working the non-Dupe Suppressed queues,
PNRs may display which require no updates as the required changes have been
actioned already.
These PNRs must be removed from the queue by either the QR Queue Button or by
making the manual entry: QR

17
Note: Before using the QR function check that the PNR does not require updating. If
you QR the transaction the PNR will be removed from the queue and no advisory
message to alert you that there are items to be updated is received.
In many cases a PNR may appear on the same queue more than once. For example,
you have an itinerary with multiple airlines and have requested a special meal on all
flights. As each airline returns their response the PNR is placed on Q1, the
Confirmation Queue.
After accessing Q1 you may Queue Remove Duplicates by either the QRD Queue
Button or by making the entry: QRD
Exiting a Queue
HELP QX
When all PNRs on a queue have been worked and ended, or queue removed, the
queue will be exited automatically.
If the last PNR was ended the response is:
WE SPAN THE WORLD/ followed by the PNR Locator.
If the last PNR was Queue Removed (QR) the response is:
OFF Q
To stop working a queue when there are still PNRs to be actioned, you must Queue
Exit. There are multiple entries to exit a queue and the most frequently used are
included in the Queue Buttons:
You may also make the manual entries to exit the queues:
Explanation: Entry:
Queue Exit and remain in the current PNR QX
Queue Exit and Ignore the current PNR. The PNR QX#I
will be placed at the bottom of the queue in the
same category and date range
Queue Exit and End Transact the current PNR to QX#E
save changes
Queue Exit and Queue Remove the current PNR QX#QR

18
Queue Placement
HELP QEP
In addition to airlines and vendors placing PNRs on queue, you may manually place a
PNR on a queue including the System Queues.
The function identifier to place a PNR on queue is: QEP
When QEP entries are made the system automatically End Transacts the PNR and
places it on the designated queue.
Queue Placement can be done away from a queue or while working on a queue.
The system assumes queue placement to:
 Your own Agency SID, if another SID is not specified in the queue placement
entry
 Queue 0, if the queue is not specified in the queue placement entry
 Category 0, if the category is not specified in the queue placement entry
Placing a PNR on Queue

You may place a PNR on a queue in your own office or at a bridge/branch location if
the Bridge/Branch Table allows the QEP function:
To place a PNR on a queue, display the booking and enter QEP followed by a slash (/)
and the queue number.
Example: QEP/30
The system response is the Record Locator followed by the queue number and
category. If a category is not specified in the entry the system, it defaults to C0.
Example response:
To place a PNR on a queue at a branch location, display the PNR and enter QEP
followed by a slash (/), branch location SID and the queue number.
Example: QEP/IKM/30
If you attempt to queue a PNR to a queue number or category which has not been
activated a response is received advising the queue is invalid.
Example: Q25 has not been activated. The response to the entry QEP/25 advises
that the queue or category is invalid, and you must either use the correct
queue/category or ignore. The PNR will still be active and may be redisplayed using
the entry *R

19
Placing a PNR on Queue While Working a Queue

There may be times when working a queue that you wish to place the PNR in
another queue.
To do this you can use the manual entries shown above or use the Move/Copy
Queue button.
For example, you are working on Q1, date range 4 and wish to move a PNR to Q/30,
category 1.
Clicking the Move/Copy button displays a Webpage Dialog box where you can
specify the queue on which you wish to place the PNR.
Example of completed Move Items in a Queue:
Click on Move to place the PNR on Q30, category 1 and remove it from the queue
you are working.
The Copy button allows you to do multiple queue placements. Clicking on the Plus
button displays another line allowing you to add multiple queue numbers and
categories. When you click on Copy, the PNR is removed from the current queue
and placed in the multiple queues selected.

20
End of Queue Markers

HELP QD/
INFO EOQM
Queues in Travelport Worldspan work in a continuous loop. Your office may have
the End of Queue Marker activated which indicates when you have reached the end
of a queue. If the End of Queue Marker has not been activated, the first booking
remaining on queue will be redisplayed.
The activation is a one-time only entry and applies to all CRTs and work areas
associated to a specific SID. Once activated only the Help Desk are able to
deactivate.
To check whether your SID has End Of Queue Marker activated, make the entry:
Q*EOQM
The response advises if the End Of Queue Marker is active or not active followed by
the SID you are checking.
If End Of Queue Marker has been activated in your SID, when you access a queue,
the system adds an invisible marker to the last PNR on the queue. Once this PNR
has been worked you may receive the response advising OFF QUEUE which indicates
that no more PNRs were added to the queues since you accessed it.
If PNRs have been added to the queue, either new PNRs or those you ignored and
placed at the end of the queue, the response is:
To return to the queue and reset the End Of Queue Marker, click the link or make
the entry: QNP
The next added or ignored PNR displays and the process starts again.

21
Queue Where
HELP QWHERE
INFO QWHERE
Queue Where displays the queue(s) where a PNR resides. The display includes the
queue details such as the SID, the Queue number with the Category number and
Date Rate if applicable.
The PNR must be active in a work area when the Queue entry is made.
Enter: QW
Response:
Queue Search
INFO QSQ
Queue Search allows you to search a chosen queue for specific criteria in a PNR and
place those PNRs on a designated queue.
A maximum of 999 PNRs can be moved in one input. Once moved, the queue they
are placed on needs to be accessed in order to look at each PNR. The PNRs on the
designated queue can be worked using the usual queue process.
A fill-in-format /FIF/ screen is used to search a specified queue for specific
Entry: To display the FIF, enter: QSQ

22
The SID will default to your SID unless another one is specified in the Office Field
The FIF must include:
A queue number to search
A queue placement number
At least one other field from the search criteria
For an explanation of the fill-in-format see: INFO QSQ
PNR Search (QROLL)

HELP QR86
HELP QROLL
INFO QR86
PNR Search is a request to queue selected PNRs or all PNRs for a specified agency,
bridge or branch location based on search criteria entered in the PNR Search
template.
In the Smartscreen either type QR86 or #QROLL and the PNR Search template
displays in the Smart Panel.
The template can also be displayed by selecting the PNR Search option in the Smart
Tools menu.

23
The PNR Search template appears in the Smart Panel:
You can use a record search to retrieve and examine a certain group of PNRs. All
PNRs matching the criteria requested in the search are placed on your agency's
queue 86.
Note: If queue 86 is not activated, PNRS will be placed on Queue 0.
Online PNR search
Selected PNRs will be returned to queue 86 of the requesting location within
two hours.
Overnight PNR AIR/AUX searches
Selected PNRs will be returned to queue 86 of the requesting location or
specified location after 0300 on the night of the request.
Flight options – search by flight number, departure/arrival airport
Ticketing options – Search for ticketed/unticketed PNRs
Other options – search to include hotel, car and auxiliary items
Worldgroup Options – search to include Worldgroup options
For example, selecting Flight options will give you the option to search for
PNRs which have a particular flight number, class or a departure/arrival
airport.

24
Hover over each of the boxes for a prompt advising you of the data to be
populated.
QSORT
QSORT is a method for “sorting” queues based on your agent sign
information.
Select the PNR Viewer and the QSORT icon is located at the top of the
screen:
I
Selecting the QSORT icon displays a fill in format where you can add the
name of the queue categories and your agent sign information.
Selecting QSORT for the first time will launch the QSORT set-up script,
clicking thereafter will start the QSORT function.

25
Summary
 Identify the types of queues and their purpose.
 Display the number of PNRs on queue using Queue Count
 Access PNRs in a queue and explain queue categories and date ranges
 Identify status codes and advice codes
 Work a queue
 Exit a queue
 Place PNRs on queue
 Determine if End of Queue Marker is activated for you SID.
 Queue Where
 Queue Search
 PNR Search (QROLL)
 Queue Sort

26
There are several ways of troubleshooting customer problems and getting on line
help.
Module Objectives
 Display PNR history
 Get help from Travelport
 Access Travelport Training Services
PNR History
HELP HISTORY
PNR history is the programmatic recording of the events taking place during the
“life” of a PNR in a GDS.
A complete PNR, as it is stored in the processor consists of two main elements –
current and historical. The information displayed on retrieval is considered the
current element and reflects the most up-to-date reservation information. The
historical element is that portion which captures all past date data and is viewed
only on request.
The history of a PNR contains a record of the initial PNR creation as well as all
modifications (manual and programmatic) that were made since that creation. This
record includes schedule changes, queuing actions and other generated messages.
Creation and development of history is accomplished programmatically within the
processor. It cannot be created manually, erased or replaced. After a transaction is
complete (End Transact) new history data is written to the PNR.
A history code is assigned to identify each item stored in history
As each modification is recorded in history, a credit line will precede those history
items and will include information about the source of the change, i.e. when, where
and by whom the change was made.
PNRs created in Europe are purged from the Worldspan system 72 hours after the
completion of the last segment. All other PNRs are purged 30 days after the last
flown segment. The PNR can only be retrieved by name during this time. The purge
date in the history will always show the date of the last segment. PNR data may be
obtained by an agency for 11 months by use of the Past Date script for more
information see HELP PASTDATE.

1
PNR history does not contain:

 ARNK segments
 Added phone fields (only changed or deleted phones)
 Original PNR elements if never changed
Sometimes a PNR is split or divided from another. The split PNR will not carry any of
the past history.
The only history element retained for this new PNR is the original creation date,
agent and duty sign.
How to Read PNR History

The function identifier to display PNR history is: *H or click the history icon in the
PNR Viewer panel
Enhanced Display
The default is to display with the Enhanced display.

This display is user friendly and reduces the need for the use of codes.

2
Historical data is cumulative and is always added at the top of the displayed history.
Start at the bottom and work up. This way you can see the information from the
creation to its current state.
When a PNR is first created, initial historical data is added along with a 1P source, a
purge date and the date of creation. Each subsequent transaction is then added,
always preceded by a Received line. The first four lines of history are part of the
original transaction and will remain at the top of all history data.
The balance of the history will vary according to the number and type of
transactions on the PNR.
One important note is that a single Received source line will always precede the
action for each and every transaction in history. This will always be the first two
lines of each new history element.
Each action is preceded with the date and time the action was ended followed by
the action including the code for example AD – Added record locator (AD)
Types of History
Another method of reading the history is to select the specific type of history
required by dropping down the Type of History menu. The default is to display *H
All History.
Type of History is a useful method used to target the display. If you are only
interested in viewing SSR details, select SSR Items *HG from the drop-down menu.
All History items displayed are related to SSR actions.

3
Standard Display
If you prefer the coded view you will need to select Standard Display
The Travelport Worldspan system adds the credit line R-1P P/ followed by the date
of the last segment which is the purge date, the SID, the sign on and date and time
of creation.
The next section is actually the last transaction to take place in the booking, the lines
are preceded with code XS and XG this is the code for cancelled segment and
cancelled SSR item.
When the segment was cancelled the SSR item was also cancelled. The credit line R-
P indicates that this line was added in SID IDQ by agent W1 on 21 Sep at 0948.

4
The last section which has the most lines all start with AG which indicate SSR items,
however the credit line R- appears to have come from MUC RM 1A .
British Airways is hosted by Amadeus, and as the Travelport Worldspan system
ended and retrieved the booking, it is handed off to Amadeus (1A) who confirm the
segments and return the Vendor locator.
This is returned from a robotic within Amadeus with the line: R-MUCRM1A24043825
CR-MUC RM 1A 21SEP15 0839 the second line has the code AD adding a direct
response from BA and adding the vendor locator indicating that the server set
address is set at Munich and the time the Vendor locator (3EXMBY) was returned.
The AG lines are all messages from the airline advising ticket deadline and warning
that booking will be cancelled if you do not meet the deadline.
History Codes
ASK Answer ID 15838
HELP *HISTC
When you display PNR history, the most current history is at the top of the display.
PNR history codes precede each line of history except the R-P credit line.
These codes describe segment history and customer information history. All history
codes starting with A reflect an addition (of a segment etc.), while history codes
starting with X reflect a cancellation/deletion.
Codes can be found in HELP*HISTC.

5
The following table lists history codes that appear frequently.
History code: Translation:
XQ Stored Fare change or deleted
AS Added segment
XS Canceled segment
SC Status Change (schedule change or segment

status change)
AD Added Direct Response (Airline Locator)
XT Ticketing field change
QP Queue Placement
QR Removed from Queue
AG Added SSR remark
AZ Added Unique 5.Z remarks
Selective History Display

Help*HPARTS
The most helpful shortcut in reading history is the use of the selected display
formats. Instead of always looking at the entire history of a PNR (*H), you may
select certain parts of history to view.
When you use one of these shortcut formats, the associated R-P- source line will be
displayed below the item.
Note: If preferred, the history may be displayed with the credit lines numbered, by
adding #NUM to each entry. For example: *H#NUM

6
Some of the more frequently used select displays are:
History code: Indicates:
*HF History of itinerary air segments only
*HC History of car changes
*HH History of hotel changes
*HQ History of queues
*H$ History of filed fare
*HS History or seat data
Example Entry: *HDR – History of Special service remarks
Example Entry: *HAD – History of addition of Airline Vendor locator

7
Example Entry *HQ - History of the queue
Need Help with Travelport Worldspan?

There are several options for you to get answers to your Travelport Worldspan
questions. These options include:
 MyTravelport
 Check Travelport Worldspan Product Advisories
 Contact the Help Desk
MyTravelport
MyTravelport is an intelligent knowledge base using industry- leading customer
interaction technology of questions and answers that you can use to learn about
Travelport products, procedures, and business processes.
For a detailed instruction on how to access and use this tool, please refer to Module
1: Getting Started.
Check Travelport Worldspan Product Advisories

Product Advisories are published to advise functional and technical changes to
Travelport products.
To display a list of Product Advisories on a specific topic for example, SSR codes, add
the topic in the Search field and select SEARCH KNOWLEDGE BASE.
Once the answers are on the screen, select Product/Developer Advisories to display
a list of advisories on that topic.

8
If you want to check on all Product Advisories, select the Support link at the top of
the screen and select Travelport Advisories:
You can now search for non-specific Product Advisories using the Date Range and
specifying that you want to view Product Advisories.

9
Contact the Help Desk

Your agency SID has a unique customer identification Number (CIDB), and you will
need this number if you contact your local helpdesk.
To find your CIDB number, in Travelport Worldspan, click on Settings Drop down
Menu. Select System, and the Customer number is displayed.

10
Travelport Training Services

You have learned the basics of Travelport Worldspan in this course, but there’s a lot
more to learn. Travelport Training Services offers the following types of training to
help you improve your skills.
 Self-paced tutorials – Take these tutorials anytime and anywhere to learn
about basic Worldspan tasks. You just need an internet connection.
 Instructor-led virtual training – Take a variety of classes scheduled
throughout the workweek with a Worldspan trainer who is happy to answer
your questions.
Note: Cancellation charges may apply.
 Recorded demonstrations – Play these demos on the basic tasks and
procedures you need to do your job.
 Classroom training – Attend these classes in person. They include intensive
classes for agents new to Worldspan, as well as classes on advanced
products.
Note: There is a daily fee to attend classroom training. Cancellation

charges may apply.
To access Travelport Training Services and register for these classes, on the Home
page scroll down to My shortcuts and choose Travelport MyLearning from the list.
Summary
In this module, you have learned how to:
 Display PNR history
 Get help from Travelport

11
 Access Travelport Training Services

12
Module Review
1. Name three subjects that will NEVER be in the history?
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
2. History remarks can be created manually?
True/False_____________________________________________________________
3. How do I find my CIDB number?
_____________________________________________________________________
4. The following history codes show which information:
Hint: you may need to look at the HELP *HISTC
a. AS ____________________
b. AG ____________________
c. XS_____________________
d. SC ______________________
e. H$ _________________________

13
Module 16: Time Savers
Travelport Worldspan has time saving features that help you do your job more
efficiently. You can use them to increase office productivity and improve customer
service.
Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module you will be able to use Travelport Worldspan to:
 Build PNRs using shortcuts
 Claim a PNR
 Build passive segments
 Access miscellaneous time savers to view:
 Local time
 Flight schedules
 Access advanced Travelport Worldspan products:
 Agency Private Fares™
 World File Edits
 Access Macros, ScriptPro and other tools

1
Module 16: Timesavers
Shortcuts for Building PNRs

Travelport Worldspan has several shortcuts to create PNRs quickly. You can clone a
PNR to create a new one. You can also divide a PNR to create two new PNRs.
Clone a PNR
HELP EC
ASK Answer ID 15837
You can create a new PNR based on the segments or customer information in a PNR
you have retrieved. Cloning a PNR creates the same itinerary or the same customer
information for a new PNR.
Clone itinerary
Cloning itinerary segments is especially helpful when you have a booking and
another person needs the same itinerary. To copy only the itinerary for the same
dates and same number in party, use the End and Clone itinerary format: EC
Only the itinerary is copied from the original PNR.
Note: If some flights are not available the response 'COPY COMPLETE CHECK
SEGMENT STATUS' will be displayed. Check the PNR carefully to look for any
unconfirmed flights.
Add customer data, complete the new PNR as required and End Transaction.
Use the formats in the following table to clone specific segments and different
number in the party for the new booking.
To End and Clone Use this format:

EC
All itinerary segments
EC2
All itinerary segments for 2 people
ECX2/3
Itinerary segments except segment 2 and 3
ECIA
Only air itinerary segments
ECW1
All itinerary for 1 week later
Clone PNR Data

Cloning PNR data creates a new booking for the same customer who needs a new
itinerary. Name, phone fields and remarks are copied from the original PNR.
Note: The ticketing field and form of payment are not copied into the new PNR.

2
You can clone all or specific customer data using the following formats:
To End and Clone Use this format:
All data, all segments, same dates All EC*A

itinerary segments
(see note below)
EC*A/FP
Customer information and form of payment,
same dates
ECXI#*A/FP
All PNR fields including form of payment,
without itinerary
The system stores the original booking and displays the new booking with the data
cloned from the original booking.
Note: When you save the PNR with the itinerary and name unchanged, the system
will create a dupe which is an improper booking practice. You would probably want
to cancel (X1-2) the flight segments and book an alternative itinerary for the
passenger.
Complete the new PNR as required and End Transaction.
Dividing a Booking
HELP DIVIDE
ASK Answer ID 12080
Certain customers booked in the same PNR may need to change plans. You can
divide a PNR to rebook those customers.
In order to be divided, a booking must contain valid air segments. Existing car and
hotel segments remain with the original booking. If you need to amend existing
segments or add new car, hotel or air segments for the new booking, add them
before Filing the PNR.
The function identifier to divide a booking is: D
The function identifier to file a booking is: F
To divide a booking use the following steps:
1. Retrieve the booking and enter D followed by the passenger number
of the customer to be divided out.
Example, to divide out passenger 1, enter: D1
Travelport Worldspan adjusts the number of seats in the original PNR
and creates a new booking for the customer you have divided out.
A remark item is automatically created, advising the date and time of
the divide action, and direct response of the original PNR.
2. Make the necessary changes to the displayed PNR.
3. File the PNR, enter: F

3
Travelport Worldspan displays the original booking with the adjusted

number of seats.
4. Make any necessary changes to the displayed PNR.
5. End Transaction, enter: E
Note: ER will NOT work on a divided PNR
On End Transaction the two Travelport Worldspan locators will display. The first one
is the original locator and remains with the un-divided passenger. The second
locator is that of the newly divided booking.
A remark is also added into the original PNR with the locator of the divided PNR.
Divide Results
When dividing a PNR, it is important to be aware of the following:
 If a divide is made without changes to the itinerary the larger airlines may
process the divide request. Many smaller airlines will ignore the divide
process. Check with each airline before initiating a divide.
 All passenger data items except for non-applicable SSR name select items
appear in the divided PNR. You must delete or change those items e.g.
phone field which do not pertain to the divided PNR.
 Previous flight history is not transferred to a divided PNR.
 Non-airline/auxiliary segments will not appear in the divided PNR.
Claiming a Booking
INFO CLAIM
HELP CLAIMxx
(xx = airline code)
ASK Answer ID 44373
A customer may reserve flights directly with an airline and want you to issue the
ticket. How you issue the ticket depends on whether the airline permits you to
claim their bookings through Travelport Worldspan. To check whether or not an
airline is a claim participant in Travelport Worldspan, refer to INFO CLAIM or Ask
Travelport Answer ID 44373.
Claim PNR allows you to issue a ticket when the airline has made the original
booking.
The claim entry enables you to take ownership of an airline’s PNR. Claim can also be
used for Group PNR ticket issue.
The airline must enter an authority into the PNR before you are able to claim it.
Note: If your customer has flown the first segment of the booking, you cannot claim
the booking.
Note: Airlines may have specific requirements therefore always check INFO CLAIMxx
(xx = airline code) for individual airline requirements.

4
Claim Process
When you need to claim a booking from a participating airline to issue a ticket, you
need to first retrieve the PNR using a Direct Access entry.
PNRs may be retrieved using the source airline's record locator or flight, date and
name. Use airport codes in your entry. Refer to the following example for Delta
Airlines (DL).
Retrieval by Record Locator
Example entry: @DL@*RKH1M3
Retrieval by flight, date and name
Example entry: @DL@*DL292/8FEBDFW-SMITH/JOE
Retrieval by flight that is waitlisted, date and name
Example entry: @DL@*WLDL110/1AUGATL-HART/JIM
Now claim the PNR by entering @DL@*CLM or @*CLM
When the Claim entry is made, Delta generates a Transfer Control Response (TCR)
message to Travelport Worldspan. The Travelport Worldspan system creates the
PNR, and automatically displays it to your screen. Since the original DL owned PNR is
ignored when it is claimed, it cannot be redisplayed. Take care, as a claim cannot be
reversed.
The response is the completed, retrieved Travelport Worldspan PNR with the new
Worldspan record locator.
Note: The phone field is updated from the information in the agency’s level one
World File. If the number is not stored in the World File the phone number is
updated with the SID followed by *CLAIMED PNR*.
End Transaction is not required to complete the process.
Note: Airlines may have different restrictions as to whether the PNR can be claimed.
The following PNRs are not eligible for claim for Delta Airlines:
 PNRs eligible for e-ticketing
 PNRs with flown segments
 Non air PNRs
 Past date PNRs
 Teletype created PNRs
 PNRs belonging to another agency
 Ticketed PNRs
 PNRs with E class of service
For all other airlines restrictions refer to INFO CLAIM.

5
Building Passive Segments

ASK Answer ID 12050
When a flight has been booked directly with the airline, and you would like to issue
the ticket, first check if the airline is a Claim PNR participant. If they are follow the
steps in the previous section. If the airline is not a Claim PNR participant, you can
build a booking with passive segments in Travelport Worldspan in order to issue the
ticket.
The status code of a passive flight segment is MK
Refer to the following availability display:
To sell a passive segment add @MK to the sell entry.

Example entry: 01Y1@MK
Response:
If the airline is a claim PNR participant you will receive a response such as: **LH IS A
CLAIM PNR PARTICIPANT - TO CLAIM - IGN AND ENTER @LH@*FLT NBR/DATE
BOARD POINT-NAME AND THEN ENTER @*CLM
You can also use the long sell entry, appending MKx@ (x = number of seats):
Example entry: 0UA1793Q16AUGMCIDENMK2@

6
The airline's record locator/acknowledgement is required in the booking in order to

issue an e-ticket. You may also wish to advise the client of the airline record locator.
You may need to add the airline/carrier record locator manually into the Vendor
Locator area of the booking if:
 A booking with live air segments is not updated by the airline
 Tickets need to be issued in a booking with passive air segments
Contact the airline for the locator and enter it in the booking.
Example entry: .1A/HDQxxJAMJAU (xx=airline code)

Refer to INFO OAL RLOC for airline specific detail when adding an airline’s record
locator.
Miscellaneous Time Savers

Travelport Worldspan provides several useful features to save you time. The most
frequently used time savers display:
 Local time
 Flight schedules
 Inflight service information
Displaying Local Time

HELP KCD
ASK Answer ID
The function identifier to display local time is: KCD
To display local time, enter KCD* followed by the city or airport code.
Example entry: KCD*NYC
The local time for the city or airport code is displayed.
To check the time difference between two cities, append the two cities or airport
codes.
Example entry: KCD*NYC/BKK
Note: To check local time for your Subscriber ID enter KCD followed by your SID
Displaying Flight Information using Schedules

HELP SCHEDULES
Schedule displays show you the day of the week a flight operates. It can be
particularly useful when planning a client’s itinerary, or to check if a direct flight
operates on a route or date.
The function identifier to display flight schedules is: S

7
The following table lists frequently used flight information formats.
To request flight information: Use this format:
For a specific date and time S15MAYCHIMIA4P
For a specific carrier S15MAYMCIATL4P-DL
Return schedule display S/R
Schedule display for 30 days S#12MAYLONSCL

from entered date. (direct and
connecting)
Advanced Worldspan Products

Advanced Travelport Worldspan products can help you do your job more efficiently,
increase office productivity, and improve customer service.
The advanced Travelport Worldspan products are:
 Agency Private Fares
Agency Private Fares (APF)
Agency Private Fares provides travel agents and consolidators the means to
maintain their contracts of private, negotiated fares.
After contracts have been loaded into Agency Private Fares, the fares are available
to integrate with public fares and airline filed private fares for fare display, quote
and shopping.
Contracts are maintained using the APF application located at
https://www.agencyprivatefares.galileo.com/login.do.
The following table lists the features and benefits of Agency Private Fares.
Feature: Benefit:
Integrated Combines private and published fares for pricing or

fares tariff display.
Secured data Provides customized access with host database

control.
Improved Eliminates pricing records, extra ticket entries and

productivity cumbersome paper or Client File based reference
sources.

8
World File Edits

HELP WF ETE
INFO WF ETE
ASK Answer ID 23098
World File Edits is a point of sale quality control tool which provides a check for data
accuracy at end transaction and/or ticketing.
Instructions are stored in a template attached to a World File. These stored
instructions ensure required fields and information are included in a PNR prior to
End Transaction and/or ticketing.
Macros
Ask Answer ID
Macros record sequences of keystrokes, allowing frequently used inputs to be made
quickly and accurately by pressing the play back keystroke combination, or by right
clicking the mouse over the res windows to display a playback list.
Creating Macros
To create Macros you need to access the Macro Editor via the Settings menu.

9
Screen explanation:
Open a macro
Record a macro
Stop recording mode
Playback the macro
Save the macro
Specify keys to run macro
Make your office’s macros available

on your computer
Take the following steps to create macro for your Sine-in.

1. From the Macro Editor screen click the Record button.
2. Type the sine-in entry. Enter: BSIA1234PM/GS/SE11CARS
3. Click the Stop button to stop recording.
4. Click Playback to make sure you captured the entry correctly.
5. Click Save to save the macro.
6. Type a name for the macro
Screen example:
7. Click save
ScriptPro scripts
Smartpoint enables the scripting product “ScriptPro” to run on the Smartscreen.
ScriptPro script will be displayed and executed on top of the Smartpoint screen. You
can access ScriptPro using the CTRL + S key from the Smartpoint screen.

10
Select the required script and press OK to open the script.
Scripts can also be accessed from the Custom Scripts icon. The number of scripts
displayed will vary depending upon whether your agency has ScriptPro scripts.

11
You can pause a ScriptPro script with the CTRL + W key.

You will need to ensure your cursor is in the input or command box on the smart
screen. If there is a script running the CRL+W will pause the script and the script will
go to the background restricting you from viewing the script.
You can resume or restart the script using the CTRL +R key, once again the cursor
needs to be in the input or command box in the Smart Screen.
If you have more than one script paused the CTRL R key will display a resume script
window listing the scripts that are paused. You can then select your script and
Smartpoint will resume this script.
The Smartpoint status bar displays the ScriptPro status with the name of the script
that is running or status as “No Scripts Running” or “0 Script Paused
History Tab
The History Tab keeps a record of the entries you have made with links to replay a
specific entry or multiple entries. It contains up to a maximum of 250 entries. This
feature is useful when you need to repeat a series of formats. It saves time and
reduces keystrokes.
 You can access by clicking on the History Tab, or by using the shortcut key F5
in the Entry Field in the Smart Screen.
 At Login the History Tab is empty.
 The options within the History Tab are to replay an entry, and display the
system response to an entry.
 The replay option allows you to edit the entry before replaying it. .
 Once the entry is amended press the enter key or use the Send button

12
Replay Entries
Use the guidelines in the following table to manage and replay entries.
To: Do this:
Replay an entry Place your cursor at the end of the entry and
press enter or click on the Send Entry icon
to the left of the entry. The response
appears in the Smart Screen.
Replay multiple Select the entries using the check boxes on

entries the left-hand side. The Send Entry icon moves
to the top right-hand side of the History Tab.
Once you have made your selection, click the
icon to send the entries to the host.
Display System Responses

The Expand/Collapse column is used to view system responses. You may select a
specific response or all responses.
To view a specific system response, click on the arrow to the left of the entry. The
response will appear in the History Tab.
Recent PNRs
Recent PNRs allows you to review a list of previously inspected PNRs up to a
maximum of 40 PNRs. The PNRs are listed most recent to oldest with the customer
name, date of travel and PNR Record Locator.
13
To view a list of Recent PNRs click on the Recent PNRs icon at the top right-hand
corner of the Smartpoint screen.
Select an item by double-clicking on it from the list and it will be displayed in the
PNR Viewer window. This can be particularly useful when wishing to quickly retrieve
a recent booking.
Smart Tools
The Smart Tools menu provides you with access to several easy to use productivity
tools and scripts.

14
Summary
In this module you learned how to use the Travelport Worldspan system to:
 Build bookings using shortcuts
 Claim a PNR
 Build passive segments
 Access miscellaneous time savers to view:
- Local time
- Flight schedules
Also, you learned how to access the following advanced Travelport Worldspan
products:
 Agency Private Fares™
 Macros, ScriptPro and other tools

15
Direct Payment Carriers may be booked in Travelport Smartpoint using traditional

availability and shopping requests.
ACH (Air Content Hub) allows access to Direct Payment Carrier availability and fares.
Airlines such as Norwegian and easyJet load their data on the ACH and agents can
access this content alongside the Traditional GDS carrier fares through Travelport
Smartpoint.
All fares are obtained directly from the carrier during the shopping and pricing
process. When a shop request is sent to a Direct Payment Carrier, the carrier will
return available flights and fares. They do not return flights that are not available.
Modify and cancel are supported through Travelport Aggregated Shopping if the
carrier supports them via their API. The form of payment is sent to the carrier for
purchase, the agency does not issue the ticket. Direct Payment Carriers and full-
service carriers may be booked in the same PNR but must be purchased and ticketed
separately.
Module Objectives
 Use Travelport Aggregated Shopping – (Un-booked Shop)
 Use Travelport Aggregated Shopping – (Booked Shop)
 Use Neutral Availability Screen
 Identify Branded Fares in an Availability Screen
 Use Carrier specific Availability screen
 Sell from un-booked and booked shop screen
 Sell from Neutral and Carrier Specific Availability Screens
 Price an Itinerary
 Identify Branded Fares from a Fare Quote
 Add Optional Services
 Complete a PNR – Required Passenger Data
 Modify and Cancel

1
Travelport Aggregated Shopping (TAS) – Un-booked Shop

Power Shopper searches for low fare alternatives without having a booked itinerary
offering both GDS and Direct Payment Carrier options. As well as one-way and
round-trip journeys, a maximum of 6 city or airport codes can be specified in the
entry to form longer itineraries.
The basic entry starts with Z$P or $P followed by the departure date, the routing
and the return date. There are many other optional entries which may be added to
tailor the shopping request to your customers’ requirements. You can also access
Power Shopper via the e-Pricing script in the Fares & Pricing Menu.
Example entry: Z$P10NOVLONPAR/R14NOV
Response:
The results are displayed in the Smart Panel within the e-Pricing script. Pricing
options will be ordered from low to high and results will contain both GDS and
Direct Payment Carrier content if available, but not mixed within the same pricing
option.
Number of pricing options message / headline advises how many total pricing
options and additional itinerary options have been returned.

2
The More button – when an airline offers several itinerary choices at the same price,
by clicking the More button, you will be able to see and sell any itinerary at the
displayed price point.
In the results screen you can decode airline codes, booking codes, airport codes and
arrival indicators by hovering over the links.
You can Scroll though the results.
Details Display
To view the fare details, such as the last day to purchase and fare basis information
click on
The detail opens in a new dialog window.
Rules
You can view the rules by clicking on of the desired option. You must then
click on the component of the journey you wish to view.
Response:

3
The rules of a Direct Payment Carrier will display in a pop-up window giving brief
information regarding changes and usually stating that the ticket is non-refundable.
It will also advise customers to refer to the airline website for full terms and
conditions of carriage.
Travelport Aggregated Shopping (TAS) – Booked Shop

Power Pricing prices a booked itinerary at the lowest available fare and searches
schedules and fares to find the lowest priced alternative itineraries.

4
Example entry: Z4PLI
The original flight is listed at the top of the screen with the cost and flight details. An
asterisk will be displayed next to the option that is currently selected.
The alternative price options will be listed below the original flight, to display the
details of the next flight option click on Next Opt: Z$P*02 or make the manual entry
for the option of your choice.
Travelport Aggregated Shopping Formats
Z4PLI Booked shopping command
Z$P20OCTLONMUC Basic un-booked shopping command

(One-way request)
Z$P20OCTLONMUC/R30OCT Basic un-booked shopping command
(Round-trip request)
Z$P19NOVFRASTO#P3 Un-booked shopping command
3 passengers one-way
Z$P19NOVFRASTO/R24NOV#P3 Un-booked shopping command –
3 passengers round-trip
Z$P*11 Selecting next pricing option –
Moves to 11th pricing option in the list
Z4PLI*F11 Opening Fare Details screen from shop
screen –Selection of Fare Details of first
itinerary for 11th pricing option
Z4PR*02 Opening Fare Rules screen from shop
screen – Selection of Fare Rules of second
pricing option
Z$P* Redisplay shopping results

5
Neutral Availability
Displaying Basic Availability
The function identifier to display neutral air availability for Direct Payment Carriers is
exactly the same as GDS Carriers: A
To display air availability, enter A followed by the departure date, origin city or
airport, and destination city or airport.
Refer to the following example, to display flight availability from London to Malaga
for 20 SEP.
Enter: A20SEPLONAGP
Both traditional GDS and Direct Payment Carriers are returned in the availability
results screen.
Direct Payment Carrier flights are displayed in neutral availability without flight
status. Only the class of service with the carriers schedule is displayed, this is
followed by a blank space where the status normally appears for full-service carriers.
Even though numeric availability status may not be shown, reference sell from
availability is supported.
Return availability is displayed in exactly the same way as a traditional GDS Carrier.
Example entry: A/R25SEP

6
To request outbound and return availability in a single entry use the following entry:
A20SEPLONAGP##A/R25SEP
You can also split the screen to view outbound and return availability at the same
time by clicking on the split screen icon.
Decoding Items
As with the GDS carriers the display for Direct Payment Carriers is interactive.
(Depending on the colors selected in My Preferences the colors may vary.)
Black: Items in black on the availability display indicate static information with no
interactive capability.
Orange: Waitlist/ Request Seats
Blue: Click on or hover for more information
Many of the same tool tips for Traditional GDS Carriers apply to the Direct Payment
Carriers including the carrier code, a 3-letter airport code and equipment code. The
main differences with the Direct Payment Carriers are that the flight number is not
interactive, the alliance indicators do not exist, and the seat map icon is not
available. The participation level shows as: which when you hover over it lets you
know that it is an Instant Purchase Airline.
Branded Fares
Branded fares can be accessed from an availability display on some Direct Payment
Carrier flight options a clickable blue indicator <<B>> will appear below the airline
code, hovering your mouse over the indicator also lets you know that brand
information may be available.
The indicator will only appear for airlines who have filed branded fares as you can
see in this availability display from London to Malaga, both the easyJet and Ryanair
flight options have the branded fares indicator.
Once you have clicked on the link a brands and ancillaries appears in the Smart
Panel.

7
The city pairs will be picked up from the initial availability response, a note at the
bottom of the screen advises you to validate the brands and ancillaries you book
when you fare quote the reservation. In the center content the associated flight will
be displayed, as well as the departure and arrival times. Ancillary information is
listed on the right-hand side and the number of passengers can be changed or
selected from the drop-down list.
To check information on each branded fare click the area around the brand name to
switch the brand that’s being viewed.
Carrier Specific Availability

You can also make availability requests for Direct Payment Carrier specific
availability.
Example Entry: @U2@A20JULMADLON
The availability response is similar to the booked shop request, although the flight
routing and times are listed in the left-hand column, and on the right-hand column
the one-way price will be displayed for the selected flight.
An asterisk will be shown next to the flight option that is currently selected. To
display the details of the next flight option, click on Next Opt: @U2@02 or make the
manual entry for the option of your choice.

8
Selling a Seat
Selling a Seat from an un-booked shop
To sell a Direct Payment Carrier from an un-booked shopping request simply click on
Book on the required flight option.
Travelport Smartpoint will respond letting you know that the flight you have
selected is booked.
Your flight details are displayed in the Smart Panel.
Active Direct Payment Carrier bookings reside directly with the carrier, not in the
GDS but Travelport Aggregated Shopping will create a passive segment for each
flight booked using a ZK status code (this code cannot be manually added by
agents.)
Selling a Seat from a booked shop

To sell a Direct Payment Carrier from a booked shopping display click on
Book: Z4PLIB01/0102
Or make the manual entry for the option of your choice.

9
Selling a Seat from Neutral Availability

To sell a Direct Payment Carrier from a Neutral availability display click once on the
required booking class.
You can also use cryptic formats to sell seats.

Enter 01Y3 to sell one seat in Y class from line 3 of the availability.
Note: If you have split the screen to search for outbound and return flights in one
entry and wish to use cryptic entries to sell, you must place the cursor in the top
partition for the outbound flight and in the bottom partition for the return flight.

10
Selling from Branded Fares
Clickable classes of service are displayed below the associated brand name which
allow you to sell the flight.
As soon as the Brands and Ancillaries screen is open, a card should be present at the
bottom of the display which coordinates with the number of legs.
To sell a seat from a Branded Fares display select the required class of service. In this
example let’s click on B class.
This will sell the flight and the card at the bottom of the screen is updated
accordingingly showing the relevant class of service booked, a sell notification will
appear at the top of the screen.
The booked flights can then be viewed in the PNR Viewer and you can continue with
the booking process.

11
Selling from Carrier Specific Availability
To sell a Direct Payment Carrier from a Carrier Specific availability display firstly click
on Details: Z4F.A01 to display details for option 1 or make the manual entry for the
option of your choice.
From the details display choose the fare family that you wish to sell e.g. Economy or
Inclusive and click on the desired class.
Your flight details will be displayed in the Smart screen along with the fare
breakdown.

12
Booking Formats
Z4PLIB Book from Shop - Action Code
Z4PLIB01/0102 Book from Shop, pricing option 1,

flight segment 1 and 2
02Y1 or N2Y1 Reference sell from neutral availability
or carrier specific display
0U27946W20FEBEDIMADNN1 Manual sell
Pricing an Itinerary
Once Direct Payment Carrier flights have been booked using your desired method,
either from a shopping or availability display you will need to quote your fare.
Although price details may have been listed when you made your booking you still
need to do a fare quote entry to store your fare and end your PNR.
If the PNR contains both Direct Payment and traditional GDS segments, segment
select must be used to price separately.
Once a passenger name has been added to your PNR the easiest way to price your
flight booking is to use the following basic pricing entry:
4P
Response:

13
The system quotes the fare in the currency of your set location, it will show the
currency and a total cost at the top of the screen and then a breakdown of taxes and
fees.
If you haven’t done so already you can check the Rules by clicking on the Rules
button in the bottom left corner of the screen.
Rules for the outbound flight will be displayed, to view rules for the return flight click
on Next Seg: 4PR*S02 link. Selecting MD will display any further information.
You can return to the pricing screen by clicking on the PriceDetails: 4P* link.

14
Pricing Formats
4P Price request for all names all segments.

(Assumes all segments are for the same
Direct Payment Carriers)
4PS1 Price request for all names, segment 1.
4P#CU2 Carrier specific pricing
4PS1/3 Price request for all names, segment 1

and 3
4PS1-3 Price request for all names, segment 1
through 3
4PN1.1#S1/2 Price request for name 1, segment 1 & 2
4PN3.1/4.1#S2 Price request for name field 3 & 4,

segment 2
4PN1.1/1.2#PADT/SRC Price request for name field 1 & 2
specifying passenger 1 is ADT and
passenger 2 is SRC
4PN2.1#PCNN Example of price request with 2nd
4PN2.1#PC04 passenger child age 4
4PN1.2#PINF Price request with 2nd passenger infant
Z4P* Redisplay previous TAS price request
4PR Display fare rules for currently displayed

fare quote.
Z4PR* Redisplay fare rules for previous TAS
price request
4PS1-4/6 Price request for segment 1 through 4,
and 6

15
Branded Fares from a Fare Quote Screen

Branded fares can also be accessed from a fare quote if applicable and if they have
been loaded by the carrier. If branded fare information is available then when a fare
quote entry is made (e.g. 4P, 4PLF) it will be indicated by a total fare that is clickable
and colour coded blue.
PTC modifiers may also be used in the fare quote entry. Hovering over the fare will
also display a tool-tip advising branded fares may be available.
Refer to the following itinerary that is booked with easyJet the 4P entry has been
made and you can see that in this instance the total fare is blue and clickable.
Selecting the fare launches the brands and ancillaries screen in the Smart Panel.
Fare families will be listed on the left-hand side of the screen, a Fare Family is the
name given to the hierarchical grouping of branded fares.
The additional price (per sector) for each option will also be displayed. The total cost
for the original flight selection is displayed at the bottom of the screen along with
any fees (these are shown separately.)
16
You can see here that the fare quote button is currently disabled, this is because a
fare is already held. Only when changing the brand selection does Fare Quote
become enabled, at this point the Close button will also become Cancel to allow you
to return to the booking without making any upsell changes if required.
Choosing to tick a branded fare will display detailed information in the middle
section of the screen listing what the fare includes, extra ancillary services that may
be purchased after booking will also be listed in the right-hand column.
The outbound flight is automatically selected if you choose to select the inclusive
fare for this flight the same upgrade is automatically applied to the return flight also,
which is regular practice when booking easyJet flights.
A running total is displayed at the bottom of the screen in local point of sale
currency.
You can see the fees charge has been removed as this is now included in the price of
the upgrade (details of which are listed in the description information in the center
of the screen.) To proceed with the upgrade, click on Fare Quote.

17
The summary screen appears giving a detailed overview of the upgrade selected. As
I already have a flight booked from my original selection to confirm the upgrade I
must click on Rebook, this will cancel and rebook the flight sectors.
A confirmed sell notification will appear and the new flight details can then be
viewed in the PNR Viewer or Smartscreen.
Adding Optional Services
Optional services / Ancillaries may be added to your selected Direct Payment Carrier
flights before you end your PNR (easyJet are currently the only exception that offer
post booking optional services).
All passenger names must be entered in to the PNR and a pricing entry must be
made prior to requesting optional services.
Optional Services may be passenger and/or segment related. This means that
passenger 3 could have 1 bag on the outbound flight and 2 bags on the return and
the other passengers have nothing.
To add ancillary services, you can either click on the Ancillaries shopping cart icon in
the PNR Viewer window or Smartscreen, access the script via the Reservations
Menu, using the quick command #ANC or using the cryptic entry DAS*
Note: If a name is not already entered the following advice is returned when you try
to Fare quote the summary.

18
All Segments or individual segments may be selected.
The Ancillaries script will launch in the Smart Panel. Firstly, select the relevant
passenger name from the drop-down list.

19
A list of applicable ancillaries with their relevant cost are displayed.
Enter the amount required of each desired ancillary, for the respective segment. In
this example the ancillaries selected will automatically be added to segment 1 and 2.
To book one item of baggage enter 1 in the relevant column.
A running total will be displayed at the bottom of the screen. Once you have
completed your selections click on REVIEW.

20
You will be presented with a summary screen listing all selected Ancillaries with a
Total cost at the bottom of the screen. If you are ready to send your request through
click on Apply, you can also click to modify or cancel your request.
Smartpoint will respond letting you know your Ancillaries are booked.
Multiple ancillaries at a tiered price
When you select multiple ancillaries at a tiered price, the Summary screen shows
the breakdown by making each cost a separate line item.
Hover over the multiple amount in blue to display the number of pieces per price.

21
Useful Formats
DAS* This entry will launch the graphical

screen.
DAS*Cxx This entry will launch the graphical screen
for the carrier specified xx = carrier code
for multi-carrier PNRs
#Sn The Segment number can be appended
#Sn/n (and)
#Sn-n (range)
#Nn.n The Passenger number can be appended

DAS*Exxx/yy This entry is used to launch the graphical
screen where xxx is the requested
currency code and yy is the requested
country code
4P#DASO This entry will launch the graphical
screen.
Payment Script
All Direct Payment Carriers will usually require payment by credit/debit card for
Ancillary services. If you are adding Ancillaries before end transaction, then you will
just need to add your payment information in the normal way along with all the
other required fields.
You may wish to add the Form of payment using the Form of payment script, which
is accessed via the Create/Modify PNR script (pencil icon in PNR viewer.)
The script is specifically designed for Direct Payment Carriers. If you are adding
ancillaries to a direct payment carrier booking before end transaction add the form
of payment here.

22
In this example you can see that easyJet allow credit/debit card and eNett Vans as
form of payment, these options will change depending on the individual Direct
payment carrier and the form of payments they permit.
The options available are:
 Cash
 Credit card
 Debit card
 Agency payment
 Travel account card
 MCO
 eNett VAN
When you select MCO the following script is launched.
If you are adding Ancillaries after you have ended your PNR then a pop-up window
will appear immediately after clicking on Apply for you to enter payment details.
When you select eNett VAN the following screen is returned. The option to allow
the VAN to be used multiple times is available.
You can add the amount and currency. The activation date and expiration date
MUST be used together, and the entry format is DDMMM.
The activation date is the first date in which the VAN can be used.
The expiration date can be up to 3 months from the activation date, or 24 months
for multi-use VANs.

23
There is a default setting of a 10% tolerance for all VANs issued. It is possible for you
to set the desired tolerance level as a percentage or an amount. Tolerance can
provide flexibility to handle such issues as currency fluctuations, unknown taxes, or
undefined totals such as hotels.
Here is an example of the pop-up window for immediate payment when adding
Ancillaries post booking:
The payment script can support multiple direct payment airlines and the total due
for each airline.

24
Prepopulate Form of payment in Ancillaries

If a credit card has been entered as the FOP in the booking this will be prepopulated.
Remember that the security code is mandatory and the address field can be
prepopulated from the address field in the PNR
Add the cardholders’ details. Use the drop-down arrow to populate each line of the
address from the PNR.

25
Note: If you use Z5$ format to add the fop the FOP will not be prepopulated
however if you add the credit card with 5$ or pull from the profile the credit card
will prepopulate the Payment screen.
Required Passenger Data

The best practice to make a Direct Payment Carrier booking is to begin by firstly
moving in the traveler profile or adding passenger information to a PNR.
The required fields may be added using manual entries or the Create/Modify PNR
script which is accessed via the Reservations Menu or the Pencil Icon in the PNR
Viewer window.

26
Required fields:
 Name (including title)
 Phone Field
 Address (5 fields including valid country code)
 Email Address
 Form of payment
You must ensure that all mandatory items are completed. Check Ask Travelport to
see if there are any carrier specific requirements. To view individual airline clue
cards, enter the key word CLUE CARD in to Ask Travelport and select the relevant
airline.
When an attempt is made to End Transact a PNR, Aggregated Shopping will check
that the PNR contains all the mandatory information required before sending the
book request. Each Direct Payment Carrier may have different mandatory fields and
as such Aggregated Shopping will provide an error if the correct fields have not been
entered.
In addition to the required fields, a pricing entry must be made prior to End
Transact. If a Pricing Entry is not made the following error message will be displayed:
TASERR078-NEED PRICING ENTRY BEFORE END TRANSACTION
Passenger Title
A passenger title is mandatory in the name field for Direct Payment Carriers. The
following titles are supported:
 MR
 MRS
 MISS
 MS
 MASTER
 MSTR
If a Passenger title exists but is not supported by the requested Direct Payment
Carrier, Travelport Aggregated Shopping will display an error.
Phone Field
A minimum of one phone number is required. Here are Worldspan phone examples:
 HOME PHONE........................>9*404-555-5055-H
 BUSINESS PHONE...................>9*404-555-5055-B
 TRAVEL AGENCY PHONE........>T-404-555-5055
 ADDRESS/HOTEL....................>9*404-555-5055-A
 CORPORATE ACCOUNT..........>9*404-555-5055-C
 FAX.........................................>9*404-555-5055-F
 PHONE NATURE UNKNOWN..>9*404-555-5055-P

27
Address Field
An address line is required, the address field must contain the minimum of 5 address
elements including country.
5CB or 5CD:
 Name
 Address Line
 Town/City
 Country
 Zip/Postal code
Address examples:
 Billing Address example : 5-CB PERSON NAME#5-CB ADDRESS
LINE#5-CB TOWN#5-CB COUNTRY#5-CB Z/55416
 Delivery Address Example : 5-CD PERSON NAME#5-CD ADDRESS
LINE 1#5-CD TOWN#5-CD COUNTRY#5-CD Z/55416
Email Address
A minimum of one email address is required. If multiple email addresses exist, then
the first email address will be sent to the Direct Payment Carrier. Additional email
addresses may be sent if the carrier supports multiple email addresses
Email address example:

5-MTT*yourname@yourdomain
5-MTTN2.2*yourname@yourdomain
APIS / Secure Flight

Aggregated Shopping uses existing GDS formats for APIS/Secure Flight if it is
required.
Form of Payment
The following forms of payment are supported by Travelport Aggregated Shopping:

 CREDIT CARD
 DEBIT CARD
 AGENCY PAYMENT
 CASH
 TRAVEL ACCOUNT CARD
 PREPAID CARD

28
Form of payment can be added to a booking using manual entries or the

Create/Modify PNR Script selecting the Direct Payment Carriers option:
Not all Direct Payment Carriers support all forms of payment therefore, Travelport
Aggregated Shopping maintains a list of acceptable Forms of Payments by carrier.
To show a list of payment options for a specific carrier use the following entry:
Z5$*CU2
This example shows forms of payment accepted by easyJet, the asterisk currently
shows as Credit Card but the Debit Card option can be selected by clicking on the
next option.
Travelport Aggregated Shopping will generate an internal entry to retrieve

unmasked FOP from the PNR when the Z5$* entry is made.
If no form of payment has been entered, or the form of payment is masked then the
form of payment must be manually entered using the following format:
Z5$#Cxx#CC# (xx = 2 letter airline code)
Example entry:
Z5$#CU2#CC#VI4444333322221111#D1112#S123#NM-Mr Joe Traveler
The following entries can be used to enter the security code if the credit card was
stored in the PNR:
Z5$# Cxx#CC#S123
Z5$#CC#S123

29
Once all mandatory information has been added you can End Transact your PNR and
view the booking in the PNR viewer window. To view all stored Direct Payment
Carrier remarks, click on *ML.
Here you will find your Direct Payment Carrier code and record locator from the
Direct Payment Carrier’s system along with the currency code. Flight details, price,
details of any ancillaries that have been booked and other related information will
also be stored.
Form of Payment Formats
ZF*Cxx Display form of payment screen for

carrier xx
ZF#NM-MR JOE TRAVELER Change card holder name
ZF#@ Delete form of payment prior to end

transact
ZF#CC#S123 Add CVV# security code to credit card
ZF#Cxx#CC#S123 Single Direct Payment Carrier
ZF#CC#VI4444333322221111 Form of Payment with VISA Credit
#D1112#S123 Card for all the Direct Payment
ZF#Cxx#CC#VI444433332222 Carriers in the PNR /
1111#D1112#S123 Single Direct Payment Carrier
ZF#AP#X2345#Pagentx Agency Payment with Agent Payment
ID and password details for all
segments in PNR
ZF#MO#12345687 Miscellaneous Charge Order with
unused ticket number for all
segments in PNR
ZF#C nn#CA Cash as Form of Payment for carrier –
nn = carrier code

30
Modify and Cancel

Before a PNR can be modified or cancelled it must be retrieved from the Direct
Payment Carrier’s system. To Display Direct Payment Carrier PNR use the following
entry: Z*R#Cnn
 Modify or Cancel cannot proceed unless the GDS Host PNR is in Synch with
the Direct Payment Carrier PNR. (To synch PNR: ZSYNC#Cnn)
 For easyJet: If changes are made outside of Worldspan, synch is not
possible. Any additional changes must be made directly with easyJet.
 Modify PNR segments, Optional Services/ Ancillaries, or Passenger Name, or
APIS. A seat may be added if a new segment is added or an existing segment
is modified.
 Cancel Rebook is permitted.
 Example: X2 followed by 0U24909Y08NOVAMSLGWNN1
 If the PNR is modified by name or segment change, Aggregated Shopping
will send or re-send the APIS data if it exists in the PNR.
 Cancel of multiple Direct Payment Carrier segments in a single entry is not
permitted.
 Price the itinerary and all selected seats and options.
Example: 4P
 When the price has changed due to the modify, the following message will
be displayed on the first line of the fare quote: *** Price Changed – Amount
due: ….. ***
 Add form of payment.
 End the PNR.
 Itinerary Remarks after cancel or modify.
All original itinerary remarks will be replaced with the revised booking data.
The original form of payment plus total amount will be retained plus the
new form of payment and total amount including add collect will be added.
Example:
9.RM-*TAS01*FOPCC*VIXXXXXXXXXXXX1111*525.20*2045Z*01AUG
10.RM-*TAS01*FOPCC*VIXXXXXXXXXXXX1111*25.00*0945Z*02AUG
14.RM-*TAS01*TOT550.20
As each Direct Payment Carrier may follow a slightly different procedure

refer to Ask Travelport for specific carrier related information on cancelling
and modifying Direct Payment Carrier bookings.

31
Create/Modify PNR
Use of Script in Create/Modify PNR can be used to modify the Flight the agent will
select ‘Change’ and enter the desired class of service and date. After selecting
CONTINUE, the new flight will be booked, and the old flight will be cancelled:
Note: When the new direct payment carrier segment is added to the PNR, the host
will add it to the bottom of the itinerary. The segments will need to be re ordered to
the desired itinerary outside this script.
In addition, some direct payment carriers do not allow class of service changes after
a PNR has been ended. When the agent attempts to end the PNR, the host will
display an error message if the change cannot be completed.
To delete a flight the agent will select ‘Delete’ and then press CONTINUE. This will
cancel the flight from the itinerary.
Summary
 Use Travelport Aggregated Shopping – (Un-booked Shop)
 Use Travelport Aggregated Shopping – (Booked Shop)
 Use Neutral Availability Screen
 Identify Branded Fares in an Availability Screen
 Use Carrier specific Availability screen
 Sell from un-booked and booked shop screen
 Sell from Neutral and Carrier Specific Availability Screens
 Price an Itinerary
 Identify Branded Fares from a Fare Quote
 Add Optional Services
 Complete a PNR – Required Passenger Data
 Modify and Cancel

32
Module Review
1. What is the Air Content Hub (ACH?)
_____________________________________________________________________
2. What is the status used for a Direct Payment Carrier Booking?
____________________________________________________________________
3. What is the participation code in an availability display for Instant Purchase Airlines?
_____________________________________________________________________
4. What is the entry to check the FOP options for a specific carrier?
_____________________________________________________________________
5. What are the main passenger data fields required to make a Direct Payment Carrier booking?
_____________________________________________________________________

33
1a HELP CARS / INFO CARS
1b HELP PHONE / INFO PHONE / HELP 9
1c HELP QUEUE / HELP Q/
1d HELP WORLD FILE / HELP WF / INFO WF
1e HELP HISTORY / INFO HISTORY
2 PNS
3 Hawaiian Airlines
4 KC/DENPASAR
5 Displays a list of recently viewed PNRs
6 The Pencil Icon
7 The History Tab
1 Cryptic format
Reservations Menu - Air Booking Tool Script
Calendar Tab
2 Double click on the booking class B in line 1 or 01B1B2 or

01B1*
3 V**3
4 /5S2
5 XI

1
1 Add the two phone numbers using the Create/Modify PNR

script (accessed via Pencil Icon in PNR Viewer or
Reservations Menu), select Phone option and add the Phone
Numbers, add Agents Name to name field.
2 Create/Modify PNR script, select Phone and tick the Change

box of the required phone number, over type the
information and click Continue.
3 TAW – Ticket at Will for future ticketing date
4 Phone, Name, Ticketing Information
5 I
6 Select Create/Modify PNR script from the Reservations

Menu
or click the Pencil icon in the PNR Viewer Window
1 Customer Address and Delivery Address
2 Yes
3 10
4 Associated remarks are itinerary remarks that are associated

to a specific segment in a PNR.
Unassociated remarks are freeform remarks you create for
an itinerary that do not associate to a specific segment.
5 A Special Service Request (SSR) is a message sent to an

airline that requires the airline to take action.
Other Services Information (OSI) sends a message to an
airline advising of information pertaining to the passengers
in the PNR. It does not require action.
6 *MLX will bring up a fill in screen for the re-association of

segment associated remarks
7 You would Cancel an SSR rather than deleting it if you have

requested the Special Service Request and it is awaiting
confirmation or has been confirmed by the airline.

2
Module 6: Fare Display
1 4FLONCPH.OW/L01MAR
£4.00
D8 or DY
QKAMP
2 4FLONCPH-BA/L01MAR/R06MAR
£64.00
O CLASS
OZ0R
No Minimum stay / Maximum stay 1 year
3 4FLONHKG-BA/L01MAR/R21MAR and then display rules, or,

4FLONHKGADT-BA/L01MAR/R21MAR
4FLONHKGCNN-BA/L01MAR/R21MAR
4FLONHKGINF-BA/L01MAR/R21MAR
£114.00
£86.00
£11.00
O CLASS
OLXZ90B7
MIN /MAX STAY: SU/12M
AA 2677.99 B1NAJB B class
4
BA 2677.99 Y1N0C9S1 Y class
UA 12171.00 Y1 Y class
5 4FLONLIS.RT/L01MAR
4F*-TP
£30.00 /
O02DSC0B/ O class
NO MIN/ MAX 1 YEAR / TICKET WITHIN 24 HOURS
4F.R1#PEN (CHANGES NOT PERMITTED)
NON REFUNDABLE
6 4FLONBKK-TG#Q/L01MAR
NO MIN STAY / MAX STAY 12 MONTH
TOTALLY UNUSED TICKET REFUND FEE GBP125.00

3
2 FREE STOPOVERS PERMITTED ON THE PRICING UNIT. 1 IN

BKK IN EACH DIRECTION AND UNLIMITED FREE STOPOVERS
PERMITTED ON THE PRICING UNIT IN AREA 3.
7 £137.00
4FMANBNE-QF/L01MAR
Then display fare rules for the fare, or,
4FMANBNECNN-QF/L01MAR
4FMANBNEINF-QF/L01MAR
Child fare £103.00
Infant fare £14.00
O CLASS
Module 7: Fare Quoting an Itinerary
1 All passengers in the booking require fare quotes

All passengers are adults unless an infant or a specific
passenger type code has been used when the name field
was added
All segments to be quoted
Ticketing to take place on the same date as the ticket is
quoted or within the guarantee limits
Sale and ticketing to take place in the country of set
location.
A stopover is assumed where connections are 24 hours or
more for international travel and 4 hours or more if the
journey is within North America
Passengers are not exempt from any ticketable tax
2 4PLFC
3 Lowest fare available in the cabin booked for the

corresponding class of service
4 4PLFQ@S1/4
5 Autopriced indicates a Ticket Record has been created by

means of an autoprice entry
6 Accompanied Passenger

4
Module 8: Manual Fare Build
1 4P--BE6MUK1#NR
2 #
1 E-pricing script can be accessed via The Fares & Pricing

Menu and the Shopping option in the interactive calendar
2 The flight details and elapsed flying time
3 Next day arrival
4 Press More button
5 Tick the box of each itinerary option you would like to send
to your customer, click on the email icon at the top of the
response screen. Add the recipient’s email and optionally
add any comments you may have. Once the fields have been
completed with the required data, click Continue and an
advisory will appear at the top of the screen to let you know
that the e-mail has been sent successfully.
6 Power Pricing is used with a booked itinerary and Power

Shopper is used without a booked itinerary.
7 Yes
8 Branded Fares are identified by a clickable price that is color

coded blue.
9 True
Module 12: Sell Rental Cars
1 Budget
2 Standard, 2/4 door, Automatic, Unspecified fuel with A/C
3 Details
4 Add Credit card number in More Options of initial fill in

search screen or manually in the sell CR001/G-CCVIXXXXX
5 CR@1/VICAR
6 Click on Rules

5
Module 13: Sell Hotels
1 HCHILTON
2 HC/TL
Step1 Hotel List
3
Step 2 Hotel Availability
Step 3 Rate Rules
Step 4 Sell
4 Virtual Tour of selected property
It pre-populates the hotel search with the check-in and out
5
dates based on the flight segments in the PNR.
It assumes the city center. This may be changed to search for

airport location.
It displays a hotel list within a 40 mile radius from the city

center.
6 HRS1
Module14: History and Troubleshooting
1a ARNK segments
Added phone fields (only changed or deleted phones)
Original PNR elements if never changed
2 False
3 To find your CIDB number, in Worldspan, click on Settings

Drop down Menu. Select System, and the Customer number
is displayed.
4a Added segment
4b Added SSR Item
4c Canceled Segment
4d Segment With Status/Action Advice Code/Change
4e History of filed fare
1 ACH (Air Content Hub) allows access to Low Cost and Web
Carrier availability and fares.

6
2 ZK
3 :
4 Z5$*Cxx
5 Name (including title)

Phone Field
Address (5 fields including valid country code)
Email Address
Form of payment

7
This Appendix contains format summaries and steps to build a PNR.
Availability
Description Format
Availability A19JUNLONSYD
Availability with departure time A15MAYMANPAR1100
Availability with preferred airline A23MARSYDSIN-SQ
Availability with specified booking class A20JANCAIROM-MS*B
Return Availability with same return routing A1SEPLONBKK##A/R15SEP
Availability Options
Description Format
Reverse availability (same date) A/R
Reverse availability for specified date A/R17NOV
Reverse availability 7 days later A/R7D
Availability down (more availability) AD
Availability up AU
Availability tomorrow (1 day later) AT
Availability yesterday (1 day earlier ) AY
Redisplay last availability A
Change availability display to specified departure A0900

time
Change availability to show preference for specified A-BA-UA-AA

carriers (maximum 3)
Display availability for single connecting flights via A/LHR

specified airport
Display more booking classes, screen 2 AC2
Forward search 7 days with BD, 3 seats in W class, AS#24DECLONGLA-BD*W3/D

direct flights only

1
Search backward 7 days with KL, 1 seat in Q class, AS-18MARAMSBKK-KL*Q1/D

direct flights only
@ ensures flights displayed to all airports in BFS A19AUGLONBFS@

(otherwise will omit flights to BHD)
Display availability from a new specified departure A@DBHX

city.
Display availability to a new specified arrival city A@ABRU
Schedule Display
Description Format
Schedule display for today (direct flights only) with SLONFRA-LH

specified carrier
Return schedule display S/R
Schedule display for today (direct and connecting S@MANCAI

flights)
Schedule displays within 30 days from entered S#12MAYLONSCL

date. (direct and connecting)
Re-displays schedule S*
Move down in schedule SD
Schedule Up SU
To see second screen of booking classes SC2
Flight Services
Description Format
View flight services from booked PNR (all V*

segments)
View flight services segment 3 V**3
View flight services range of segments V**3-5
View flight services from availability line 1 V$1
View flight services specific flight number/date V*AA110/5APR
Check minimum connection times segments 1 -2 VCT*1-2
Minimum Connection times for specific airport KEC*STL
Check local time at specified location KCD*SIN

2
Name Field
Description Format
Display name field *N
To enter a single adult passenger, Mr George Casey -CASEY/GEORGEMR
To enter a single passenger using a passenger type -CASEY/KATEMISS*C09

code, in this instance C09 for a 9 year old child
To enter multiple passengers with the same family -BROWN/JAMESMR /MARYMRS/ANNEMISS

name, Mr James Brown, Mrs Mary Brown (both *2ADT/C05
adults)and Miss Anne Brown aged 5
To enter an infant, Miss Lauren Cooper -COOPER/LAURENMISS*INF
Multiple passengers with different family names, -HART/TINA#-PARK/BRENDA

Tina Hart and Brenda Park
For full list of Passenger Type Codes HELP PTCCODES1 / HELP PTCCODES2
Add Customized Name Data (data will appear on -MCCARTHY/MAUREEN.MS@23@

ticket)
Add Customized Name Comment (data will not -HART/TINA.MRS@@EMP12@

appear on ticket)
Change surname, single name field PNR -@MASON/OLIVERMR
Change first name passenger 2.2 -2@.2/ALISONMISS
Change PTC passenger 1.2 -1@.2*C07
Change surname passenger 1.3 -1@.3#-JOHNSON/ALANMR
Change first name and PTC passenger 3.1 -3@.1/ETHANMSTR*INF
Change Customized Name Data passenger 2.1 -2@.1/@2332@
Change Customized Name Comment passenger 1 -1@/@@COUPONS@
Delete entire name field 1 -1@
Delete passenger 2.3 -2@.3
Delete Customized Name Data passenger 1.3 -1.3@/@
Delete Customized Name Comment passenger 3 -3@/@@
Phone Field Codes
Code Identifies
T Travel agency phone
H Customer’s home phone

3
B Customer’s business phone
E Customer’s email address
A Customer’s accommodation/hotel phone
F FAX
P Phone contact unknown
Phone Field
Description Format
Automatically enters phone number stored in 9-SUZY

Agency World File, and appends agent reference.
To enter a home phone number for your customer 9 207 897 7871-H
To enter a business phone number for your 9 208 721 1234-B

customer
To enter multiple phone numbers 9*208 721 1234-B/207 897 7871-H
To change the second phone field to show a 92@ 01753 789871 - B

business number 01753 789871
To delete phone field item number 4 94@
To delete phone items 1 to 3 91-3@
Display phone fields *PP
Ticketing
Description Format
Ticket at will on 10th May. Queue category must be included 7TAW/00/10MAY
Already Ticketed 7T/
Ticket at will with validating carrier 7TAW/00/18NOV-CLH
Ticket Option Date of 28th Dec. Queue category must be included 7TAX/00/28DEC
Ticket Option date with additional free text 7TAX/00/12FEB//CFM.

WITH. PAX
To change the ticketing field 7@TAW/01/28MAY
Delete the ticketing field 7@
Display ticketing field *TK

Form of Payment
Description Format

4
Cash 5$CA
Check 5$CK
Non Ref (non-refundable without reference to the 5$AN

issuing agency)
Miscellaneous 5$MS/Free Text
Credit card VI123456789012345 with customer 5$CCVI123456789012345P0515

Present, expiry 05/15
(Use N instead of P if customer Not Present.)
Credit card VI123456789012345, customer not 5$CCVI123456789012345NP0512*SOF

present, signature on file
To change the form of payment to show cash 5$@#5$CA
Delete the form of payment field 5$@
Display the form of payment field *FP
Email
Description Format
Add a client email address for first passenger / only 5-MTT*JOE.MANNERS@

passenger TRAVELPORT.COM
Add an email address for passenger 2.2 5-MTTN2.2*EMILY.JONES@ HOTMAIL.COM
Add additional email address for passenger 2.2 5-MTAN2.2*STEVE.HOWARD

@YAHOO.COM
Change the 1st email address 51@-MTT* SARA.MOSS@LABTECH.COM
Change additional email for passenger 1.2 52@-MTAN 1.2*ANDY.CORK

@TRAVELPORT.COM
Delete first email address prior to initial end 51@-MTT

transaction
Display all the address fields – billing, delivery and *MA

email

5
General Remarks
Description Format
General Remark including agent initials (AR) and date. 5 ADVSD PAX FARE NON REFUNDABLE AR
20OCT08
Modify general remark line 2 52@ADVISED PAX 50 PERCENT CANC FEE

ON TICKET
Delete remark 1 51@
Delete remarks 2 through to 3 52-3@
Display the general remarks *M
Unique Remarks
Description Format
Historical Remark (Z) 5.ZPAX DECLINED LOWER FARE SP

20OCT14
Remark relating to specific subject (car hire) 5.CCAR HIRE ARRANGED BY PAX SP
20OCT14
Change first historical remark 5.Z1@ NEW MESSAGE
Change second ‘C’ remark 5.C2@NEW MESSAGE
Delete second historical remark 5.Z2@
Delete third ‘H’ remark 5.H3@
Display all unique remarks *U
Display just historical remarks *UZ
Billing Address
Description Format
Billing address. Each line must be separated with a # 5-CB ABC LTD#5-CB ARKRIGHT HOUSE#5-
and then the 5-CB typed again CB JAMES STREET#5-CB LONDON#5-CB
WA4 6AB
Change second line of address 52@-CB FAIRVIEW HOUSE
To delete an entire billing address 5@-CB/ALL
To delete the third line of address 53@-CB
To display billing address *MA (The billing address can be

displayed together
with delivery addresses and email
addresses.)

6
Delivery Address
Description Format
Delivery address. Each line 5-CDMR A JACOBS#5-CD RECEPTION#5-CD GROUND FLOOR#5-CD

must be separated with a # SHELL BUILDING#5-CD MANCHESTER
and then the 5-CD typed
again.
Change third line of address 53@-CD SECOND FLOOR
To delete an entire delivery 5@-CD/ALL

address
To delete the third line of 53@-CD

address
Delete an entire delivery D.@

address
Delete the third sub-field D.@3*

Display delivery address *MA (The delivery address can be displayed together
with billing addresses and email addresses)
Frequent Flyer
Description Format
Enter UA card for passenger 1.1 to segment 1 3S1N1.1FQTVUA12334
Enter KL card for passenger 1.1 for PNR with NW segments 3SSRFQTVNWHK/KL1234567
89-1.1
Delete all frequent flyer numbers 31@
Special Service Requests
Description Format
SSR item (VGML) for passenger 3.1 all segments 3SAN3.1VGML
Advise airline Passenger 2.2 is a child 3SAN2.2CHLD/12MAY10
Advise airline Passenger 2.1 is an infant 3SAN1.1INFT-2.1/18SEP13
Transmit manual SSR with ticket numbers (all 3SAN1.2TKNM00112345678901

segments)
Other Service requests (OTHS messages to 3SSROTHSAINN2 NEWLYWEDS

carrier)
Delete SSR item 2 (no message generated to 32@

airline)
Delete range of SSR (no message generated to 32-5@

7
airline)
Cancel SSR item 2 (send message to airline and 32.XX

should be used when status of SSR is HK or KK)
Change single SSR 31@SSROTHSUANN1 ON HONEYMOON
Change Segment status on a range 31-4.HK
Display SSR & OSI information *G
Other Service Requests
Description Format
OSI for VIP 3 OSI CX GODDARD/JANE DIRECTOR SWIRES

GROUP HONG KONG
Advise CX of home contact details 3OSI CX CTCH 004435659595
Message to KL advising that the total number of 3OSI KL TCP4 BROWN/SARAHMISS LOCATOR
passengers traveling together is 4, and details of 123ABC
other party.
Modify OSI item 2 with new text 32@OSI KL TCP3 BROWN/SARAH MISS
LOCATOR ABC123
To delete item 1 (no message generated to 31@

airline)
To delete items 3 to 5 33-5@
Display OSI & SSR information *G
Advanced Seat Assignment
Description Format
Display seat availability map for segment 2 42*
Assign seats 19AB for segment 2 4RS2$19AB
Display seat characteristics/codes HELP STMAPC
Generic request no smoking aisle all segments 4RA
Reserve for segment 1 only, all passengers, 4RS1

default seat type (aisle)
Reserve for segment 3 only, all passengers, 4RS3$W

window
Reserve seats for all segments, passengers 1.1 4RA-1.1/3.1

and 3.1 only, default seat type (aisle)

8
Change assigned seat SSR item 1 to 25A 4R@1$25A
Change generic assigned seat, SSR item 3 to a 4R@3$W

window seat
To cancel all seats for all passengers and all 4RX

segments
To cancel seats for segment 2, all passengers 4RX2
To cancel seats for segment 1, passenger 2.1 4RX1-2.1

only
Display seat data *S
Booking an Itinerary
Description Format
Sell 1 seat C class from availability line 2 01C2
Sell 1 seat Y class from availability line 1 and J class from connecting 01Y1J2
flight on line 2
Sell 3 seats in S class from availability line 4 and include connecting 03S4*
flights
Waitlist 1 seat Y class from availability line 2 0L1Y2

For other priority codes see: HELP WAITLIST
Manually sell 2 seats in Y class on specified flight 0CO29Y1DECLHREWRNN2
Manually sell flight on waitlist 2 seats in Y class on specified flight 0CO29Y1DECLHREWRLL2
Open segment with 2 seats in Y class for specified city pair and date 0TGOPENY12MARLHRBKKPS
2
Open segment with 2 seats in Y class for specified city pair- no date 0CXOPENYHKGBKKPS2
Surface segment 0A
Insert surface segment after sector 2 /2/0A
Add passive segment, one seat in C class from specified line number 01C3@MK
Add passive segment, two seats in Y class from connecting flights 02Y1*@MK
specified line number
Add passive segment for specified flight 0CO29Y1DECLHREWRMK2
Move segment 6 to follow segment 3 /3S6
Move segment 4 – 6 to follow segment 2 /2S4-6
Cancel the whole itinerary XI
Cancel segment 2 X2
9
Cancel segments 2 to 4 X2-4
Cancel segments 2 and 4 X2/4
Cancel segment 1 and rebook same flight on 3 June X1#0/3JUN
Cancel segments 2 and 4 and rebook same flights in H class X2/4#0/H
Cancel all air segments and rebook all flights in B class XA#0/B
Cancel all air segments and rebook all flights B class on 25JUN XA#0/B25JUN
Ending and Ignoring Transaction
Description Format
End transaction E
End transaction and re-retrieve the PNR ER
Ignore transaction I
Ignore transaction and re-retrieve the PNR in original state IR
Retrieving a PNR
Description Format
Record Locator 2VP45T
Surname from your own pseudo city *-DRAKE
Surname when spelling unknown (first 2 characters only) *-KE*
Surname and date *-MASON#15DEC
To retrieve a PNR made by a branch office of your agency B–BARNARD
To retrieve a PNR made by a specific branch office *ABC-SMITH

10
Worldspan Fares
Fare Display
Description Format
Basic input for city pair 4FMANAM
Re-display the active fare display 4F*
Specified carrier 4FMANAMS-KL
Specified booking class 4FLONMAD#B
Specified carrier and booking class (carrier must 4FJNBPAR-SA#C

come first)
Passenger type –child 4FROMYYZCNN
Passenger type and specified carrier 4FLONNBOYTH-KQ
Fares in NUCs, with mandatory carrier 4FLONFRA@N-BA
SecuRate (private) fares only 4FLONMCOSR
SecuRate (private) and normal fares 4FLONMCOSRN
SecuRate (private) and excursion fares 4FLONMCOSRX
With outbound and return dates 4FLONMUC/L12MAY/R20MAY
One way fare with specified carrier 4FBCNJNB.OW-IB
Published round the world 4FMSPMSPRW
Global indicator with specified carrier 4FFRASYD-LH.EH
Fare Display Continuation Formats
Description Format
Redisplay fare display 4F*
Update to show new departure and return dates. 4F*/L25AUG/R30AUG
Update to show AA, UA and CO fares. 4F*-AA-UA-CO

Note: When more than 1 carrier is used Worldspan
reverts to a Moneysaver fare display
Update to show fares for a specific class of service, 4F*#L

(in this case L class)
Update passenger type code (child) 4F*CNN
Display associated fare and passenger type codes 4F*P
Update to show fares in NUC 4F*@N

11
Update to change departure city 4F@DEDI
Update to change arrival city 4F@AYUL
Fare Rules
Description Format
Display mini rule for fare on line 2 4F.R2
Display menu of fare rule categories for line 1 4F.R1#MENU
Display specific fare rule categories for fare on line 4F.R4#ADV/MIN/MAX

4 (maximum 5 categories)
Display all fare rules for the specified line number 4F.R2#ALL
Display brief fare rules for line 5 4F.R5#BRI
Display ticketing fare rules categories for line 3 4F.R3#TKT
Fare Routing
Description Format
Display routing category for fare on line 1 4F.R1#RTG
Displays routing for fare on line 1 of a fares display 4FR1
Fare Booking Classes
Description Format
Display the class of service to book for carrier AA 4F.B2-AA

for the fare on line 2 of the display
Pricing 4P
Description Format
Basic pricing entry all segments 4P
Price passenger as a child 4PPCNN
Price for segments 2 and 3 only 4PS2-3
Price segments 1 and 6 only for a child 4PPCNN#S1/6
Price in a specific booking class 4P.C
Pricing 4PLF

12
Description Format
Price lowest available fare for applicable cabin 4PLF
With Direct Access 4PLF@
Price and rebook lowest available fare for 4PLFB

applicable cabin (add @ For Direct Access)
Price and rebook lowest available fare for 4PLFBS1/4

applicable cabin, segments 1 and 4 only
Price lowest available fare any cabin 4PLFC
Price and rebook lowest available fare any cabin 4PLFCB
Pricing 4PQ
Description Format
Quote to the front of PNR all segments 4PQ
Copy ticket record and quote to front of PNR 4PQC
Copy ticket record 1 and quote to front of PNR 4PQCTR1
Copy All ticket records and quote them to the front 4PQCTRALL
of the PNR
Pricing 4P*
Description Format
Create ticket record all segments 4P*
Create ticket record segment 3 only 4P*S3
Create ticket record for 1 adult, and 1 child aged 8 4P*PADT/C08
Create ticket record for segments 1 and 4 only 4P*S1/4#TR

(when Multiple TRs exist)
Working with Stored Fares
Description Format
Display single ticket record 4*
Display specific ticket record when multiple records 4*TR1

exist

13
Delete single ticket record 4P*@
Delete specific ticket record 4-TR@2
Delete All ticket records 4-TR@ALL
Display single fare quote 4*Q
Display multiple fare quotes *FQ
Delete the stored fare quote (stores in history) 4PQ@
Delete the stored fare quote for specific ticket 4PQ@TR3

record
Delete all stored fare quotes 4PQ@TRALL
e-Pricing (Power Pricing)
Description Format
Power Pricing (from PNR) Optional @ For Direct 4PLI

Access
Itineraries with BA and SN only 4PLI@/ABA-SN
Only itineraries with Specified alliance. 4PLI#-/*A

-/*A Star Alliance
-/*O Oneworld
-/*S Skyteam
Direct services only (Direct Access) 4PLID@
Multi airport cities search (when city, airport codes 4PLIM

the same, e.g. BFS or HOU)
Price for specific passenger fare types 4PLI@PADT/CNN
Price for specific passenger fare types, with 4PLI@PADT/CNN#/$

breakdown on front screen
Rebook the required pricing option 4PLIB2
Shows fare break down and gives access to the mini 4PLI*F1
rule
Redisplay results screen 4PLI*
e-Pricing (Power Shopper)
Description Format
Power shopper basic entry $P1JUNLONMAD/R8JUN

14
Circle trip journey $P1JUNBKKHKG/R7JUNSIN/R10JUNTYO/R15

JUNBKK
Surface sector. Optional @ included for Direct $P@10JANLONDXB/R20JANAUHLON

Access
Specified carriers $P15JUNLHRJFK/R20JUNLHR#/AVS-UA
Direct flights only $P06APRSNNNYC#D
Two passengers $P7APRAMSJNB/R20APRAMS#P2
Specific passenger type codes Displays total fare for $P@1MAYBFSSFO#PADT/CNN

all PTCs
Displays fares for each PTC on all alternates $P@1MAYBFSSFO#PADT/CNN#/$
Securate (private)and public fares $P28MARLONPAR/R5APRLON#FSR
Securate (private) fares only $P16JULDUBNBO/R25JULDUB#FSR.SR
Rebook the required pricing option 4PLIB2
Shows fare break down and gives access to the mini 4PLI*F1
rule
Redisplay results screen $P*
Flex 1 Day
Description Format
Checks 1 day before and after Departure date #/FD
Checks 1 day before and after Return date #/FR
Checks 1 day before and after Both departure and #/FB

return dates
Flex More Days
Description Format
Checks 2 days before and after departure #/FD2

date
Checks 1 day before and after return date #/FR1
Checks 3 days before and after departure #/FB3

and return dates

15
Checks 1 day before and 3 days after #/FD1-3

departure date
Checks 2 days before and return date #/FR2-0
Checks 1 day before departure and return #/FB1-2

date, and 2 days after departure and
return date. For example if dates used
were outbound 15SEP, and return 24SEP,
the dates offered would include outbound
on 14-17SEP and inbound on 23-26SEP.
Flex Airports
Description Format
Alternative arrival airports (up to 6) $P7APRLON.DXB/AUH./R12APR
Alternative departure airports (up to 6) $P18NOV.GLA/EDI.BRU/R23NOV
Alternative departure and arrival airports $P6MAY.FRA/DUS..BKK/KUL/SIN./R22MAY

(up to 6 of each)
Flex O&D
Description Format
Alternative departure airports within a 100 $P11DECLHRMAD/R18DEC#/RD-100

miles of Heathrow
Alternative arrival airports within a 50 mile $P25AUGCDGMIA/R4SEP#/RA-50

radius of Miami
Alternative departure and arrival airports $P13SEPLGWJFK/R23SEP#/RB-100K

within 100 kilometers of London Gatwick
and New York JFK
Alternative departure airports within 60 $P21MARFRALAX/R4APR#/RD-60#/RA-100

miles of Frankfurt, and arrival airports
within 100 miles of Los Angeles
Flex Weekend
Description Format
Weekend trips in May $P05MAYMANPAR/R#/FWKD

16
Queues
Working with Queues
Description Format
Display a count of PNRs on queue QCT*ALL
Access queue 2 Q/2
Access Queue 1, category 1 Q/1*C2
Access Queue 30, category 0, date range 3 Q/30*C0*D3
Access Queue 9, category 2 at a Bridge/Branch Q/xxx/9*C2

location (xxx is SID/pseudo)
Exit queue, ignoring current PNR QX#I
Exit queue, end transaction on current PNR QX#E
Queue Remove QR
Queue booking to queue 50 own pseudo QEP/50
Queue to queue 50 specified pseudo ABC QEP/ABC/50
Updating Flights, SSR, Seats
Description Format
End and Work the segments in the PNR EW
End and Work the segments, and Redisplay the EWR

PNR
End and Work the segments and update the GFAX EWG
items
End and Work the segments, update the GFAX EWGR

items, and Redisplay the PNR
Divide PNR
Description Format
Divide passenger 2.1 D2.1
File divided PNR F

17
Procedure to Divide
1. Divide applicable passenger(s). D2.1
2. Make changes to divided PNR
3. File divided Booking F
4. End Original Booking E
Cloning PNRs
Description Format
End and Clone itinerary, same dates and number in EC

party
End and Clone itinerary, and customer information, EC*A

same dates
End and Clone itinerary for 2 people EC2
End and Clone itinerary changing class to J ECCJ
End and Clone itinerary for 1 day later ECD1
End and Clone itinerary for 1 day earlier ECD-1
End and Clone itinerary for 1 week later ECW1
End and Clone itinerary for 1 week earlier ECW-1
PNR History
Description Format
Display all history *H
List of History codes HELP *HISTC
List of parts of history which can be displayed HELP * HPARTS

independently
Global Reference System

18
Description Format
Weather for specific city by code GWEA LON
Weather for specific city by name GWEA MADRID
Current weather at airport (airport code must be FWV JFK

used)
Currency Information for Egypt GCUR EGYPT
Airline Information Pages (Airline code followed by G/AIR/KL0

0)
Hotel Information Pages (Hotel chain code followed G/HTL/MCQ

by Q)
Car Information Page (Car company code followed G/CAR/ZIZ

by Z)
Go to specific page G/P6
Go to specific line G/L25
Go to specific page and line G/P6/L25
Timatic
Description Format
Display Timatic index GT4
Display Timatic fill-in format for visa information GT4/1
Display Timatic fill-in format for health information GT4/2
Display Timatic help GT4/H
Timatic Scrolling
Description Format
Request next page (MD) TIPN
Page back (MU) TIPB
Request last page (MB) TIPL
Request first page (MT) TIPF

19
HELP
Description Format
Display HELP Index of subjects beginning with T HELP T
Display HELP Index for Fares HELP FARES
Display HELP pages for format code 7T HELP 7T
Display INFO Index of subjects beginning with A INFO A
Display INFO Index for SEATS INFO SEATS
Display INFO pages for format code 5- INFO 5

20
In addition to making required air, car and hotel reservations, it is a travel agent’s
responsibility to provide travel-related information to their customers. This could
include visa and health requirements.
This appendix will explain how to:
 Access information contained in the Global Reference System
 Use Timatic to provide travel information to your customers
Global Reference System (GRS)

The Global Reference System is an automated information system and contains
information about suppliers, weather and currency.
Note: You may not be able to display all items listed as some pages have been
withdrawn.
GRS Formats
G/AIR/TP0 Airline Information Pages (Airline code followed

by 0)
G/HTL/MCQ Hotel Information Pages (Hotel chain code

followed by Q)
G/CAR/ZIZ Car Information Page (Car company code

followed by Z)
G/P6 Go to specific page
G/L25 Go to specific line
Display Electronic travel authority system.

(ETAS)
Displaying airline information page
Many airlines have their own information pages in GRS. They use these to provide
information about their services, procedures and special promotions.
Information is loaded directly into the system by the airline. However, many airlines
now direct you to their web site, which is more up to date.
Note: Not all airlines use this facility.
To display the information page for Singapore Airlines, enter: G/AIR/SQ0

1
Screen response:
Specific line numbers may be selected using the access entry, for example to display
information on the commission policy enter: G/L65.
The above screen response is page 1, additional pages may be available, either click
More or use the format G/P2 to display page 2.
Working with Timatic

HELP TIM
ASK Answer ID 19636
Timatic is an information system that provides you with travel information regarding
visa, health, customs and currency requirements for countries throughout the world.
The Timatic database is provided by an organization based in the Netherlands.
You can either use a fill-in format in the Terminal Window or access the Timatic
script from the Information menu.
Visa information
Many countries have visa requirements for entry which may vary depending on
whether travel is for business reasons or for tourism.
Take the following steps to search for visa information using the Script.
1. Access the Timatic script, either from the Information menu or use
the Quick Key #TIM
2. Select Visa Information

2
Screen example:
4. Select the Nationality and Destination.
Note: Hold the Ctrl key and click to select multiple destinations.
5. Click the arrow icon to the left of Nationality to add Transit

points and if the traveler is a resident alien, select the country.
6. Click Continue.

3
Health information
There are health recommendations for entry into many countries.
You can use Timatic to provide health information for your customer.
Take the following steps to access health information for your customer using the fill
in format in the Terminal Window.
1. Display the information services menu.
Enter: GT4
Screen response:
2. Append the number of the desired service, e.g. for Health

information enter: GT4/2
3. Add the country of embarkation, at least one destination and any

transit countries. Optionally, specify if the passenger has recently
visited any other countries.
Note: You may use 3-letter city codes or 2-letter country codes to
identify relevant countries in each item. Ensure INSERT button is
switched off prior to completing the fill in screen.

4
Note: Partial display.
Timatic scrolling
Scrolling entries in Timatic are unique. They are listed below:
Scrolling Format: Explanation:
TIPN Request next page (MD)
TIPB Page back (MU)
TIPL Request last page (MB)
TIPF Request first page (MT)
TIPG Redisplay current page
Country information
You may display a complete list of city codes for a specific country.
To display a list of city codes for Denmark (DK), enter: GT4/5

5
Screen response:
You can add either a 2-character country code or a 3-character city or airport code.
Move down (MD) to view all information

Note: Use the decode functionality in Travelport Worldspan to identify individual
cities and airports.
Timatic Formats
The following are examples of additional Timatic entries.
TI–HELP Display Timatic help
TI–NEWS Display Timatic news
TI–MF Display fill-in format for full text information
TI–MA Display fill-in format for visa and health

information

6

TPSP 1P Professional Course Master Document v8.2

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

TPSP 1P Professional Course Master Document v8.2

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Travelport Worldspan

Using Travelport Smartpoint 8.2

For Travel Professionals

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Date Version Authors Reason / Description of Change

January V8.0 Learning 8.0 Includes enhancements to seat maps

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Module 1: Getting Started

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Welcome to Worldspan for Travel Professionals using the Travelport Smartpoint

Learning Travelport Worldspan Class Objectives

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Moving to Worldspan Class Objectives

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Launching Travelport Smartpoint and Signing-on to Travelport Worldspan

Login ID/Password During the setup process, a Login ID is created for

As a security feature, Travelport Smartpoint allows

If you enter your password incorrectly five times

Tool Kit The Tool Kit provides a link to information relating to

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

temporary password you will be prompted to change

Travelport Smartpoint provides:

Logging in automatically launches the Travelport Smartpoint application. You need

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Creating your Password

Creating your Keyword

Switching between Travelport Smartpoint and Worldspan Go!

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Moving between Terminal Work Areas

The work area that is active is highlighted in white (area C).

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Using Command Shortcuts

F3 0A (book ARNK segment - Arrival Not Known

F4 Clears all Res Windows

F5 Display History Tab

F7 Scroll through the Res Windows

F8 Moves between Res Windows in a split screen

F9 Clears active Res Window

F10 E (End Transaction)

F11 Move Up (MU)

F12 Move Down (MD)

Tab Moves the cursor to the next tab stop

Shift + Tab Moves the cursor to the previous tab stop

Language Translator App

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Working with Macros

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Hover over Office Macros to display the list.

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Example screen for Office Macros:

Working in the Smartscreen

From the My Preferences tabs, select Theme

The options for the Smartscreen display:

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Custom screen size

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

To view the calendar, select the calendar icon.

When the calendar is re-opened, it remembers the last configuration.

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

Worldspan for Travel Professionals using Travelport Smartpoint v8.2

The menu items.